Adc Air Client v4.25.11 Ops Install Ref 20151202 2

Operations and Installation
ADC™ Air Client

v4.25.11
7-August-2015
Revision: Release
ADC™ Air Client v4.25.11 Operations and Installation
Publication Information
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp.
Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential.
Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this
publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other
than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of
this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This
publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to
which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in
equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve
the performance of the product.
Trademarks
Product names and other appropriate trademarks, e.g. D-Series™, Invenio®, PowerSmart®, Versio™ are
trademarks or trade names of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and
trade names are the property of their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For domestic and international location
and contact information, visit our Contact page
(http://www.imaginecommunications.com/company/contact-us.aspx).
Support Contact Information

For domestic and international support contact information see:
• Support Contacts (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/how-buy/contact-us)
• Worldwide Support e-mail (service@imaginecommunications.com)
• Customer Community Portal (http://app.imaginecommunications.com/customercommunity)
• Warranty & Contract Information (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/customer-
care)
• Academy Training (http://www.imaginecommunicationsacademy.com)
• Product Manuals (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/product-manuals)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 2

ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Contents
Contents
Air Client Overview .............................................................................................. 14
About Air Client ...................................................................................................................................... 14
About Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPV6) .......................................................................................... 14
Minimum System Requirements ........................................................................................................ 14
About Playlists .................................................................................................................................... 15
About Events ...................................................................................................................................... 16
About Time Zones .............................................................................................................................. 20
About using Dual Output Video Cards ............................................................................................... 21
Air Client Desktop ................................................................................................................................... 21
Ribbon Toolbars...................................................................................................................................... 21
File Ribbon Tab ................................................................................................................................... 21
Edit Ribbon Tab .................................................................................................................................. 22
Events Ribbon Tab .............................................................................................................................. 23
Servers Ribbon Tab (for sites using Multi-server login) ..................................................................... 25
Resources Ribbon Tab ........................................................................................................................ 26
Properties Ribbon Tab ........................................................................................................................ 26
Tools Ribbon Tab ................................................................................................................................ 28
Window Ribbon Tab ........................................................................................................................... 28
Help Ribbon Tab ................................................................................................................................. 29
Quick Access Ribbon Tab .................................................................................................................... 29
Quick Access Toolbar .............................................................................................................................. 29
Right Click Menus ................................................................................................................................... 30
List Window Right Click Menu ............................................................................................................ 30
View List Right-Click Menu ................................................................................................................. 31
Control Panels......................................................................................................................................... 34
Hardware Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 34
Operator Control Panel (OCP) ............................................................................................................ 34
Software Control Panel ...................................................................................................................... 35
Transmission List Window ...................................................................................................................... 37
Air Focus/List Locked .......................................................................................................................... 37
Event Types ........................................................................................................................................ 38
Event Data Fields ................................................................................................................................ 39
Playlist Window ...................................................................................................................................... 39
ADC™ Air Client
Event Data Fields ................................................................................................................................ 39
Getting Started .................................................................................................... 42

To Launch Air Client ................................................................................................................................ 42
To Stop Air Client ................................................................................................................................ 43
Air Client User Authentication................................................................................................................ 43
Assigning an Administrator Password ................................................................................................ 43
Managing Server / MultiServer Connections ......................................................................................... 44
Limitations: ......................................................................................................................................... 44
Device Server Connections (No MultiServer Logon) .......................................................................... 45
To Connect to a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon) ..................................................................... 45
Disconnecting from a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon) ............................................................ 46
To Add/Edit/Remove/Scan Available Device Server Entries (w/ MultiServer Logon)........................ 47
Viewing Resources .................................................................................................................................. 48
To View a Full Resource List ............................................................................................................... 49
To View Device Status of a Server ...................................................................................................... 50
To View Lists available on a Device Server ......................................................................................... 51
To View Storage Devices available on a Device Server ...................................................................... 51
To View Switchers available on a Device Server ................................................................................ 52
Traffic-Generated Lists ........................................................................................................................... 53
To Save the Desktop ............................................................................................................................... 54
Help and About Information .................................................................................................................. 54
To Launch the Help System ................................................................................................................ 54
To View About Information ................................................................................................................ 54
Managing Window Layouts and Colors .................................................................................................. 55
To Change Window Skin Color Schemes ............................................................................................ 55
To Change Window Layouts ............................................................................................................... 55
Aero WindowsTheme Issues .............................................................................................................. 55
To Change the Windows Aero Effect Theme ..................................................................................... 55
About Operator Control Panel (OCP) Functions ..................................................................................... 56
To Force Reinitialize the OCP ............................................................................................................. 56
Locking the Operator Control Panel (OCP)......................................................................................... 56
Using the Shift Function ..................................................................................................................... 57
Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................................................................ 57
A list of shortcut commands .............................................................................................................. 57
Running Air Client Offline ....................................................................................................................... 58
On-Air Playback Operations ................................................................................. 60

About On-Air Playback............................................................................................................................ 60
Automated V11 to V12 list translation utility .................................................................................... 60
ADC™ Air Client
To View an ON AIR List / Transmission List ............................................................................................ 61

To Build a Play List File............................................................................................................................ 62
To Save a Playlist file as Text .................................................................................................................. 63
To Export Playlist/Transmission List/Pull List file to CSV ........................................................................ 63
To perform an export to CSV.............................................................................................................. 64
To Open an Existing Playlist .................................................................................................................... 65
To Insert a Play List file to the Transmission List .................................................................................... 65
To Append a Play List file to the Transmission List................................................................................. 67
To Load a List .......................................................................................................................................... 68
To Run the Transmission List .................................................................................................................. 68
To Air a Live Event .................................................................................................................................. 70
Join an Event in Progress ........................................................................................................................ 71
To Preview Play ...................................................................................................................................... 71
Thread, Unthread, Recue an Event ........................................................................................................ 72
Unthread an event ............................................................................................................................. 72
Thread the event ................................................................................................................................ 72
Recue the event.................................................................................................................................. 72
Using the VTR Device Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 72
Using the VDCP Device Control Panel .................................................................................................... 74
To Set on Air Focus ................................................................................................................................. 75
Calculate Durations of Multiple Events .................................................................................................. 76
Find an ID ................................................................................................................................................ 76
Find Next Occurrence of an ID in a List .................................................................................................. 77
Managing Bookmarks ............................................................................................................................. 77
To Add / Remove a Bookmark............................................................................................................ 77
To Jump to a Bookmark ...................................................................................................................... 79
To Set a Hard Start Event........................................................................................................................ 79
To Toggle a Hard Start ........................................................................................................................ 79
Toggle Look Ahead ................................................................................................................................. 80
To Toggle Look Ahead ........................................................................................................................ 80
Managing List Confirmations .................................................................................................................. 80
Managing Secondary Events on a Playlist .............................................................................................. 80
To Show / Hide Secondary Events ...................................................................................................... 81
About Specifying which secondary events to show or hide ............................................................... 82
Managing Trigger Events ........................................................................................................................ 85
Function Configuration:...................................................................................................................... 85
Setting the Trigger Column parameter .............................................................................................. 85
Colors for Action events: .................................................................................................................... 86
Displaying list caption with the name of Master list: ......................................................................... 87

ADC™ Air Client
Manage the Operation Log..................................................................................................................... 87

To Open the Operation Log in Air Client ............................................................................................ 88
To Save the Operation Log as a Textfile in Air Client ......................................................................... 88
To Export the Textfile Operation Log ................................................................................................. 88
Using Air Protect ..................................................................................................................................... 89
To Use Air Protect .............................................................................................................................. 89
To Check Switcher Control ..................................................................................................................... 89
Reviewing Tally status information in the AsRun log text file ................................................................ 90
Tally: On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s) of the list ....................................... 90
Log format .......................................................................................................................................... 92
Extended Play Mix/Wipes Early .............................................................................................................. 93
Example: Automatic Duration Update on the Playlist ....................................................................... 94
Displaying AFD and BarData Values in a Playlist .................................................................................... 95
Create an AFD column in the PlayList ................................................................................................ 95
To Display BarData Values in a Playlist............................................................................................... 97
Implementing ID Video ARC Override .................................................................................................. 100
Create a Custom AFD Override column in the PlayList .................................................................... 101
Manage AFD Override in a Playlist ................................................................................................... 103
Using the Zoom Window ...................................................................................................................... 104
To launch the Zoom Window ........................................................................................................... 104
Zoom Window status bar ................................................................................................................. 104
Expandable Windows ....................................................................................................................... 106
Using SyncSkip ...................................................................................................................................... 107
About the SyncSkip command ......................................................................................................... 107
Required Conditions ......................................................................................................................... 108
Example Operation........................................................................................................................... 108
SyncSkip informational warnings ..................................................................................................... 112
Dynamic List Selection for API triggering ............................................................................................. 112
Triggered Lists Selection window in Air Client ................................................................................. 112
Hint with enabled triggered lists ...................................................................................................... 114
Limitation with Triggered lists and a Playlist window ...................................................................... 115
Storing selected lists within an event structure ............................................................................... 115
Playlist Editing Operations ................................................................................. 117

To Open an Existing Playlist .................................................................................................................. 117
Saving a Play List File ............................................................................................................................ 117
Inserting Primary Events....................................................................................................................... 117
To Insert a Primary Event ................................................................................................................. 118
Inserting Multi-Segment Events ........................................................................................................... 118
To Insert a Segment.......................................................................................................................... 119
ADC™ Air Client
Managing Duplicate Single Spot and Multi Segment IDs ................................................................. 119
Insert Secondary Events ....................................................................................................................... 120
To Insert a Secondary Event ............................................................................................................. 120
Configuring an Editable Secondary Event ........................................................................................ 125
Manage Back-Timed Events ................................................................................................................. 134
Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed ...................................................................................... 135
To Specify ‘PT’ Event Type syntax .................................................................................................... 136
Manage End-Timed Events ................................................................................................................... 136
When Enabling a Key ........................................................................................................................ 136
When Event Duration Matches the Offset ....................................................................................... 137
Secondary Events that can be End-Timed ........................................................................................ 137
To Specify ‘PT’ Event Type syntax .................................................................................................... 138
Enable a List Freeze .............................................................................................................................. 138
Option 1: Using a secondary Backtimed System event (bSYS) ......................................................... 138
Option 2: Using a Secondary System event (sSYS) ........................................................................... 139
Enable a Data Event (sDAT) .................................................................................................................. 139
Data Event Commands ..................................................................................................................... 139
Add a Transition Effect ......................................................................................................................... 140
Cut, Copy, Paste Playlist Events ............................................................................................................ 141
To Cut an Event from a Playlist ........................................................................................................ 141
To Copy an Event from a Playlist ...................................................................................................... 142
To Paste Cut / Copied Event(s) ......................................................................................................... 142
Copy/Paste Cells ............................................................................................................................... 143
Clear / Delete Playlist Events ................................................................................................................ 143
To Clear a Block of Events from a Playlist ........................................................................................ 143
Moving Events within a List and Between Lists.................................................................................... 144
Open the source List(s)..................................................................................................................... 144
To Drag-and-Drop a Single Event ..................................................................................................... 144
To Drag-and-Drop Multiple events .................................................................................................. 145
Move Events using Copy / Paste ...................................................................................................... 145
Revise Playlist Event Field Text ............................................................................................................. 145
Clear Done Events................................................................................................................................. 146
Replace an Event ID .............................................................................................................................. 146
Ripple Time ........................................................................................................................................... 147
To Manually Ripple Times ................................................................................................................ 147
Checking if a List is Timed Out .......................................................................................................... 148
Managing Pull Lists ............................................................................................................................... 148
Review Missing Events using the Pull List Window .......................................................................... 148
GMT Pull Lists ................................................................................................................................... 150

ADC™ Air Client
Show/Hide Columns in a Pull List ..................................................................................................... 151

Add DBStatus Field as a Column ...................................................................................................... 152
Recycle Bin Window ............................................................................................................................. 152
To use the Recycle Bin ...................................................................................................................... 153
Empty Recycle Bin option ................................................................................................................. 153
Warning Box when the Recycle Bin exceeds 2,000 events .............................................................. 154
To enable use of "RECYCLE.lst" ........................................................................................................ 154
To Configure Colors .......................................................................................................................... 154
To Configure a Purge ........................................................................................................................ 155
Managing Resource Windows ............................................................................ 156

Robust Database Search Window ........................................................................................................ 156
To Search for a Record ..................................................................................................................... 156
Managing Search Results ................................................................................................................. 159
To Copy a Record to a Transmission List .......................................................................................... 163
Drag and Drop a Record to a Playlist or Transmission List ............................................................... 163
Device Status Window .......................................................................................................................... 163
To Open the Device Status Window................................................................................................. 164
To Filter Device Status Rows/Columns............................................................................................. 165
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................... 169
Device Storage Window ....................................................................................................................... 170
To Open the Device Storage Window .............................................................................................. 170
To Refresh a Window ....................................................................................................................... 171
Protecting and Removing Spots ....................................................................................................... 172
To Check or Search for a record ....................................................................................................... 172
Moving Spots and Records to Playlists ............................................................................................. 174
More Info Window ............................................................................................................................... 174
To Display the More Info Window ................................................................................................... 175
Video Window ...................................................................................................................................... 175
To Display the Video Window .......................................................................................................... 175
Managing Compile Lists ..................................................................................... 176

About the Compiler Option .................................................................................................................. 176
Creating a Compile List ......................................................................................................................... 176
To view the individual spots of a compile tape ................................................................................ 176
To remove all spots from a compile list window ............................................................................. 176
To prepare a list for compiling ......................................................................................................... 176
Compiling a Compile List ...................................................................................................................... 177
Recompiling a Compile List .............................................................................................................. 179
Other Compile List Functions ............................................................................................................... 179
ADC™ Air Client
Error Management ............................................................................................ 180

About Displaying Errors ........................................................................................................................ 180
To Simultaneously View All Air Client Errors .................................................................................... 180
To View Error Logs............................................................................................................................ 180
To Display Errors............................................................................................................................... 180
Clearing Error Messages from the Air Client Desktop .......................................................................... 181
To Clear Error Messages ................................................................................................................... 181
List Validation ....................................................................................................................................... 181
List Validation window ..................................................................................................................... 181
Emergency Operations....................................................................................... 183

Main/Backup Changeover .................................................................................................................... 183
Recovery Steps ................................................................................................................................. 183
Other Considerations ....................................................................................................................... 185
System Power Up and Down Sequences .............................................................................................. 185
Automated Recording ........................................................................................ 187

Record Lists........................................................................................................................................... 187
Key Elements .................................................................................................................................... 187
Running the Record List ................................................................................................................... 188
Record List Tips/Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 188
Secondary Records ............................................................................................................................... 189
Key Elements .................................................................................................................................... 189
Inputting Secondary Record Events ................................................................................................. 189
Secondary Record Entry Guidelines ................................................................................................. 189
Basic Functions of the Secondary Record ........................................................................................ 189
Secondary Recording to Video Disk ................................................................................................. 190
Secondary Recording to Tape........................................................................................................... 190
Database Logging.................................................................................................................................. 191
To Activate the Update Database option ......................................................................................... 191
Barcode Event .................................................................................................... 192

Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 192
VTR Playlist Assignment........................................................................................................................ 193
VTR as Assigned Device .................................................................................................................... 193
VTR as a Floater Machine ................................................................................................................. 193
Barcode Event – Step by Step............................................................................................................... 193
Barcode Event Scenarios ...................................................................................................................... 194
Scenario 1: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has an automation database record ................... 194

ADC™ Air Client
Scenario 2: Using Barcode Event for a tape that does not have an automation database record
(Manually entering SOM) ................................................................................................................. 195
Scenario 3: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has bad or no timecode ...................................... 195
Logging .............................................................................................................. 198

Error Logs.............................................................................................................................................. 198
To Display an Error Log..................................................................................................................... 198
AsRun Logs............................................................................................................................................ 199
To Display AsRun Logs ...................................................................................................................... 199
WinCmms .......................................................................................................... 201

About Traffic Translator ....................................................................................................................... 201
Using the Translator Program .............................................................................................................. 201
WinCmms Setup ................................................................................................................................... 201
To Put a Shortcut on the Desktop .................................................................................................... 201
To Change the Default Directories and Options .............................................................................. 202
Global Media Transfer (GMT) ............................................................................ 203

About GMT ........................................................................................................................................... 203
GMT Transfer Modes........................................................................................................................ 203
GMT Components ............................................................................................................................ 204
A Simple GMT System ...................................................................................................................... 205
ADC AirFlex ........................................................................................................ 206

About ADC AirFlex ................................................................................................................................ 206
An Overview of Components ........................................................................................................... 207
ADC FlexSync ..................................................................................................... 209

About the Air Client ADC FlexSync Option ........................................................................................... 209
Implementation................................................................................................................................ 209
Deployment and Workflows ............................................................................................................ 209
LinkList ............................................................................................................... 211

About LinkList ....................................................................................................................................... 211
Air Client Installation ......................................................................................... 212

Client Notes .......................................................................................................................................... 212
About v11 Client Validation.............................................................................................................. 212
Rev-Lock Condition with version 12.21/4.21 release....................................................................... 212
Start up Switches .............................................................................................................................. 212
Network IP ........................................................................................................................................ 213

ADC™ Air Client
Upgrade Note ................................................................................................................................... 213

To Install Air Client on a Workstation................................................................................................... 213
Managing the Desktop Shortcut for Air Client ..................................................................................... 214
Limitations: ....................................................................................................................................... 214
To Manage the shortcut on the Desktop ......................................................................................... 215
ODBC Connections and Networking................................................................................................. 216
Configuring System Components ....................................................................... 217

Configuring Multiple Device Server Connections ................................................................................. 217
Limitations: ....................................................................................................................................... 217
Configuring List Options ....................................................................................................................... 217
Configuring Window Column Settings.................................................................................................. 225
Managing Column Templates ............................................................................................................... 227
To Save a Column Template ............................................................................................................. 227
To Apply a Column Template or Reset to Default Settings .............................................................. 228
Configuring Window Font Settings ....................................................................................................... 228
Configuring Event and Window Parameter Colors............................................................................... 229
Enhanced Color Codes...................................................................................................................... 229
To specify Event Colors .................................................................................................................... 230
Managing Color Templates................................................................................................................... 233
To Save a Color Template ................................................................................................................. 233
To Manage Colors and Apply Across all Transmission Lists ............................................................. 235
Configuring System Properties ........................................................................... 236

Environment Properties ....................................................................................................................... 236
AsRun log Properties ............................................................................................................................ 246
Setting Hardware Control Panel Properties ......................................................................................... 250
To Configure the Operator Control Panel (OCP) .............................................................................. 250
Cabling .............................................................................................................................................. 255
Setting Software Control Panel Properties........................................................................................... 255
Valid IDs ................................................................................................................................................ 258
List Names ............................................................................................................................................ 259
Auto List Save ....................................................................................................................................... 260
Auto Bin Save........................................................................................................................................ 263
Error Reporting Properties ................................................................................................................... 263
About Errors in Multi-Login Mode ................................................................................................... 265
Desktop Display Properties .................................................................................................................. 265
Saving the Desktop ........................................................................................................................... 266
LinkList .................................................................................................................................................. 266
More Info .............................................................................................................................................. 267
ADC™ Air Client
Hide Secondary Event Keys .................................................................................................................. 267

Configuration of the Hide Secondary Event keys ............................................................................. 268
Toolbar Builder ..................................................................................................................................... 270
To configure the Quick Access Ribbon Toolbar on the desktop ...................................................... 270
Configuring Time Zone Offsets ............................................................................................................. 273
To setup TimeZone Offsets .............................................................................................................. 274
Operation Log ....................................................................................................................................... 277
Set Tally ................................................................................................................................................ 278
SeaLevel Drivers to Support ADC "Tally" Function ........................................................................... 278
To Set a Tally..................................................................................................................................... 278
MI Additional Fields .............................................................................................................................. 281
New Metadata fields ........................................................................................................................ 282
To add new MI Fields ....................................................................................................................... 282
Appendix A ........................................................................................................ 284

Event Type Field Values ........................................................................................................................ 284
Appendix B......................................................................................................... 287

Secondary Events ................................................................................................................................. 287
To access an editable secondary event already in a play................................................................. 287
Secondary Switching Parameter (sSP).............................................................................................. 287
Secondary Audio/Video (sAV) .............................................................................................................. 288
To switch the switcher ..................................................................................................................... 288
Back Timed Secondary Audio/Video (bAV) .......................................................................................... 288
GPI Contact (sGPI) ................................................................................................................................ 288
GPI Contact dialog ............................................................................................................................ 289
Back Timed GPI (bGPI) .......................................................................................................................... 289
Back Timed GPI dialog ...................................................................................................................... 290
Keyer On/Off (sKEY) .............................................................................................................................. 290
Key Event dialog ............................................................................................................................... 290
A/V Keyer On/Off.................................................................................................................................. 292
Transition Keyer (sTKY) ......................................................................................................................... 292
Transition Keyer dialog ..................................................................................................................... 292
Audio Over On/Off (sAOV) ................................................................................................................... 293
Audio Over dialog ............................................................................................................................. 294
Transition Audio Over (sTAO) ............................................................................................................... 294
Transition Audio Over dialog ............................................................................................................ 295
Break ..................................................................................................................................................... 295
Comment (****) ................................................................................................................................... 295
Compile ID (cmID) ................................................................................................................................. 296
ADC™ Air Client
Data Event (sDAT) ................................................................................................................................. 296

Barter Spot (sBAR) ................................................................................................................................ 296
Record Switcher (sRSW) ....................................................................................................................... 297
Switcher Crosspoint (sXP) ..................................................................................................................... 297
Switcher Audio Crosspoint (AUD-XPT) ................................................................................................. 298
Secondary Record (sREC) ...................................................................................................................... 298
Break Sync (sSYN) ................................................................................................................................. 299
Secondary System (sSYS) ...................................................................................................................... 300
Event IDs ........................................................................................................................................... 300
Backtimed System (bSYS) ..................................................................................................................... 300
System Event ........................................................................................................................................ 301
External (vDT) ....................................................................................................................................... 301
To Insert an External secondary event ............................................................................................. 301
Data Event with Data (sDAT) ................................................................................................................ 302
To Insert a Data Event with Data...................................................................................................... 302
Appendix C ......................................................................................................... 303

Device Error Messages ......................................................................................................................... 303
Appendix D ........................................................................................................ 315

System Timing ...................................................................................................................................... 315
Requirements ................................................................................................................................... 315
Verify the source VTR and router's accuracy ................................................................................... 315
Validating Frame Accuracy ............................................................................................................... 315
Verify the Video Servers' accuracy ................................................................................................... 316
Appendix E ......................................................................................................... 319

Tips and Good Habits............................................................................................................................ 319
Appendix F ......................................................................................................... 321

About AFD Codes .................................................................................................................................. 321
Mapping Abbreviations to AFD code values ........................................................................................ 322

ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Air Client Overview
Air Client Overview

About Air Client
The ADC™ Air Client workstation is a client on the ADC playout automation network. Air Client provides:
• Integrated control of broadcast devices, such as cart machines, VTRs, still stores, character
generators, master control switchers and video disk servers.
• Automated playout. Each event in a playlist plays at its start time without operator intervention. In
problematic situations, operators may intervene at anytime to change playlists and control devices
using the mouse, keyboard and hardware control panel.
• Allows Play List files to be edited and created with secondary events and transition effects for
broadcast. While these Play List files are typically generated by a traffic department placed into the
transmission list, they may also be created manually with the Air Client.
• Transmission list to control the actual playout of events. Events may be cut, copied, pasted, dragged
and dropped within the transmission list. New play list files may be appended to the current on-air
transmission list to form a single, continuous playout list. Each event in a Transmission List will play
at its start time without operator intervention. As needed, operators may intervene using the
mouse, keyboard and/or hardware control panel.
About Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPV6)

ADC v12 supports IPV6 for networking. IPv6 (IPng) is an upgrade to the Internet Protocol, that is
designed to rectify the addressing problems in IPv4, and to provide a way to interpret, assign, and use
addresses in a way more in line with modern internetworking. It will coexist with the older IPv4.
Minimum System Requirements

The following are minimum system requirements for ADC v12 Automation system components as of the
release of this document.
Supported Database
The following databases are supported:
SQL 2008, SQL 2008 Express, SQL 2012, SQL 2012 Express
Supported OS Level
ADC Device Server v12.18 and higher and Client v4.18 and higher support operation on 32-bit and 64-bit
operating systems.

ADC™ Air Client
Server Requirements
Type Requirements
Hardware Device Controller (CHP/iCHP chassis)
Software Current Device Server v12.x release
Operating System (Standard) Microsoft® Windows® Server 2008, Windows® Server 2012
• Device Sever v12 uses IPV6 Network Protocol.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the Windows default Firewall is DISABLED on the Device
Server, Air Client, Media Client and Config Tool.
Network Interface GigE Gigabit NIC and Ethernet switch is required
Card
Client Requirements
Type Requirements
Hardware Processor – Pentium 4 3.0 GHz or greater
RAM – For 32-bit OS: 1 GB RAM or higher, For 64-bit OS: 2 GB RAM or higher
HD – 80 GB Hard Drive or greater (Required: 25MB of free Hard Drive Space)
(For Windows 7: 16 GB available hard disk space (32-bit) or 20 GB (64-bit))
2 TCP 1000BT NICs
Additional Intel Network Interface Cards (Pro 100S) may be required for
systems connecting to external networks, or a database using TCP/IP.
Software Current Air Client v4.x release
Current Media Client v4.x release
Operating System Windows 7
• When connecting to Device Sever v12 or v11, ensure IPV6 Network
Protocol is enabled on the Client v4 computer.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the Windows default Firewall is DISABLED on the Device
Server, Air Client, Media Client and Config Tool.
Network Interface GigE GB Ethernet and switch is required
Card
About Playlists
Familiarity with playlists is essential to use Air Client effectively.
Playlists are files that contain events to play, record, or compile. Playlists can be created and stored
locally at the Air Client workstation or translated from traffic schedules. They can also be stored on the
ADC file server and are available to all operators on the system for viewing and editing.
When a playlist is loaded into a transmission list window, it is called a transmission list.

ADC™ Air Client
About Events
Familiarity with events is essential to use Air Client effectively. An event contains information, such as
start time, event type, material identification (ID), title, segment number, duration, start of message and
channel output.
Primary Events
Primary events, such as programs and commercials, constitute the majority of a playlist’s events. They
may be accompanied by secondary events, and transition effects.
Event Type Field Values

There are several event types you can use to indicate how an event is played. For example, if you just
want an event to play without switching or threading, you would choose Play (P) as the primary event
type. The primary event types are described below:
• Play (P): An event will play without switching or threading.
• Switch (S): An event will switch without threading or playing.
• Thread (T): An event will thread without switching or playing.
• Auto (A): An event will switch, play and thread. Auto is the default setting for most primary events.
Alternatively, a PT (play and thread) can be used to play and thread, but not switch.
• Record (R): A record event initiates recording on a device at the time specified in the event’s time
field.
• Timed (O): Denotes that the event is a hard start event which automatically threads and plays at the
time specified in the event’s Time field.
• Upcounting (U): Use an upcount event for an event of unknown duration, such as a sporting event
or any other live broadcast. During playout, the event’s duration will count down to 00:00:00.00 and
then will count back up.
This repeats until terminated by either pressing Play or Skip on the control panel or a contact start is
reached. The next event will play normally. Up counters only work on events played from Switch
Only devices.
• Manual Start (AM): Use a manual start event to provide the equivalent of a break event during the
transmission of a playlist. When playing, a list will stop when it reaches a manual start event. Click
Play on the control panel.
• Exception (X): This is a customized primary event in configurations that have a primary program
channel and regional feeds to play different commercials to different regions. Exception events are
different on a regional feed from those played on the primary program channel. X is only used on a
compile tape.
• Time to Next (N): Enter a letter N in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide a countdown to the
event’s start time. This is used primarily on live events so an operator can give an accurate
countback from a break back into a live event, such as a newscast.
• Audible Time to Next (Q): Enter a letter Q in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide an audible
countdown starting 30 seconds from a commercial break into the next live event. To minimize its
effect on existing functionality ‘N’ (Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an operator
when letter ‘Q’ is entered.

ADC™ Air Client
Note: This option is not currently supported by Versio.

Note: This type option requires the "Audible Time To Next" option be enabled (checked) on the
Environment->List Options tab.
Note: After the "Audible Time To Next" checkbox option is enabled in the List Options, it is
necessary to close and re-open the list windows in the client for the feature to work. (Re-loading the
lists is not necessary.)
 For example, if the duration of the break is 3 minutes, then...
• At 30 seconds Air Client announces: "30 seconds to go."
• At 20 seconds, Air Client announces: "20 seconds, standby."
• At 10 seconds, Air Client starts counting down each second: "10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1."
 Other example conditions:
• If the commercial break is 30 seconds long, then the countdown starts immediately with "30
seconds to go".
• If the commercial break is less than 30 seconds long, but greater than 20 seconds, then the
coundown starts at 20 seconds with "20 seconds, standby".
• If the commercial break is less than 20 seconds long, but greater than 10 seconds, then the
countdown starts at 10 seconds, with the 10,9,8 .......
• Deadroll (D): A deadroll event hard starts at a specific time while the list plays. The deadroll event
plays, but does not switch, for its duration and then stops. Deadroll events are only intended for use
on linear media (tapes) so that a JIP (Join In Progress) can be performed.
• Audio/Video Breakaway (AV, AI, AVJ, AIJ): A primary event or a secondary audio/video event can be
run and cause the switcher to perform an audio/ video breakaway. AV is an event type that
performs a video breakaway. AI performs audio breakaways. To rejoin the secondary audio/video
breakaway to the primary audio/video input when it finishes playing, edit the event type to AVJ or
AIJ.
A breakaway event can occur at the beginning, within and the end of its associated primary event.
When used at the beginning or end, the primary event type is set to A; the secondary event type is
set to AV or AI. If the duration of the secondary event is less than the primary event, add a J to
supply the audio and video from the primary event. When used within a primary event, the
secondary event type is set to AVJ or AIJ.
Note: Only one breakaway can be assigned to a primary event to avoid an overlap in time. You cannot
breakaway audio and then breakaway video until the video is rejoined. Also, you cannot breakaway
video and then breakaway audio until the audio is rejoined.
Secondary events
Secondary events are associated with the primary event above it in the playlist. Multiple secondary
events can be assigned to a primary event and are played concurrently. A secondary event’s time is used
as an offset in relation to the primary event’s time.
Valid secondary events include:

• Audio/Video: A secondary Audio/Video event plays material, in addition to the primary event on air,
for use in effects such as keys, audio overs and mixes.
• Backtimed A/V: The backtimed secondary audio/video event is the same as a Secondary Audio/
Video except the secondary’s on-air time is the amount of time before the primary event will begin.
ADC™ Air Client
• GPI Contact: This event is a GPI Contact Closure to a device that initiates a switch. The GPI Contact
will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless of value of "Time". The
event will display as played at the primary event time, although the actual GPI contact will close at
the exact time.
• Backtimed GPI: Similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured backwards in
time from the start of the associated primary event. For example, a backtimed GPI event with an
offset of 5 seconds fires the GPI contact 5 seconds before the start of the associated primary event.
A backtimed GPI event cannot be attached to an event following a primary upcount event. In this
case, the system would not be able to calculate when to begin the GPI event.
• Keyer On/Off: This event describes when a hole is cut in the associated primary events video output
and is then filled with the output of the Keyer source.
• Transition Key: Similar to a Keyer On/Off event except, the key is brought up at the start of the
associated primary event with the same transition type (i.e. brought up with a fade up, cut, wipe
etc.).
• Audio Over On/Off: This is used to add another audio source over the primary audio/video source.
It can be set with a percentage over ratio…for example, if set to 100%, it will completely replace the
primary events audio.
• Transition Audio Over: Similar to a standard Audio Over event except that it is brought up with the
primary event and corresponding transition type.
• Break: An event line inserted in the list where you would like the list to stop running. The first event
after the break line will cue up, but will not play out, and the program switches to black. To restart
the list [after the break line], press Roll or Play on the control panel.
• Comment: Used to enter Notes into the playlist. Comment event lines are ignored during
transmission. However, they do add events to the list size. You can enter text in the title field up to
sixteen characters.
• Compile ID: Used to attach a title to the head of a compilation list. It has no effect on the playlist
and is ignored during transmission.
• Data Event: Used as a command to a device to perform a certain function. Occurs at the time
entered in the on-air [or Time] column. Mostly used with videodisk servers.
• Barter Spot: Intended for reconciliation with the traffic system. Attached to a program segment that
has barter spots in it [network, nat’l]. Will appear in the AsRun log that the spots attached to that
segment ran.
• Record Switcher: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for inputs. During a
recording, automation will switch to the source denoted in the secondary events Title field.
• Switcher Crosspoint: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for outputs. Allows you
to route program from one list to a different destination.
• Secondary Record: Allows for the automated recording and segmenting of live program material, for
immediate or future playback to air. Unlike most record events, this event type is used in lists that
combine record and playback activities. It will function only in lists that combine record and
playback material.
• Break Sync: Break sync contains an estimated time of day a pod will run, a deviation time and a time
for a window of opportunity for the operator to react to the event.
• Secondary System: Used to allow the sharing of resources between lists. This event allows the
traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignment during the execution of a transmission list.
Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a primary event. When this event type is

ADC™ Air Client
run, it is able to move un-owned device heads to the list that is running this event or release device
heads in order to make them available to another list. It is up to the traffic department to schedule
the assignment and release of heads so that two lists will not conflict in their usage of these heads.
• Backtimed System: This works in the same manner as secondary system except that this event type
runs prior to the primary event by the time specified in the Time field.
• External: An External secondary event is used to send commands or other information to a device
through a device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending
commands or other information to a specific device on the device server.
• Data Event With Data: This event is used to send commands and other information to a specific
device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor to enter the
commands. The commands are sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID.
Transition Effects
A transition effect is configurable according to type, speed, key hold status, and mixed audio/video and
wipe effect qualifiers. Transition effects are added between events in a playlist. A master control
switcher is required to use transition effects. The system transitions INTO events only. Therefore,
specifying a transition type or speed on an event affects how that event is transitioned TO.
Switch-Only IDs
You can create a list of frequently used, switch-only IDs that are not in the database, yet are valid. Air
Client can be configured to validate IDs against this list by clicking the Check IDs Against Valid ID List
button on the List Options tab in the Environment... dialog box (accessible on the Properties ribbon tab).
By putting IDs in the Valid ID list, Air Client will not generate a warning when editing IDs not in the
database.
Hard Start Events

A hard start event is an event that plays at its start time instead of when the previous event finishes
playing. To change an event to a hard start event, click it, then click Toggle Hard Start on the Events
ribbon tab or press ALT+O. Hard start events display the letter O in the Type field.
Extended event types (back-timed and end-timed event type qualifiers)

Normal Manual
Back-Timed End-Timed
Last Primary Event Next

Primary Primary
Begin “Second” Button End

ADC™ Air Client
• Back-Timed Events: A back-timed, secondary event is run at the offset value before the first frame
of the primary it is attached to. For more information see Manage Back-Timed Events (on page 134).
• End-Timed Events: An end-timed, secondary event is run offset from the end of the primary event.
For more information see Manage End-Timed Events (see "To Specify ‘PT’ Event Type syntax" on
page 136).
For Example: Attached to the last commercial of commercial break a tone closure needs to be
turned on eight seconds before the end of the last break using a GPI event.
 With a forward offset event, the eight seconds would have to be subtracted from the duration
of the primary event and offset from that duration.
• If the primary event were 30 seconds, then a forward offset would have to be set at 22
seconds.
• If the commercial break was re-ordered and the last commercial was now a 15 second
commercial, the GPI event would have to be edited and the offset changed to 7 seconds.
 With an end-time offset of 8 seconds, the GPI event would not have to be edited when the
commercial break content was changed.
About Time Zones

Familiarity with Time Zone management is beneficial to using Air Client effectively. In a facility where
there is the need to manage local time offsets, all device servers are fed identical time of day time code.
This time code is displayed on the device server screen. Client software manages the "translation" of
master time to local time inside the client application.
When configured and set to a list, the Time Zone is displayed in the title bar of it List window, and of its
Zoom window. The time zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the List.
• In a Pull List window the Time Zone name is displayed in the title bar, and the offset value in the
status bar. For more information see Configuring Time Zone Offsets (on page 273).
Time Zone Definitions

• Master Time: The output of the central facility time standard. It is defined as "Zulu" format (24
hour) time or "military" time. It is the time reference that is output from the central facility time
code generator and supplied to all Device Servers in a given automation system. This is the only time
value displayed on the Device Server’s screen and is distributed via the API to the system clients.
• Local Time: The time standard that is displayed to an operator by a list that is under system
management. This time standard is modified from the Master Time delivered to the client by the
server over the network by code within the client. Its offset from master time is programmable via
software selections in the client.
• Time Offset: The amount of time (in HH:MM) that the Master Time must be delayed (Or advanced)
to account for time zone differences.
• Local Time Display: The time standard that the list is running under, which is shown to the user at
the Client display. This time is derived from the master time by software routines in the client
applications.
• Master Time Display: The time standard display that directly reflects the actual time value that is
being input to the Device Servers in the central facility. It is normally displayed on the Device Server
application window.

ADC™ Air Client
• Time of Day (TOD): A reference to a particular clock time that can be derived from either Master OR
Local time. Time of day is not related to event duration.
About using Dual Output Video Cards

When using Air Client on a dual output video card, if a new window is opened, it appears in the center
and can be seen on both monitors.
Air Client Desktop

Using Air Client requires familiarity with the major components of the Air Client desktop. The major
components are the playlist, transmission list, database, device status, device storage windows and the
switcher. These components provide access to the core functionality of Air Client.
As shown in the following example, the [ Login name - Client name - Server(s) name – Date ] information
is dynamically displayed in the title bar of the Air client application.
Ribbon Toolbars
All options for the Air Client application are located in a specific ribbon tab. This section describes the
basic functionality of the options. Be advised that while navigating the ribbon tabs options on the On Air
transmission lists will continue to play. Care should be taken to ensure proper monitoring of the
transmission lists while navigating in other areas.
File Ribbon Tab

ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
New PlayList (Ctrl+N) Opens up an empty play list file to insert programming – to be saved for
future transmission
Open Playlist (Ctrl+O) Allows you to access inactive play list files for editing purposes
Close Closes the active window
Save Playlist (Ctrl+S) Permanently saves the work done on an open play list
Save Playlist As Allows you to create a different filename for an existing play list or
create an original filename for a new play list
Print (Ctrl+P) Will print the active screen to an assigned printer
Save As Text Will save the active window as a text file
Export to CSV Export playlists, transmission lists and pull lists to the MS Excel-
compatible CSV files.
Display Errors Displays a list of the most recent on-air errors
Clear Errors Erases errors displayed on the Air Client from the clipboard only
Robust Database Search Opens the Robust Database Search window. Allows an operator to
search for and review records of existing spots.
Open Text Allows you to view text files such as AsRun Logs, and Error Logs
Open Operation Log The operation log, logs the user activity. Like edition, deletion, and
changes to the playlist.
Save Operation Log as Text Allows you to save the operation log as a text file.
Change User Allows you to change the name of the user working at the client station
Exit (Alt+X) Closes the program and all open windows
Edit Ribbon Tab
Option Description
Cut (Ctrl+X) Removes selected event(s) and places them onto a clipboard
Copy (Ctrl+C) Copies selected event(s) onto a clipboard without removing them from
the list
Paste (Ctrl+V) Will paste events from the clipboard into the list above the cursor
position
Clear (Del) Will delete selected event(s) from the list, without saving them on the

ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
clipboard
Find Allows you to search the active list for media by ID in one direction
from the current cursor position
Replace Enables you to search for specific IDs and replace them with other IDs
Select All Allows you to highlight all events in an open list.
Events Ribbon Tab

This ribbon tab is available once a Playlist has been loaded.
Option Description
Revise (Alt+R) Allows you to edit or revise the event that the cursor is on. Pressing the
Tab key moves you forward one field/cell. Pressing Shift+Tab moves
you back. To finish editing press the Alt+R keys
Cancel (Alt+Q) Cancels the editing of an event without saving the changes you’ve made
to it
Insert Primary (Ins) Inserts a Primary event line into the playlist above the cursor position.
Automatically puts you into Revise Mode. Press Alt+R keys when done
Insert Secondary Inserts a Secondary event above the cursor position. Refer to
attachment for detailed definitions. *Note*: Some items listed may not
be available on your particular system
Edit Effects Allows an operator to modify the transition into the event the cursor is
placed on for editing
Edit Trigger Allows an operator a dynamic means to alter the linked list associations
from the Air Client and also on an event-by-event basis. Trigger actions
are selected from a dropdown list.
Edit Secondary Allows an operator to edit aspects of certain types of secondary events
that are not represented in entry fields on the playlist.
Calculate Durations Will calculate the total duration for all highlighted items. Cannot be
used with Upcount events
Toggle Hard Start (Alt+O) Places a hard start on the event line the cursor is positioned on. This
dictates that the event begins airing at the specified time.
Note: It places a hardstart and also removes a hardstart as needed.
Ripple Time (Alt+M) Ripples air times from cursor placement to the next hard start in a list. If
no hard start is present, start times will ripple through the entire

ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
playlist
List Validation List Validation will check through the list for potential problems, such
as; same id = same ID back-to-back, separates = segments not
separated by a break, sequence = missing segments within a series, or
segments out of order, same segment = same segment number back-
to-back.
Pull List Will create a list of events that are scheduled on your playlist but have
not been found in assigned air devices. Also known as "Missing Media"
Verify Event Against DB Cross-references the event the cursor is placed upon or the selected
events against the database for accuracy of data entry (i.e. Durations,
SOMs)
Verify List Against DB Cross-references the entire list against the database for accuracy of
data entry (i.e. Durations, SOMs)
Linked Lists Enabled (Ctrl+F5) Select this option to enable the playlist’s to be linked together. When
ticked, the Master list will control the Linked Lists. List linking can be
disabled by unchecking this option, or pressing CTL + F5 to toggle it
on/off.
Note: Do NOT enable LinkList if there are no Linked Lists configured. This
can impact Air Client operations, and will be resolved in a future release.
This option is available when LinkList.bin is in the air client install
directory. For details see section: LinkList (see "ADC AirFlex" on page
206).
Validate Liked List Durations When multiple events are selected on the Master list, this function will
(F5) check the duration of the corresponding linked events on the Linked
list. Only available for Offline lists.
Some or all of the following options are grayed out if:
• The Master Online or Offline list is not the active window.
• No events are selected on the Master Online or Offline lists.
This option is available when Linked Lists are configured and enabled.
For details see section: LinkList (see "ADC AirFlex" on page 206).
Copy Linked List In (F9) If the Master Online transmission list is the active window, this function
will copy the selected Master and Linked event(s) on the Offline linked
lists to the Online lists.
If the Master Offline playlist is the active window, this function will copy
the selected Master and Linked events on the Online lists to the Offline
lists.
Copy Linked List Out (F10) If the Master Online transmission list is the active window, this function
will copy the selected Master and Linked event(s) to the Offline linked
lists.
If the Master Offline playlist is the active window, this function will copy

ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
the selected Master and Linked events to the Online lists.
Move Linked List In (F11) This is identical to Copy Linked List In, however the Master and Linked
event(s) will be cut from the source list when they are copied. Same as
Cut and Paste.
Move Linked List Out (F12) This is identical to Copy Linked List Out, however the Master and Linked
event(s) will be cut from the source list when they are copied. Same as
Cut and Paste.
Generate Link List Keys Only available in Offline mode. This is used to manually generate the
LinkKeys for the Offline lists. If your station’s traffic system does not
generate the Linking keys when the schedules are created, use this
option to manually generate the LinkKeys for the Master and Linked
Lists.
Note: The Offline lists must be resaved after generating the LinkKeys.
Servers Ribbon Tab (for sites using Multi-server login)
This ribbon tab allows operators to connect to / disconnect from specific Device Server, and add
/remove servers from the available list.
Option Description
Connect… Launches the ‘Connect to Servers’ dialog. This dialog allows an operator
to connect to currently available servers.
Disconnect… Launches the ‘Disconnect from Servers’ dialog. This dialog allows an
operator to disconnect from currently connected servers.
Available Server Launches the ‘Edit Available Servers’ dialog. This dialog allows an
operator to perform both manual editing (Edit) and automatic discovery
(Scan) of servers for multi-server login environments.

ADC™ Air Client
Resources Ribbon Tab
Option Description
View List Allows you to choose and open active transmission list configured in the
system
Switcher A diagnostic utility typically used to determine if switcher(s) are
responding correctly to remote commands given by automation.
Device Status Opens a window by which all automated devices can be checked for
correct status and assignments.
Device Storage Allows you to view media in mass storage devices such as Cart
Machines, Video Disks, and Audio Disks. You can "drag and drop" media
into an active transmission list if desired
Resources list Displays available Device Servers and the lists, devices and device status
for each server.
Properties Ribbon Tab
Note: New Air Client software modified properties are shown with orange border. Brand new Properties
are shown with Red Border.
Option Description
Environment Allows configuration of: List Options, System Directory Paths, List
Directory Paths, Device Status Colors, Device Storage Colors, and Cell
Colors.
AsRun logs Allows custom configuration of the AsRun log
Hardware Control Panel Allows custom configuration of the Operator Control Panel (OCP).
Software Control Panel Allows custom configuration of the software control panel within the
application.
Valid IDs Allows creation of a list of IDs that are not in the database that are
commonly used for air. This, in general, would include switch only
events (i.e. Network, Newsroom, Studio, Black etc.)
ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
List Names Can add, remove, or customize names of transmission lists that will
appear in ‘View List’ [under Resources]. The default is to display only a
number for the separate transmission lists at your facility (i.e. play list 1,
play list 2) and secondary lists such as Record Lists, Media Lists, and
Compile Lists
Auto List Save Allows parameters to be set for the Auto List Save feature; such as the
frequency of automatic list savings based on the number of list changes
that occur on an active on-air transmission list.
Specify the "Number of changes" to indicate how often the list saves to
an RCV file automatically.
"Changes" refers mainly to movements of items in the list, 5 changes,
means 5 events have passed. So in this example, every time 5 events
have passed the list will auto-save to its RCV file.
Auto Bin Save Will save the bin storage map of a cart machine based on user specified
intervals Errors – Allows configuration of how/where error messages
are displayed and whether they will sound out when they occur
Errors Use this option to configure the way errors are reported in the error
window, and to which folder they are to be saved, if they are to be
saved to disk.
Desktop Allows the adjustment of the desktop wallpaper within the Air Client
program
Linked Lists… Launches the Links Lists configuration dialog. LinkList allows playlists to
be linked together and controlled from a single master playlist.
(This option is only available if the Linked Lists option has been
purchased and linklist.bin is present in the Air Client installation
location.) For details see section: LinkList (on page 211).
More Info When the functionality has been purchased, this option allows the
custom configuration of a More Info column using an ODBC database.
Hide Secondary Event Keys Allows hiding and showing of secondary events on the Playlist
Toolbar Builder Allows the custom configuration of the Air Client Toolbar on the
desktop.
Time Zone A unique time zone offset can be configured for each play list that is
offset from the house clock.
Operation Log A log can be created to track operation activity within the Air Client
application.
Set Tally The Air client can use the Tally information of a given List to display an
"On Air" / "On Line" status and color for the playing event(s) of the
corresponding transmission list(s) and zoom window(s) status column.
If a Tally is configured for a given List, then the "On Air" color and ON
AIR status are used in the List and its Zoom window, if it is seen as "On
Air" according to the Tally configuration. And the "On Line" color and
ON LINE status are used in the List and its Zoom window, if it is seen as

ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
"On Line" according to the Tally configuration. (See section on Tally for
more info.)
MI Additional Fields Launches a dialog that allows addition of fields to the More Info Builder.
This includes, but is not limited to, AFD, PSIP data, format, bitrates, etc.
Save Desktop Will save all desktop settings, including which windows are open and
how they are tiled in proportion to one another. This will determine
which windows will be opened automatically each time the program is
launched.
Set Password Allows changing the current password
Tools Ribbon Tab
Option Description
Recycle Bin A play list view of prior events that have been cut or deleted.
Video Window Air Client can include an optional feature that displays the on-air event
in a video window. It can be used for monitoring the Output Stream,
but has no control functionality. A video board installed in the Air Client
workstation must be connected to the output from the on-air video
stream.
Play List Translator This option is not implemented. It is listed here for consistency and to
address future inclusion.
Window Ribbon Tab
Option Description
Color Scheme Allows you to change the GUI skin color by selecting a different color for
the list of available colors.

ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
Default Desktop Changes desktop appearance back to the saved desktop settings
Cascade Cascades all open windows [screens] so that title-bar lines will be visible
Tile Allow viewing all open windows [screens] simultaneously in a tile view
Arrange Icons Allows you to arrange icons on your desktop
Close All Closes all open windows [or screens]. Does not close the program
Help Ribbon Tab
Option Description
About Launches a dialog that presents information about the current version
of Air Client software.
The "Installed Packages" list includes the AsRun name and version, and
the ODBC Calls name and version.
Help Launches the Air Client Help System.
Quick Access Ribbon Tab
Provides a User-defined grouping of commonly used tools and functions.
Quick Access Toolbar

The Quick Access toolbar allows operators to quickly access commonly used functions. The following are
examples of Quick Access Toolbars.

ADC™ Air Client
Icon Description
Connect: Launches the ‘Connect to Servers’ dialog. This dialog allows an operator to
connect to currently available servers.
Note: This toolbar icon is only active when multiserver.bin is present in the
installation directory. For details contact Automation Technical Support.
Disconnect: Launches the ‘Disconnect from Servers’ dialog. This dialog allows an
operator to disconnect from currently connected servers.
Note: This toolbar icon is only active when multiserver.bin is present in the
installation directory. For details contact Automation Technical Support.
Right Click Menus

The following menus are accessed from List and Playlist windows on the Air Client application. The
availability of menus and options is context related.
List Window Right Click Menu

This menu is available by right clicking on an open list window.

ADC™ Air Client
(Click on an open Playlist and get the following, which is a subset the right click playlist menu.)
View List Right-Click Menu

This menu is available by right clicking on an View List window.

ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
Zoom Window The Zoom Window option will show a view of the currently running
event, the next event to run, and the next missing event on the
transmission list.
Hide All Secondaries/Show To show all secondary events in a play list, click Show All Secondaries.
All Secondaries When secondary events are not currently hidden, the options available
will be Hide All Secondaries.
Hide Some Secondary Type To hide the selected secondaries use the "Select Secondaries To Hide"
option, and then use this option.
Select Secondaries To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event
Types to Show or Hide dialog box by clicking Select Secondaries to hide.
Expand / Contract an Event Allows show or hide of a Secondary event on a one-at-a-time basis, by
selecting the primary event and clicking Exp/Contract.
Find Next Occurrence Selelct to find the next occurrence of an entry.
Toggle Bookmark Toggle on/off bookmarking an event. Up to 3 bookmarks can be set at
one time.
IMPORTANT: The Bookmark feature is supported in ADC v12 only.
Find Prev Bookmark Jump/return to a previous bookmark
Find Next Bookmark Jump to the next bookmark.
Append List The Append List option allows a play list file to be appended to the end
of the currently selected transmission list.
Load List This will Load a play list file over the currently playing a selected
transmission list.
CAUTION: This will take the transmission list off the air if this is used
while the transmission list is running.
Insert List This will insert a play list file above the placement of the cursor on the
transmission list. This can be used for schedule or program changes.
Control Panel Select the Control Panel to bring up the On Air Software Control Panel.
This control panel gives the operator direct control of devices that are
currently playing on air. This control panel also allows the transmission
list to be threaded/loaded for On Air playback in the event the
transmission list is not currently playing.
This can also be accessed by double-clicking the active transmission list.
Breakaway Panel Launch the breakaway panel.
Device Control Panel When an event on the transmission list is threaded in a VTR, a Device
Control Panel for threaded VTR can be accessed to allow remote
control of the VTR.
This can also be accessed by double-clicking on a device-specific line
item in the transmission list or Device Status window.
Show More Info This option if configured will allow more info (database metadata) to be
shown about a selected event. This info is input at the Media Client.

ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
Thread This is used to force thread on an individual selected event on the list if
the device is available and/or the event was unthreaded previously.
Unthread A threaded event can be unthreaded. This is done to eject a tape, or to
allow editing of a threaded event. Be advised that when Unthread is
used the Transmission List will go to an unthreaded state and will need
to be re-threaded by hitting Program Run on the Operation Control
Panel (OCP) option.
CAUTION: The Unthread button on the hardware control panel
unthreads the entire playlist, and is NOT the same as this right-click
menu Unthread.
ReCue Can be used to recue a selected cued event on the transmission list if
the Start of Message has changed, or is currently in Play mode.
CAUTION: Do not confuse this menu option with RECUE on the
hardware panel which recues the on-air playing event.
Preview Play If an event is cued but not needed for immediate playback On Air the
Preview Play option can be used to preview the material. The event will
play it's duration and then recue when finished.
Clear Done Events An event that is marked done can be dragged and dropped down the
transmission list and then re-activated so it can play on the list again.
Toggle Look Ahead The Look Ahead is the area of the transmission list that will query the
devices assigned to the transmission list for availability of media in the
lookahead area. The toggle lookahead option will adjust the lookahead
area from the current setting to a full list look ahead. If the look ahead
is set to the full list, then it will adjust to the pre-configured lookahead
value.
On Air Focus When viewing events further down a transmission list this option will
enable the focus of the list to jump back to the On Air event when a
new event plays.
Air Protect If there is a problem with the On Air event device a backup "protect"
device (if configured) can be selected for individual selected events
further down the transmission list within the lookahead.
CAUTION: Do not confuse this menu option with the AIR PROTECT
button on the hardware panel which will Air Protect the current on-air
event.
Barcode Event An external VTR (if configured) can be used for On Air playback using
the Barcode Event option. Once the tape is loaded this option will
activate the event on the play list. Select this option by placing your
cursor on the line for the missing event, then right-clicking and
choosing Barcode Event prior to putting the VTR in remote or prior to
loading the needed tape into the VTR that is already in remote.
Compiler This option allows the creation of a compiled spot reel. This spot reel
can be used as an On Air spot backup tape.

ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
Options Certain Play List options can be configured locally at the Air Client.
Defaults This option allows changing the default duration value for "not found"
(not in DB) inserted items on the list from the factory default of
00:00:30.00 to any value you wish
Columns Configuration of the columns for the currently selected list.
Fonts Configuration of the fonts. for the currently selected list.
Colors Configuration of the colors for the currently selected list.
Control Panels
There are two panel types that can be used to play a Transmission list: a hardware control panel (on
page 34) and a software control panel (on page 35).
Hardware Control Panel

Hardware Control Panel can be used to play a Transmission list. ADC supports the Operator Control
Panel (OCP).
Operator Control Panel (OCP)

The Operator Control Pane is a mid-sized desktop controller that provides instant audio or video
playback and control for broadcast automation, post production and other applications. This panel gives
operators a choice in controlling automation environments by providing unambiguous button control in
addition to conventional keyboard and mouse operations.
Note: Actions taken on the OCP are logged in the Operations log.
Panel Functions
The OCP comes with 24, hi-res, remotely-relegendable 64 x 32 LCD buttons, 10 bank buttons, and 17
additional function and navigation switches.
The hi-res LCD buttons can display text (up to 40 characters) and graphics using built in command driven
serial interfaces. They integrate a graphical LCD with RGB backlighting, and are capable of displaying up
to 64 colors. Software controls the interface, display and backlighting. Data only needs to be transmitted
when a change is made to the display or background colors.
These LCD buttons can be programmed to provide a range of functions. Most commonly used when
breakdowns or other failures occur, each button on the OCP can call up actions needed in a hurry.
For example, a button can be configured to:

ADC™ Air Client
• Cut back to Network, or even backup device with a ready content.

• Display a full-screen apology slide or trigger a caption for missing audio.
Software Control Panel

The Software Control Panel is used to play a Transmission list. Double clicking on the play list brings up
the software version of the On Air Play list control panel.
• Example with all functions enabled.
Software Panel buttons

• Run: Thread and cues the first event in a playlist and any events within the time range specified in
the lookahead. The number of events cued is limited by the number of available media heads and
devices. You cannot play events until you run the playlist.
• Play: Plays the first event in a playlist; however, before you can play events, you must first click the
Run button. The Play button can also be used to restart a frozen or held playlist or a playlist stopped
by a break event. Clicking the Play button initiates preroll for the playlist so the following event will
play after the preroll time.

ADC™ Air Client
The Play button will not play a hard start event unless it is configured to do so, as described in
"Miscellaneous" on page 4-14. Use the Play Hard Hits option to start a hard start event with the Play
button on the control panel. If this is not set, the operator cannot play an event that has a hard start
if the playlist has stopped running.
• Ready: Turn on tension to the next VTR event in tension release to prepare upcoming VTR events.
Click this button to prepare a VTR event for transmission that is out of the standby on-time range.
Usually used after an upcount events to get the next event ready.
• Hold: Holds the countdown of an event that is playing, causing the event to continue playing longer
than its duration. You can extend the event’s duration until the Play button is clicked. The playlist
will then advance to the next event which can only be played with the Play or Skip button.
• SyncSkip: Provides synchronous payout of commercials across multiple lists. The SyncSkip command
concept is that the next event with a designated sequential Seg # becomes equal to the remaining
part of the current event. Since each of these events represent the entire program, the SOM of the
next event is shifted to the EOM point of the current event and the DUR of the next event is made
equal to the remaining DUR of the current event.
• Skip: Skips the event currently playing and plays the next event. Also, click this button to skip a
frozen or held event.
• Ten Rel: (Tension Release) Places a cued event’s VTR into tension release. At the Standby On time
(before an event is about to air), Air Client issues a command to the VTR to enter Ready status and
tension up the tape. The Status field of the event in a transmission list window displays Ready.
• Freeze: Stops play and countdown. Click this button to pause the current event. Then, you may skip,
roll, reinitiate play or recue the event using the Play button. The Status field of the event in a
transmission list window displays Still.
• Roll: Roll bypasses normal preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the equipment will
allow. If the current event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it and plays the next event using
normal preroll values unless configured to use instant preroll values. If the current event is frozen,
this button will play the next event. If the current event is being held, clicking this button plays the
event.
• UnThd: (UnThread). Stops a running transmission list, including the on-air event and any events that
follow. All events are uncued and the list goes off the air.
• Protect: Toggles the signal switching paths between the on-air and protect devices. Click this button
to play an event from the air device, or vice versa. This is an optional function and may not be
available on your workstation.
• Secondary: The ADC hardware control panel is configurable to add the action Play Secondary. This
allows a secondary event to be manually triggered.
• +1 Sec: Add one second to the playing event’s duration. Each time you click this button, one second
is added to the duration.
• Recue: Recues an on-air event. To play the recued event, click the Play button.
• -1 Sec: Subtract one second from the playing event’s duration. Each time you click this button, one
second is subtracted from the duration.
Note: Blank buttons are not visible by default, but can be assigned. For more information see section:
Setting Hardware Control Panel Properties (on page 250).
Loss of Focus Issue: To avoid control panel/playlist loss of focus with a dual screen client and the
subsequent inability to insert an event or revise the playlist, disable (uncheck) the Windows 7 setting

ADC™ Air Client
"Control panel>Ease of Access Center>Make the mouse easier to use>Activate a window by hovering
over it with the mouse".
Panel Color Configuration

The Software Control Panel of each Transmission List can be configured with:
• A specific color
• The possibility to enable / disable the Control Panel functions.
Transmission List Window

A transmission list is a play list loaded in a transmission list window. A transmission list window looks
almost identical to a play list window except, in a transmission list window, you can edit and broadcast a
transmission list. Air Client supports list windows of four types: play lists, compile lists, GMT lists and
media lists.
Note: Due to the customizable nature of the Air Client product, a station’s columns may appear different
than shown in the following example window.
Air Focus/List Locked

ADC™ Air Client
This entry on the list status bar shows if On Air Focus is turned ON or OFF. To the right is an indicator to
notify user if the list is "locked" which means the list is in Revise (Done=0).
Event Types
Most Common Playback Event Types
• A (Automatic Event): It will thread, play event for duration listed and switch. An event with an A by
itself will play out its duration and roll into the next event
• U (AU): Upcounter/Unknown Duration this event type is used for air events of an unknown duration;
such as network, news or sports events
• O (AO/AUO): On-Time/Override Also known as a hard start, time trigger, or absolute, this event will
play based on a time of day entered into the time of day field
CAUTION: An incorrect time of day value will cause incorrect playback
• N (AN/AUN): Time to Next provides a countdown through all sequential pre-recorded events until
the next N is seen in the list – mostly used for countback to live news segments
• Q (AQ/AUQ): Audible Time to Next provides an audible countdown starting 30 seconds from a
commercial break into the next live event. To minimize its effect on existing functionality ‘N’ (Time
to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an operator when letter ‘Q’ is entered.
Note: The Q event type option requires the "Audible Time To Next" option be enabled (checked) on
the Environment->List Options tab.
necessary to close and re-open the list windows in the client for the feature to work. (Re-loading the
lists is not necessary.)
• D (AOD): Deadroll allows you to deadroll a taped show at its intended time further down the list to
join-in-progress later
Other Event Types:

• R (Record Event): This event type will only be found on a Record List. A Record event starts at the
time indicated in the time field and records for the duration indicated
• P (Play): This is an event that will simply play without threading or switching
• S (Switch): This is an event that will simply cause a switch to occur
• T (Thread): This is an event that will simply cause a device to cue
• Program Delay Event: A Program "delay" event allows a single-file-multi-segment event to continue
to roll under a break and join in progress after the break without re-cueing.
A Delay event allows the automation to play material from a video server port while it is still being
recorded. However, unlike a typical playout event for video servers, it is handled more like a live
event. The user cues a break to run on a SECOND video server playout port. The OCP panel is used to
roll the break when required.
Unlike typical video server playout behavior, for the Delay event, the video file server playout that is
delayed continues to roll under the break that is rolled by the user. When the break is over, the list
returns to the video server delayed programming and picks up right where the file is still playing.
This behavior modifies the server playout to behave much like delaying with a VTR.
ADC™ Air Client
Event Data Fields

Most of a transmission list window’s fields are identical to a playlist window’s fields. Following is a
description of each event data field column unique to a transmission list window:
• Device: The name of the device assigned to an event. For a switch-only event, the device is SWTCH.
• Status: The status of a device, such as playing, cued or threaded.
• Protect: The name of the protect device assigned to an event.
• PStatus: Identifies the Air/Protect status, or the play source, of an event.
• Bin: Displays the location of a tape in a cart machine.
Playlist Window
Playlist windows are used to create and edit playlists.
Event Data Fields

A playlist window lists events vertically and the event data fields are listed horizontally and grouped in
columns. A description of each event data field column follows:
• Event: This is the number, or position, of the event in the playlist. The number is automatically
generated by Air Client.
• Time: The time primary events are scheduled to play, or offsets for secondary events. Time is
entered in the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where hh=hours, mm=minutes, ss=seconds and ff=frames. For
primary events, a value is entered when the event uses a hard start. For secondary events, a value is
entered to indicate the offsets from the start time of the associated primary event.
• Sec: This uneditable column displays codes that represent effect types or special secondary events.
The codes are:
sAV: Secondary Audio/Video sDAT: Data
ADC™ Air Client
bAV: Back Timed A/V sBAR: Barter Spot

sGPI: GPI Contact sRSW: Record Switcher
bGPI: Secondary Back Timed GPI sSRC: Switcher Crosspoint
sKey: Keyer On/Off sREC: Secondary Record
sTKY: Transition Key sSYN: Break Sync
sAOV: Audio Over On/Off sSYS: Secondary System
sTAO: Transition Audio Over vDT: Secondary A/V Event with Data
Break: Break event; no symbol is displayed. sDAT: Secondary Data Event with Data
Comment: Operator comments. bSYS: Back Timed System
cmID: Compile ID AUD-XPT: Switcher Audio Crosspoint
• Type: One or more event types can be entered for each event. In the playlist, enter the symbol for
the primary event types.
The event type controls how the automation system will execute that event. The event type, A, is
the default when an event is inserted, which is a play, thread and switch event; however, you can
play an event without switching or threading, or you can just have an event switch without
threading or playing by changing the type value.
• ID: The ID of the event which uniquely identifies a piece of material or action for the event. The
maximum length of an ID is determined by the configuration of the Air Client workstation.
• Seg: The segment number of the event, ranging from 1 to 99, if the material has multiple segments.
• Title: The title of the event. The maximum length of a title is determined by the configuration of the
Air Client workstation.
• Dur: The duration of the event. Duration is entered in the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where hh=hours,
mm=minutes, ss=seconds and ff=frames.
• Ch.: The channel, or switching path, an event plays or records on. The values are A, B, C or D. The
default is A. When the Ch field is blank, the channel is A.
• SOM: The start of material for an event. This is the timecode location of the first frame of video to
be seen on-air for an event. Use the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where hh=hours, mm=minutes, ss=seconds
and ff=frames.
• E: Displays the transition effect type for an event.
• S: Displays the transition effect speed for an event. Values are S for slow, M for medium and F for
fast.
• Qual: (Qualifiers)
 Air Client: This field is used to display the Qualifiers for secondary keyer events. The field
indicates the enabled Modifier (Normal, Shadow, Drop Shadow, Border) and then the enabled
Source (Self, External, Chroma).
For example: If in the Key Event configuration the Modifier: Shadow is enabled and the Source:
Chroma is enabled, then the field will display SC.
• The Qualifier "LOSE" appears on a PRIMARY event, when the "End Key Hold" is checked.
• All keyers in HOLD mode, will be turned OFF.
• For the IconMaster Master Control Switcher only: All keyers in HOLD mode, are turned OFF
when the keyer number is "0". If the keyer number is not zero, but a number 1 to 254, then
only that specific keyer number is turned off.

ADC™ Air Client
 Media Client: Displays the video quality of a spot or program. The specific quality grades
indicated in this field are OK, Marginal or Do Not Air. A, B, C or D quality are arbitrary grades to
which the user may assign values. For example, A may represent to-air quality and D may
represent draft quality. This field is for reference only and does not affect the automation
system.
• #: Displays the source input number used in Keyer or Audio Over secondary events.
• %: Displays the audio over ratio value as a percentage and is used for audio over events only.
• Compile ID: Displays the ID of the tape whose media has been compiled onto a compile reel.
• Compile SOM: Displays the SOM of the compile ID on the compile reel. ABOX. The primary box ID of
a multispot or Odetics tape.
• ABOXSOM: The SOM of a spot on the ABOX.
• BBOX: The backup box ID of a tape containing BSPOT (multispot) material IDs.
• BBOXSOM: The SOM of a spot on the BBOX.
• sSP: The secondary switching parameter contains values depending on the event type. For primary
and secondary Audio/Video events, the value is the audio modes, mono and stereo. By default, the
audio mode is stereo. The value is initially set in a media prep product, such as Media Client, for the
Audio Format database field. It can be modified in Air Client by clicking an event and entering S or M
in the sSP field in Revise mode (ALT + R).
 For secondary key and secondary audio over events, the value ranges from 1 to 9. The number
corresponds to a keyer or mixer channel number on the master control switcher.
 If the Audio Mode selection for an existing ADC DB record is modified by the Media Client
Operator, then this update is sent to the event if it exists within an active playlist.
• MONO: When mono is set on the playlist sSP column, it will send this command to the switcher, if
the switcher is pre-configured for a mono setting it will switch the audio to mono.
Unique Event Data Fields

The following playlist columns are unique to a transmission window.
• Device: The name of the device assigned to an event. For a switch-only event, the device is SWTCH.
• Status: The status of a device, such as playing, cued or threaded.
• Protect: The name of the protect device assigned to an event. This is an option for the Automation
system.
• PStatus: Identifies the Air/Protect status. The PStatus should mirror the Status to ensure protect
device is ready in case of an on air emergency.
• Bin: Displays the location of a tape in a cart machine.

ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Getting Started
Getting Started
To Launch Air Client
1. From the desktop double click on the Air Client Icon.
2. Only on initial startup of an installed Air Client:
 If your system has only one active Network connection to the Air Client, skip to step 3.
 If your system has two active Network connections to the Air Client, the Active Network
Interface dialog is displayed prompting the operator to select an interface.
• Select the required LAN (for example, select the "Automation LAN"). If the LAN your require
is not clearly indicated and you are uncertain which one to select, please contact your
Network Administrator for guidance.
• Press OK. The system creates a Network.ini file in the system’s designated installation
location. (Once correctly set, this dialog will not be displayed for any subsequent restarts.)
• If the incorrect network connection was selected, Air Client will not connect.
To correct this delete the Network.ini file from the systems designated installation location,
restart the Air Client, and then select the correct network connection from the Active
Network Interface dropdown.
3. The Login dialog is displayed.
4. Enter the following:

 User Name: Admin

ADC™ Air Client
 Password: <No password. Leave blank>

5. Click OK, or press [Enter]
To Stop Air Client

Logout and In-Session Authentication
End Air Client sessions by clicking Change User on the File ribbon tab, then clicking the Logout button.
If a system administrator has setup multiple users to use the Air Client workstation, other users can
login from the Change User dialog box.
Air Client User Authentication

When Air Client is launched, enter your username and password in the User Name: and User Password:
fields in the Login dialog box. Usernames and passwords are created by the system administrator using
the Windows Security Administration Tool.
Admin is not assigned a password because it is commonly used in broadcast facilities as the access name
for multiple users. To prevent unauthorized access to the Air Client workstation, a system administrator
should assign an administrator password for this account.
Note: If the username field contains the username Default, the privileges assigned to the Default
account are used. At facilities where the security administration tool is used, this account may be
configured to limit access to certain Air Client functions. The original settings for Default include no
privileges.
Some Air Client features, such as configuration options for transmission list windows, will not be
available to all users if security is used.
Assigning an Administrator Password

Use the following procedure to assign a new password to the Admin username.

ADC™ Air Client
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Set Password icon ( ). The Set Admin Password dialog
is displayed.
2. In the Set Admin Password dialog box, perform the following tasks:
 Current Password: Enter your password in this field.
 New Password: Enter a new password in this field.
 Confirm Password: Verify your new password by entering it in this field.
• If the password you entered in the New Password: and Confirm Password: fields do not
match, reenter them.
Managing Server / MultiServer Connections

Use the following procedure to manage Device Server connections for the application.
IMPORTANT: To be able to select multiple servers, the file multiserver.bin must be present in the
installation directory. Contact Automation Technical Support for details.
Multi-Server Note: In a multi server environment, up to 25 Device Servers can be configured as available
in ADC, but only up to 12 can be connected to at one time.
Multi-Server Note: With multiple server login the backup server name is not needed on the shortcut
command line.
Multi-Server Note: With Air Client v4.18 and higher in a multi-server environment it is possible to
operate the playlists of the second (alive) Device Server (load list, start it, etc.) even if the first Device
Server is shut down and the message "Ignore/Retry" appears.
Limitations:
• Ensure the MAIN and BACKUP Device Servers are configured identically in terms of devices and
assignments. It is expected a Main/Backup configuration is to be used with a serial transfer switch to
move devices from the MAIN Device Server to the BACKUP Device Server.
• Do not configure both main/backup Device Servers in the shortcut and the multiserver login at the
same time (on a per client basis) as it can cause issues with prep form displays during
connection/reconnection.

ADC™ Air Client
• Configuring main/backup Device Servers in the client shortcut is not dependent on Multiserver login
feature.
Device Server Connections (No MultiServer Logon)

If the multiserver login feature is not enabled, the "Servers" tab on the ribbon is absent, and it is
impossible to edit the available Device Servers connections list.
The only connection available is the startup-defined connection. The Client tries to establish this
connection as soon as it is started.
• If connection attempt fails, and there no Backup Device Server was defined at the startup, only
"Retry" and "Abort" options are suggested to the operator.
• If there is a Backup Device Server is defined, the system also suggests "switching to backup".
To Connect to a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon)

With Air Client v4.16/ Media Client v4.16 and higher, ADC Device Server connections are implemented
as follows:
• Each "connection" is defined as a pair of servers (pair of server names) – "main" and "backup"
 Servers in pair must be of the same generation (both ADCv12)
 Each server may have its IP defined (this used to manage the "Connect by IP" feature)
 Duplicate Device Server names are not allowed. If one server (with particular name) is used in
any role (either as MAIN or as BACKUP) in some connection, it cannot be used for any other
connection. Only one Device Server in the pair can be connected at the moment
 The connection may have no Backup Device Server name defined.
• If the connected Device Server fails…
 And the Backup Device Server name is defined for this connection – the client initiates the
"server swap" procedure and shows the server reconnection dialog with retry/swap/ignore
options.
After the "swap" all the client’s features stay completely available. If, for some reasons, the
Backup Device Server fails too, the client tries to connect back to the Main Device Server of the
Device Server pair.
 And the Backup Device Server name is not defined for this connection, there is no "swap"
option in the Device Server reconnection dialog.
• Each configured Device Server has its own AsRun and Error Log configurations
• Auto List Save and Auto Bin Save (used for main-backup swap) are related to the connection (Device
Server pair) as a whole.
Connecting to a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon)
1. From the Servers Ribbon tab select the Connect.... icon ( ). The ‘Connect to server’ dialog box is
displayed listing the device servers Air Client can connect to.

ADC™ Air Client
 In this dialog each line in a list of available servers describes the connection, which, in its turn,
has its server version (mandatory), main server name (mandatory) and backup server name
(optionally).
 The first line in the list is always a startup-defined connection, which cannot be edited or
removed. If no additional server connections are configured, it will be the only one in the list.
Note: Currently connected servers are displayed in green text and it is impossible to perform a
"connect" action to these servers (the OK button is grayed-out).
2. In the ‘Connect to server’ dialog box, select a server (or Main/Backup server pair) from the Available
Servers: pane and then click OK.
3. To connect to another server (or Main/Backup server pair), repeat Step 2. The Air Client can connect
to a maximum number of eight (8) servers.
Disconnecting from a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon)

To remove access to transmission lists and device storage and device status windows on a server
connected to Air Client, disconnect from a server by the following procedure.
1. From the Servers Ribbon tab select the Disconnect... icon ( ). If multiple servers are connected,
a Choose Server dialog is displayed.
2. Select the server to disconnect from and then click OK.

ADC™ Air Client
3. The System prompts to confirm disconnect. Click OK to disconnect.
To Add/Edit/Remove/Scan Available Device Server Entries (w/

MultiServer Logon)
Use the following procedure for managing Device Server connections in a multi-server environment.
1. From the Servers Ribbon tab select Available Servers ( ). The ‘Edit Available Servers’ dialog is
launched.
2. (Option) To Add or Edit a Device Server:

 To add a server entry, Click Add… / To Edit an existing server entry, highlight an existing Server
entry in the Available Servers pane and then click Edit…
The Configuration Connection popup dialog is displayed.

ADC™ Air Client
 Main Server: Enter the Server Name. Device Server names, which are already used in the
configuration of any connection, are not listed in the drop-down, since it is prohibited to use the
same Device Server name twice.
 Server version: Select the version of the Device Server to connect to

• If "v.11" is selected, only v.11 Device Servers are listed in and available for selection from
the drop-down list.
• If "v.12" version is selected, only v.12 Device Servers are listed in and available for selection
from the drop-down list.
 Backup Server: Enter the Server Name. A Device Server name entered in the alternate server
name edit box is not listed in the drop-down, since it is prohibited to use the same Device Server
as main and backup at the same time.
 When finished click OK.
3. (Option) To Remove a Server: Highlight an existing Server entry in the Available Servers pane and
then click Remove.
4. When finished, click OK
Viewing Resources
Use the following procedures to view / review device server resources.

ADC™ Air Client
To View a Full Resource List

1. Select the Resources tab and then select the Resources List icon ( ). The Resources list dialog
is displayed.
2. Available Device Servers are listed in a hierarchical tree (e.g. DS1, DS2, etc.)
3. Highlight a Device server and expand the list: The following resources are viewable for the selected
Device Server: Device Status, Lists, Storages, and Switchers.
4. Expand the entry from the resource you want to view.
5. Select a resource. The details of that selection are displayed in a separate dialog.

ADC™ Air Client
For example, selecting Device Status from the list display the status of devices connected to that
Device Server.
To View Device Status of a Server
Select the Resources tab and then select the Device Status icon ( ). The Device Status dialog is
displayed for the currently active Device Server.

ADC™ Air Client
To View Lists available on a Device Server

1. Select the Resources tab and then select the View Lists icon ( ). The Choose List dialog is
displayed for the currently active Device Server.
2. Select a list to view and then click OK. The selected playlist is displayed.
To View Storage Devices available on a Device Server

1. Select the Resources tab and then select the Device Storage icon ( ). The Choose Device dialog
is displayed for the currently active Device Server.

ADC™ Air Client
2. From the Choose Device dialog select the device that contains the spots you want to purge, and
then click OK. The Device Storage window for that device is displayed showing all spots recorded on
it.
 Each row in the Device Storage display shows a different clip, which may be highlighted by
clicking on its number in the Num column at the left of the display. Click on an individual cell to
highlight it.
 Each column in the display shows a different clip field. The order of these columns may be
changed by clicking and holding down the mouse on the header of a column and dragging it to a
new location. A selected clip may be dragged to the Purge Material window.
 A status bar at the bottom of the window displays the status of the device, as well as the current
server time.
To View Switchers available on a Device Server

1. Ensure a Device Server is selected and active.
2. Select the Resources tab and then select the Switcher icon ( ).
 If only a single Device Server is connected, the Choose Switcher dialog is displayed for the
currently active Device Server. (Go to Step 3.)

ADC™ Air Client
 If multiple servers are connected, a Choose Server dialog is displayed for the currently active
Device Server. Select the target server and then click OK.
3. The Choose Switcher dialog is displayed for the currently active Device Server.
4. Select a switcher to view and then click OK. Details of the selected switcher are displayed.
Traffic-Generated Lists
Events entered in a traffic system by the traffic department are stored in an external file which can be
translated into a playlist. Translating and importing this file, versus entering each event manually, avoids
redundant data entry, saves time and allows the traffic file to be edited by an Air Client operator.

ADC™ Air Client
Use the WinCmms tool to translate a log from traffic into a .LST file. For information on this application
see WinCmms (on page 201).
To Save the Desktop

Use the following procedure to save all desktop settings, including which windows are open and how
they are tiled in proportion to one another. This will determine which windows will be opened
automatically each time the program is launched.
From the Air Client Properties ribbon tab select the Save Desktop... the icon ( ).
Help and About Information
To Launch the Help System

From the Help Ribbon bar select Help. The Air Client Help System is launched.
To View About Information

From the Help Ribbon bar select About... The About Air Client window displays legal notices, copyright
information, and version information.
Note: When calling Automation Technical Support to report a problem, make sure you have the
displayed version number handy.

ADC™ Air Client
Managing Window Layouts and Colors

Use the Window Ribbon Tab to manage window layouts and colors.
To Change Window Skin Color Schemes

Use this procedure to change the GUI skin color by selecting a different color for the list of available
colors.
1. From the main ribbon tool bar select the Window tab.
2. From the ColorScheme group select a color from the palette. The window skins of the application
change to the selected color.
To Change Window Layouts

Use this procedure to change the layout of windows within the application.
1. From the main ribbon tool bar select the Window tab.
2. From the Windows group select windows layout or action:
 Default Desktop: Changes desktop appearance back to the saved desktop settings
 Cascade: Cascades all open windows [screens] so that title-bar lines will be visible
 Tile: Allow viewing all open windows [screens] simultaneously in a tile view
 Arrange Icons: Allows you to arrange icons on your desktop
 Close All: Closes all open windows [or screens]. This does not close the program.
Aero WindowsTheme Issues

Do not change the Desktop Theme while Air Client is in operation. Please be aware that Air Client will
fail if an operator switches between a Classic WindowsTheme and an Aero WindowsTheme on the Client
workstation.
Also, connecting an Air Client workstation running an Aero WindowsTheme with another workstation
via a Remote Desktop Connection (e.g. mstsc.exe) can interrupt Air Client functionality.
To Change the Windows Aero Effect Theme

If the Client computer is running Windows 7 Operating System, the operator can use standard Microsoft
operations to change the Windows Aero Effect theme, the Display properties (color of windows, turn off

ADC™ Air Client
transparency), or text color and style as desired. For example, use the following procedure to change the
Main Window Caption Text color and background in a Windows 7 environment.
1. From the desktop choose the Personalize option (Control Panel\Appearance and
Personalization\Personalization).
2. The simple way (Don't use it if you prefer Windows Aero theme) to disable light shadow of text (no
transparency) is to choose Windows 7 Basic theme.
3. For advanced settings it is possible to choose Windows Color.
4. Now it is possible to choose suitable color of a background and to choose Title Bar text (font, color,
and size).
About Operator Control Panel (OCP) Functions

The OCP comes with 24, hi-res, remotely-relegendable 64 x 32 LCD buttons, 10 bank buttons, and 17
additional function and navigation switches. The hi-res LCD buttons can be programmed to provide a
range of functions. Most commonly used when breakdowns or other failures occur, each button on the
OCP can call up actions needed in a hurry.
For example, a button can be configured to:

• Cut back to Network, or even backup device with a ready content.
• Display a full-screen apology slide or trigger a caption for missing audio.
To Force Reinitialize the OCP

When the OCP panel is used with Air Client, ensure it is connected and powered on before Air Client is
started, otherwise Air Client will not recognize and initialize it.
If, for some reason, Air Client was started before the OCP panel was connected and turned on, it is
recommended to re-start Air Client or to force panel initialization in the following way:
1. From the Properties ribbon menu select the Hardware Control Panel icon ( ). The Hardware
Control Panel dialog is displayed.
2. Click OK to close this dialog. This action forces Air Client to re-initialize all configured control panels.
Locking the Operator Control Panel (OCP)

To avoid accidental action, Air Client allows the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to be locked when the
panel is not in use.
Pressing Shift+F5 on the OCP Panel acts as a toggle to enable /disable panel lock:
• Press Shift+F5 once. Panel buttons are changed to Red indicating panel operations are locked.
 The LCD buttons labels remain, but the colors are changed to a low intensity red.
 Pressing a bank button changes the mapping of the top row of LCD buttons (representing the
lists) but causes no action.

ADC™ Air Client
 No action occurs if any LCD button is pressed.

• Press Shift+F5 again. Panel buttons are restored to normal operation mode.
 Pressing any LCD buttons- either the top row representing lists or any of the actions- performs
the appropriate action.
 Pressing a bank button changes the definitions of the list buttons
 The LCD buttons are labeled and illuminated as normal.
Note: The shift function can also be used to 'guard' a particular function, by making it less likely to be
invoked.
Using the Shift Function

The Operator Control Panel (OCP) Shift function is mapped to the labeled Shift button (F4). The shift +
action of another button can be invoked either by pressing and releasing the shift button- latching shift
mode- or by holding the shift button while pressing the other button.
Shift + F4 is Release Shift and clears a latched shift mode. While in shift mode, the shift button is
illuminated.
Note: The shift function can also be used to 'guard' a particular function, by making it less likely to be
invoked.
Keyboard Shortcuts
It is possible to access certain commands through Keyboard Shortcut Keys. Memorizing these shortcuts
may save time in the future. The shortcut keys are displayed next to their corresponding function within
the "Ribbon tab" or "pop-up menus". The following is a list of the primary shortcut keys.
A list of shortcut commands

Commands Shortcut(s)
File Ctrl+N = New Playlist
Ctrl+O = Open Playlist
Ctrl+S = Save
Ctrl+P = Print
Alt+X = Exit Program
Note: Alt+F4 is the Windows shortcut for closing an application.
Edit Ctrl+X = Cut
Ctrl+C= Copy
Ctrl+V= Paste
CTRL+F= Find
CTRL+R= Replace
DEL = Clear / Delete

ADC™ Air Client
Commands Shortcut(s)
Events Alt+R = Toggle Revise
Alt+Q = Revise
INS = Insert New Primary
Shift+INS = Insert Secondary
Alt+O = Toggle Hard Start
Alt+M = Ripple Time
Windows Alt+Hyphen/Alt+Spacebar =window sizing pull-down
Shift+F5 = Cascade
Shift+F4 = Tile
Ctrl+Tab = Select a window’s alternate entry field
Ctrl+F6 = Display next open window
Ctrl+F4 = Close active window
Shift+F10 = Display a window’s Right Click Menu
Playlist Options Ctrl+H = Hide All Secondaries
Ctrl+T = Hide Some Secondary Event Types
Ctrl+E = Expand/Contract an event
Alt+V = Device Control Panel
Alt+C = Recue a selected event
Alt+T = Thread a selected event
Alt+U = Unthread selected event
Others / Misc. F1 = Help
Ctrl+Home = Top of List
Ctrl+End = End of List
Running Air Client Offline

If required, Air Client v4.18 and higher can be run offline (not connected to a Device Server) for list
prep/validation purposes.
Note: Only "Admin" user, "Default" user and users with full access to all servers are able to login to the
Air Client, running in the "Offline Mode".
The offline Air Client can be set to run in NTSC or PAL by modifying the Air Client .ini file located in the
client’s installation folder.
[DefaultTimecode]
FrameRate=
DropFrame=
• Possible values:
ADC™ Air Client
 FrameRate: NTSC, PAL

 DropFrame 1 (for Drop Frame type), 0 (for Non-Drop Frame type)
IMPORTANT: The DefaultTimecode section must be added at the top of the ini file for Air Client to apply
it at next start.
Note: If the "DefaultTimecode" section does not exist in the Air Client INI file - NTSC Non-drop frame
clocking is used.

ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation On-Air Playback Operations
On-Air Playback Operations

About On-Air Playback
This section describes how to quickly start using the Air Client application. Detailed use of the features
of the Air Client application will be described later in the following chapters of this manual.
The Air Client application allows real-time monitoring and control of the on-air playout channel. Play List
files generated by a traffic department may be translated by the play list translator utility and then
"appended" into the transmission list. Play list files may also be created manually with the Air Client
software. The transmission list controls the actual sequence of playout events. Events may be cut,
copied, pasted, dragged and dropped within the transmission list. New play list files may be appended
to the current on-air transmission list to form a single, continuous playout list.
As the transmission list plays events, the list "packs" - DONE events will disappear from the top of the
list, and new events will enter the event lookahead. When events enter the lookahead, their IDs are
compared to IDs within the storage collection of the video server or to a VTR assigned to the
transmission list. If the ID is found in the video server or a VTR, the event is registered and will turn blue
on the transmission list. A registered event is available for playout. Missing events – IDs not found in an
assigned device – will appear in red on the transmission list to alert the operator that they must be
readied for air. Events outside the event lookahead are not registered. The transmission list will always
display a configurable amount of DONE events at the top.
The transmission list actually runs on the Device Server, under the control of the Air Client. In case of a
failure of the Air Client, the transmission list will continue to run on the Device Server, preventing an
interruption of the playout channel. Both the Air Client and Media Client applications may be safely
restarted at any time. The Air Client may be safely rebooted without affecting air.
Automated V11 to V12 list translation utility

Air Client 4.20 and higher incorporates a list translation utility which automatically converts any version
11 formatted playlist file into a version 12 format. This function changes the extension of the original
v11 file to ".v11", while the translated v12 playlist has the original filename and the .lst extension. This
eliminates any change in the length of the either file's filename.
• When a version 11 formatted list is loaded, inserted or appended into Air Client v4, the user is
presented with a warning message that states the list will be converted into a version 12 format and
the original list renamed with a .v11 extension.
For Example: "The play list you have selected: list_1 will automatically be converted into a
compatible format. Initial file will be renamed to the list_1.v11."
• On opening a version 11 playlist file that has previously undergone this conversion and created a
version 12 formatted playlist file, a warning message is generated asking the user if they want to
overwrite the version 12 playlist file.

ADC™ Air Client
Translator Known Issues

The following are known issues for the in-line translator:
• External data written in the Text editor is lost: If a v3/v11 playlist is created, vDT Secondary
External Events inserted, and the playlist is then loaded with a v4 client, when it converts it to a v12
format the external data written in the Text editor is lost and must be re-written.
To View an ON AIR List / Transmission List

Use the following procedure to quickly view an ON AIR List / Transmission List.
Note: The Operation Control Panel (OCP) play list buttons can also be used to view an ON AIR List.
Actions taken on the OCP are logged in the Operations log.
1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the View List Icon ( ). The Choose List dialog is displayed.
2. Choose the desired List, and then click OK.

Note: Your Play List name may be different than what appears here.
3. The selected Transmission List opens in the Air Client desktop.
Note: Loading a List overwrites any events that are currently in the transmission list with the play list
file that is selected. This will stop an event that is currently playing On Air. This is intended to be
used for Record Lists or when the transmission list is already off the air.

ADC™ Air Client
To Build a Play List File

1. From the File ribbon tab select the New Playlist icon ( ). A new blank Playlist window is opened
in the workspace.
2. Select the Insert key on keyboard OR from the Events ribbon tab select the Insert Primary icon
( ). The application is automatically placed in Revise Mode and a new event appears in the
Playlist window.
3. Click on the ID column of this new event, enter the ID of a program that was prepared using Media
Client, and then press <Return>. The Select Segment box appears.
4. Click the Single Spot button to view single spots for the ID. A message box will appear if no single
spots exist for the ID.
5. Select segment 1 in the segment box and then click OK.
6. Position yellow cursor on the play list and repeat steps 3 - 4 for additional segments and/or spots.
Any new events will be inserted above the cursor. When inserting of events are completed, exit
Revise Mode.

ADC™ Air Client
7. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select the Cancel icon ( ).
8. From the File ribbon tab select the Save PlayList As icon ( ). The Save Playlist dialog is
displayed.
9. File Name: Type the name the Play List is to be saved as, and then select Save. The play list filename
will appear at the top of the window.
 Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst & .cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv &
.rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total,
(including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name
longer than a total of 32 characters.
10. Close the Play List window.
To Save a Playlist file as Text

1. Select a playlist file or the On Air transmission list…
2. From the File ribbon tab select the Save As Text icon ( ).The ‘Save as Text’ dialog is displayed.
3. File Name: Enter the file name or select existing file form list options, and then select Save.
Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst & .cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv & .rcb),
Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total, (including
its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a
total of 32 characters
To Export Playlist/Transmission List/Pull List

file to CSV
Export to the MS Excel-compatible CSV files is allowed for playlists, Transmission Lists and pull lists. Only
columns which are configured as visible are exported. The columns order also sticks to the current grid
configuration. It is possible to export the whole list or a selected part of it (if some events are selected).
If there are some hidden secondary events, they will not be exported. Header row is always exported.
The CSV file can be opened with the MS Excel and printed in any desired manner or used for other
purposes.
ADC™ Air Client
To perform an export to CSV

1. On the File tab of the main menu, from the Print group select the Export to CSV icon.
2. The Export to CSV file dialog is displayed. Choose the desired folder, enter the desired name, and
then click Save.
3. If no error messages appear, the target file is created. (This example uses the name Generic.csv.)
4. It is now possible to open it in the MS Excel application and print it in any desired manner, or use the
data for other purposes.
 Open Excel, navigate to the folder containing the .csv file, and select the file type for .cvs.

ADC™ Air Client
 Select the desired .csv file and then click Open.
To Open an Existing Playlist

1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open play list icon ( ).
2. Select the play list file you wish to open and view. The default playlist file directory is the same
directory where the Air Client application resides.
3. From the Open/Save dialog box, select a playlist and click Open. Playlist filenames use a .LST
extension.
 Once the playlist file is open, the file can be checked for accuracy, changes can be made, etc.
Note: Your playlist name(s) may be different than what appears here.
Note: The first time "File/Open Playlist, File/Open Text, Append/load/insert list" is used, the dialog
window shows the directory specified in Properties/Environment. If the operator browses to a
different location, the Dialog "remembers/remaps to" the last used folder, and opens it by default
the next time "File/Open Playlist, File/Open Text, Append/load/insert list' is used.
To Insert a Play List file to the Transmission

List
Use this procedure to insert a play list file above the placement of the cursor on the transmission list.
This can be used for schedule or program changes.

ADC™ Air Client
1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the VIEW LIST Icon ( ). The Choose List dialog is displayed.
2. Choose the desired List (PlayList1), and then click OK. This brings up the Transmission List that will
be used for On Air Playback.
3. Select the event line where the playlist will be inserted. Position the cursor on the transmission list
at the specific point where the play list will be inserted.
IMPORTANT: The playlist is inserted ABOVE the selected line.
4. From the Quick Access ribbon tab in the List Tools group, select the Insert List icon ( ). The
Insert PlayList dialog is displayed.
Note: If using the ADC AirFlex functionality for breakaway scenarios, browse to the location of the
Breakaway Lists. This is typically a subfolder to the ADC Playlist location. For more information see
the "ADC AirFlex Reference" manual.
5. On the Insert PlayList dialog, select the Play List file that will be inserted to the On Air Play List
window, and then select Open.
 The selected play list is inserted above the selected line.
 The filename of the inserted play list appears above the newly inserted play list.
 In ADC no more than 12500 events can be added into a Transmission List.
total of 32 characters.

ADC™ Air Client
To Append a Play List file to the Transmission

List
1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the View List Icon ( ). The Choose List dialog is displayed.
2. Choose the desired List (PlayList1), and then click OK. This brings up the Transmission List that will
be used for On Air Playback.
3. From the Quick Access ribbon tab in the List Tools group select the Append List icon ( ). The
Append PlayList dialog is displayed.
Note: If using the ADC AirFlex functionality for breakaway scenarios, browse to the location of the
Breakaway Lists. This is typically a subfolder to the ADC Playlist location. For more information see
the "ADC AirFlex Reference" manual.
CAUTION: You can also right click in the transmission list to open the Playlist Options menu and
select Append List. Do this with care. Load List is located next to Append List on the right click
transmission list options menu. If Load List is selected the On Air Transmission List will be taken off
the air!
About ADC v11 vs. ADC v12 Lists: The Air Client v4 application contains an embedded playlist
converter that allows existing ADC v11 playlists to be automatically and transparently converted to
ADC v12 playlist format upon loading or appending.
4. On the Append Playlist dialog, select the Play List file that will be appended to the On Air Play List
window, and then select Open.

ADC™ Air Client
 In ADC no more than 12500 events can be added into a Transmission List.
5. The selected play list will be appended to the window.
6. When the filename marks done at the top of the transmission list:
 The bottom of the transmission list will update with the currently running play list. (Example
below is a representation only of what it will look like)
 Below is an example of how events appear in the window when not running.
To Load a List
This operation will overwrite any events that are currently in the transmission list with the play list file
that is selected. This is intended to be used for Record Lists or when the transmission list is already off
the air.
WARNING: If Load List is selected the On Air Transmission List will be taken off the air!
• Right click in the transmission list to open the Play List Options menu, and then select Load List.
total of 32 characters.
About ADC v11 vs. ADC v12 Lists: The Air Client v4 application contains an embedded playlist converter
that allows existing ADC v11 playlists to be automatically and transparently converted to ADC v12
playlist format upon loading or appending.
To Run the Transmission List

With a playlist loaded:
1. Select Run on the optional Hardware Control Panel (OCP)
OR
ADC™ Air Client
Double click on the play list to bring up the software version of the On Air Play list control panel and
select Run.
2. Selecting Run threads up all available devices that have the IDs located in the device. Typically only
the disk is able to thread and any Switch Only sources such as Studio or Network sources.
Software Panel buttons:
 Run: Thread and cues the first event in a playlist and any events within the time range specified
in the lookahead. The number of events cued is limited by the number of available media heads
and devices. You cannot play events until you run the playlist.
 Play: Plays the first event in a playlist; however, before you can play events, you must first click
the Run button. The Play button can also be used to restart a frozen or held playlist or a playlist
stopped by a break event. Clicking the Play button initiates preroll for the playlist so the
following event will play after the preroll time.
 The Play button will not play a hard start event unless it is configured to do so, as described in
"Miscellaneous" on page 4-14. Use the Play Hard Hits option to start a hard start event with the
Play button on the control panel. If this is not set, the operator cannot play an event that has a
hard start if the playlist has stopped running.
 Ready: Turn on tension to the next VTR event in tension release to prepare upcoming VTR
events. Click this button to prepare a VTR event for transmission that is out of the standby on-
time range. Usually used after an upcount events to get the next event ready.
 Hold: Holds the countdown of an event that is playing, causing the event to continue playing
longer than its duration. You can extend the event’s duration until the Play button is clicked. The
playlist will then advance to the next event which can only be played with the Play or Skip
button.
 SyncSkip: Provides synchronous payout of commercials across multiple lists. The SyncSkip
command concept is that the next event with a designated sequential Seg # becomes equal to
the remaining part of the current event. Since each of these events represent the entire
program, the SOM of the next event is shifted to the EOM point of the current event and the
DUR of the next event is made equal to the remaining DUR of the current event.
 Skip: Skips the event currently playing and plays the next event. Also, click this button to skip a
frozen or held event.
 Ten Rel: (Tension Release) Places a cued event’s VTR into tension release. At the Standby On
time (before an event is about to air), Air Client issues a command to the VTR to enter Ready
status and tension up the tape. The Status field of the event in a transmission list window
displays Ready.
 Freeze: Stops play and countdown. Click this button to pause the current event. Then, you may
skip, roll, reinitiate play or recue the event using the Play button. The Status field of the event in
a transmission list window displays Still.
 Roll: Roll bypasses normal preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the equipment will
allow. If the current event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it and plays the next event
ADC™ Air Client
using normal preroll values unless configured to use instant preroll values. If the current event is
frozen, this button will play the next event. If the current event is being held, clicking this button
plays the event.
 UnThd: (UnThread). Stops a running transmission list, including the on-air event and any events
that follow. All events are uncued and the list goes off-air.
 Protect: Toggles the signal switching paths between the on-air and protect devices. Click this
button to play an event from the air device, or vice versa. This is an optional function and may
not be available on your workstation.
 Secondary: The ADC hardware control panel can be configured to add the action Play
Secondary. This allows a secondary event to be manually triggered
 +1 Sec: Add one second to the playing event’s duration. Each time you click this button, one
second is added to the duration.
 Recue: Recues an on-air event. To play the recued event, click the Play button.
 -1 Sec: Subtract one second from the playing event’s duration. Each time you click this button,
one second is subtracted from the duration.
3. (Option) If loading a tape that does not have User Bits into a VTR follow these steps:
 Insert tape into an available On Air VTR deck that is in Local mode.
 Set levels.
 Select event on play list that represents loaded tape in VTR, right click and from the popup
menu select Barcode Event.
 Put VTR into Remote. Event on the play list will turn blue, the VTR will cue to SOM in the SOM
column, and device column will reflect the VTR tape is loaded into.
4. With the Play list loaded and cued up, select Play on the Hardware Control Panel or on the Software
Control Panel.
The play list starts playing. If the system is configured correctly, the switcher switches these events
to the program output of the switcher. Each event plays for the duration designated on play list.
To Air a Live Event

Live shows can air using a switch only device that was configured as a source on the switcher. The
switch only device and its audio/video cross points are configured in the device server.
Once you know for sure you will want to air a live show:
1. Insert a Primary Event into the transmission list at the time a live event is to air. (Note – If the log
was translated from traffic, the event type should be on the list already.)
2. Enter the ID name of the switch only. (Note – The event may already be in the playlist). Type AU for
the event type. The duration can be set to 00:00:00:00 for event to count up from the start, or the
estimated duration for the live event.
3. Exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select the Cancel
icon ( ).

ADC™ Air Client
 The switch only will play at the designated time if an "O" is also entered for the live show’s first
segment only. If an "O" is not used then the live show will air in the order it is entered in the On
Air Play List.
 Check the Device Status Window to see what the proper ID name is for a configured switch
only. The configured switch only will be assigned to the On Air Play List. Use the ID that is in the
ID column of the correct switch only to use.
 When each live event plays, the operator will need to manually roll out of a live event on the On
Air Play List. Select the Play button on the hardware or software control panel to roll out of the
live event to the break.
4. The events that run during a break will run as "A" event types (above the blank event types). The
break will play in sequence until the next "AU" live source is played, at which time the operator
would once again need to manually play out of the live event.
Join an Event in Progress

For details on performing Join in Progress operations see ADC AirFlex (see "ADC FlexSync" on page 209)..
To Preview Play
A threaded and cued event can be selected and previewed while the On Air event is currently playing.
1. Position the cursor on the event that is threaded and cued.
2. Right click on the transmission list, and from the popup menu select Preview Play.
3. Allow the event to play out and it will recue automatically.
4. If time does not permit the event to preview completely, select Recue in the right click options
menu while the cursor is still on the preview playing event.

ADC™ Air Client
Thread, Unthread, Recue an Event

An upcoming event that is threaded in a device can be unthreaded, recued, and re-threaded if needed.
Unthread an event
1. On the playlist window select the threaded event.
2. Right click on the playlist window and from the play list options menu select Unthread, or press
<Alt+U>, or press the UnThd button on the control panel.
Thread the event

1. On the playlist window select the unthreaded event.
2. Right click on the playlist window and from the play list options menu select Thread, or press
<Alt+T>, or press the Program Run button on the control panel.
Recue the event

1. On the playlist window select the threaded event.
2. Right click on the playlist window and from the play list options menu select Recue, or press
<Alt+C>, or press the Recue button on the control panel.
Using the VTR Device Control Panel

When an event on the transmission list is threaded in a VTR (or cartmachine VTR) a Device Control Panel
for the threaded VTR can be accessed to allow remote control of the VTR.
1. Position the cursor on the event that has a tape threaded in the VTR.

ADC™ Air Client
2. Right click on the transmission list, select Device Control Panel. (It can also be invoked by double
clicking on the device in the device status window.) A VTR remote panel will appear giving the user
basic control of the VTR.
Device controls include:

 Rewind (Rew): Click to rewind the currently threaded clip.
 Fast Forward (Ffwd): Click to fast forward the currently threaded clip.
 Stop: Click to stop the action (e.g. play, rewind, fast forward) taken on the currently threaded
clip.
 Play: Click to put the currently threaded clip into play.
 Cue: Click to cue the clip to event SOM, or to the head if the event SOM field is blank.
• If the Device Control Panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure to select
the CUE button on the Device Control Panel when finished.
• If the next event to air has been unthreaded and another event selected for control, the list
must manually rethreaded. It is the operator’s responsibility to ensure that resources are
returned to the list and properly threaded prior to the event.
 Eject: Eject the Tape.
Note: The Get Clip function – present on the VDCP panel - is not required or available for VTRs.
 Jog and Shuttle: Use these controls to move forward or backward in the material.
3. Click Copy SOM to apply the device's current position as the event's SOM.
IMPORTANT:
If configured, the ‘Adjust Durations When SOM Changes’ function modifies the duration of the event
based on the change in the SOM. Adjust Durations is not invoked if the initial SOM of the event is
blank.
No facility is provided for manually defining the EOM or Duration of the clip using the Device Control
Panel.
This function does not write any data to the database, nor does it update any other events in the
same or other lists. It is not intended to replace the prepping of material via the Media Client.
This capability is not available when the Device Control Panel is invoked from the Device Status
Window.
CAUTION!
If a VTR is controlled by a Device Control Panel, the event must be cued prior to playback.

ADC™ Air Client
If the device control panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure the tape is cued back to
the SOM by selecting the CUE button on the Device Control Panel.
The device will cue to the SOM that is located in the SOM column of the event.
Using the VDCP Device Control Panel

When an event on the transmission list is threaded in a VDCP device, such as a Video Server, a Device
Control Panel for the threaded VDCP device can be accessed to allow remote control of the VDCP
Device. Depending on the resources available to the list and the currently playing event, it may be
possible to unthread a currently cued event and select and thread another event prior to invoking the
VDCP control panel.
WARNING: Extreme caution must be exercised to avoid impacting on-air events. The VDCP control panel
should not be used when either head of the port to be controlled is currently being utilized on air.
1. Position the cursor on the event that has an event threaded in the VDCP device.
2. Right click on the transmission list, select Device Control Panel. (It can also be invoked by double
clicking on the device in the device status window.) A VDCP remote panel will appear giving the user
basic control of the VDCP device.
Device controls include:

 Rewind (Rew): Click to rewind the currently threaded clip.
 Fast Forward (Ffwd): Click to fast forward the currently threaded clip.
 Stop: Click to stop the action (e.g. play, rewind, fast forward) taken on the currently threaded
clip.
 Play: Click to put the currently threaded clip into play.
 Cue: Click to cue the clip to event SOM, or to the head if the event SOM field is blank.
• If the Device Control Panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure to select
the CUE button on the Device Control Panel when finished.
• If the next event to air has been unthreaded and another event selected for control, the list
must manually rethreaded. It is the operator’s responsibility to ensure that resources are
returned to the list and properly threaded prior to the event.
ADC™ Air Client
 Get Clip: Click to cue to the head of the clip, irrespective of the event SOM. For VDCP devices, if
the event has an SOM, it is not possible to navigate outside of the cued portion of the clip. The
Get Clip command can be used to cue and provide access to the entire clip.
Note: This will also blank the event SOM.
 Jog and Shuttle: Use these controls to move forward or backward in the material. If the Device
Control Panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure to select the CUE button on
the Device Control Panel when finished.
3. Click Copy SOM to apply the device's current position as the event's SOM.
IMPORTANT:
If configured, the ‘Adjust Durations When SOM Changes’ function modifies the duration of the event
based on the change in the SOM. Adjust Durations is not invoked if the initial SOM of the event is
blank.
No facility is provided for manually defining the EOM or Duration of the clip using the Device Control
Panel.
This function does not write any data to the database, nor does it update any other events in the
same or other lists. It is not intended to replace the prepping of material via the Media Client.
This capability is not available when the Device Control Panel is invoked from the Device Status
Window.
CAUTION!
- The VDCP Control Panel must be used with caution as it can also control Events playing from On Air
Video Servers.
- If the port selected for control is currently playing out a clip to air, playing an event that is CUED on the
2nd head of the port with the VDCP Control Panel stops the currently playing head.
- If played for its full duration, the reviewed clip is marked DONE.
- Re-cue the clip after reviewing it by clicking on the Cue button. If the clip is not re-cued before Air, it
starts playing from where it was stopped by the VDCP Control Panel.
To Set on Air Focus

Use the following procedure to ensure the currently playing event in a play list is always visible in the
play list window.
1. Right click on a playlist and from the popup menu select On Air Focus,
 Or from the Quick Access ribbon tab in the List Tools group press the ON Air Focus icon ( ).
The currently playing event is highlighted in the play list.
If you scroll the window until the playing event is not visible, the list will scroll back to the next event
when it goes into preroll.
Note: The colors on the following image have been modified to enhance readability. Your display
will look different.
The List Status bar indicates if On Air focus is ON or OFF, and if List is locked (Done Count = 0) or not.

ADC™ Air Client
Calculate Durations of Multiple Events

Use the following procedure to calculate the duration of multiple events.
1. Block highlight a sequence of events to calculate. (Click an event, then hold Shift and click another
event to select a range.)
2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Calculate Durations icon ( ). An Information box appears
giving the total duration of all highlighted/selected events.
Find an ID
To find an ID that is located on a playlist file or transmission list, the Find option can be used.
1. Position the cursor at the top of the list in the ID column.
2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Find ( ) icon. The Find Id box opens.
3. Specify the search parameters:

 "Find what" field: Type in the ID to find. (e.g. Demo0001)

ADC™ Air Client
 Match whole word only. Check to have search look for whole word matches.
 Match case: Check to have search look only for entries that match the case (Upper or Lower) for
the entry specified in the "Find what" field.
 Ignore secondary event: Check to ignore secondary events in "Find" operation. (When a search
in list is typically done, the result includes secondary events. If there is a secondary event with
the same ID, the user may not want to find it.)
 Direction: Specify the search direction: Up the list or Down the list form the current cursor
position.
4. Click Find Next. The cursor will jump to the first match of the ID or text string.
5. Edit the found ID or text string as necessary.
6. If additional IDs or text strings need to be found select Find Next. (Repeat this until all records are
found)
Find Next Occurrence of an ID in a List

Use the following procedure to find the next occurrence of an event with the same Media ID in a list.
1. Position the cursor on an event in a viewlist.
2. Press <F3> or right click on the list and from the menu select ‘Find Next Occurrence’. The cursor
jumps to the next occurrence of that event (with the same media ID) in the list.
Managing Bookmarks
Air Client v4.19 and higher provides a bookmark facility that allows operators to return to marked
locations in the playlist/Transmission list. Bookmarks are saved as part of the playlist file. If a playlist is
edited, bookmarked and then closed, when it is opened again the bookmarks is still e present. They can
be cleared or new bookmarks added again.
IMPORTANT: The Bookmark feature is supported in ADC v12 only.
To Add / Remove a Bookmark

A selection toggle between bookmarking the event and clearing the bookmark is accessed via a right
click option on the playlist or as a keyboard short cut (ALT+B). Up to 3 bookmarks can be set at one time.
If the operator attempts to create a forth bookmark, a pop up window is displayed stating that the
"Maximum Number of Bookmarks already in Use".
To Add a Bookmark
Use the following procedure to add a bookmark.

ADC™ Air Client
Select an event on the playlist.
1. Right click and from the context menu select Toggle Bookmark or press <Alt+B>.
2. The first column cell of the bookmarked event is highlighted with a distinct yellow color:
To Remove a Bookmark
Use the following procedure to remove a bookmark.
1. Select a bookmarked event on the playlist.
2. Right click and from the context menu select Toggle Bookmark or press <Alt+B>.
3. The bookmark is removed and the first column cell of the event is returned to normal color.

ADC™ Air Client
To Jump to a Bookmark
The following options allow the operator to quickly move from on air event to bookmarked events and
back again:
• To jump to the next/previous bookmarked event use the right click contextual menu or the
keyboard shortcuts: CTL+Alt+PageDown/ CTL+Alt+PageUp.
• If the operator is at the last bookmarked event in the playlist jumping down to the next bookmarked
event will bring them back to the on-air event and from there they can continue to jump down to
the first bookmarked event.
To Set a Hard Start Event

A hard start is an event type that will play an event at a predetermined time of day. (i.e. it plays at its
start time instead of when the previous event finishes playing). The device must be threaded and cued
for the hard start to run correctly.
To Toggle a Hard Start

1. Position cursor in type field of event that will be a hardstart event.
2. Select Alt+O in the Events ribbon tab, or get into Revise (Alt+R) and type in what event types are
needed.
Note: An "O" only designates an event to be a hard start, an "A" will still be required to correctly
thread, play, and switch the event.
3. Position cursor in the time field of the event to hardstart. If not already in Revise, get into Revise
mode (Alt+R).
4. Type in desired time of day for the hardstart to play to air. Get out of Revise Mode.
Note: Remember the times will not ripple past the hardstart event until it plays. Ripple time can be
used to see what time of day following events will play).
If the playlist is running short in duration to the hardstart event, the list will stop and wait until the
hardstart event’s scheduled start time. Alternately, if the list is running long in duration to the
hardstart event, the list will cut out of any playing event and start playing the hardstart event at the
scheduled start time.

ADC™ Air Client
Toggle Look Ahead

The Look Ahead is the area of the transmission list that will query the devices assigned to the
transmission list for availability of media in the lookahead area. The toggle lookahead option will adjust
the lookahead area from the current setting to a full list lookahead. If the lookahead is set to the full list,
then it will adjust to the pre-configured lookahead value.
The lookahead value is the configured value of events that the automation will check for device
availability.
• Events within the lookahead range display in blue (or customized color as set in the playlist options
menu/colors) if they are primary events and are located on an assigned device to the transmission
list.
• Events outside of the lookahead range will display in black. If an event is within the lookahead range,
but is missing media, it will display in red.
Toggle look ahead for the entire list checks the entire list and has a direct impact on how GMT transfers
media.
To Toggle Look Ahead

Right click on a playlist list window and from the popup menu select Toggle Look Ahead or press <F8>
shortcut.
Managing List Confirmations

It is possible to configure a Confirmation for any modification of a Play List, If list confirmations are
configured, the concerned parameters are displayed in a confirmation window. For details see
Configuring Playlist Options (see "Configuring Multiple Device Server Connections" on page 217).
The operator can choose to Apply the change, Find Next change, or Cancel the Confirmations for:
• Event Time, ID, Title and Number
• Event(s) Delete / Cut
• Event(s) or Playlist Paste / Insert
• Event(s) Move.
Managing Secondary Events on a Playlist

Options for secondary events allow an operator to customize their display in the playlist.
IMPORTANT: To use the option of Secondary Event Hiding in the Playlist Options menu, enable the Air
Client Properties parameter Environment>List Options>Allow Secondary Event Hiding.

ADC™ Air Client
IMPORTANT: When secondary events are hidden, if an event or block of events are highlighted and then
deleted, the hidden events within the selection are also deleted.
IMPORTANT: ADC Air Client operators can attach up to 49 secondary events to a primary event within
the ADC Transmission List. This value is critical to know for users who utilize hard start events within
their ADC Transmission List. The logic within the ADC Transmission List requires the next hard start
event to occur within the next 50 events.
Note: For a list of secondary events: Appendix B: Secondary Events (see "Secondary Events" on page
287).
To Show / Hide Secondary Events

1. Click the right-mouse button on the playlist’s window to display the right-click menu.
2. Select the desired display option.
When secondary events are hidden, the playlist right-click menu option changes to display the
option Show All Secondaries.
When secondary events are displayed, the playlist right-click menu option changes to display the
option Hide All Secondaries.
 If any secondaries are currently hidden in the list, from the right click menu select Show All
Secondaries to ensure all secondary events are shown in the playlist.
 If any secondaries are currently shown in the list, from the right click menu select Hide All
Secondaries to hide all secondary events in the playlist. Hidden secondary events are
represented with icons in the Event column of the playlist.
 To toggle expand / contract a specific hidden secondary event on the list, select a hidden event
and then from the right click menu select Expand/Contract An Event. Alternatively double click
the event to toggle expand/contract.
 To hide a preconfigured set of secondary events, from the right click menu select Hide Some
Secondary Type. See below: About Specifying which secondary events to show or hide (on page
82).

ADC™ Air Client
An example of a secondary event represented with icons is shown in the following image. The icon
appears in the associated event’s title button.
About Specifying which secondary events to show or hide

To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide dialog box by
clicking Select Secondaries to hide.

ADC™ Air Client
• Primary Event in Play and Other Primary Events: In the List, there is a distinct display filtering setting
for the Secondary events of the OnAir/OnLine Primary event only (does not apply for preview played
events), and for the Secondary events of the other Primary events (not playing).
The activation of these 2 secondary events display filtering is configurable per List (in multi-login
mode).
 These options are available only when configuring "Select Secondaries to Hide" from a
transmission list (Resources>View List> "select a playlist list").
 They do not appear for a playlist that is being created (File>Open Playlist> "select a playlist
list").
• Configure the Secondary events to hide :
 per "Sec" criteria (sAV, sGPI, ****, …),
 per ID criteria (Extended Ids managed),
 and per Type criteria (P, T, S, A, R,…).
It is possible to combine these criteria. For instance :
 Hide any Comment with blank type, but show any Comment with R or P type.
 Hide any sAV (whatever the ID and Type is).
 Hide any sAV with ID "LOGO", and show all other sAV.
 Show any sKEY or sTRANSKEY .
• The "Displayed Sec. Event" & "Hidden Sec. Events" mode allow users to hide the Secondary event
per Event Type. It avoids having to configure keys if only this mode is used.
• The "Available Hide Sec. Keys" & "Hide Sec. Keys" mode allows users to use the keys configured in
the key "library" through Properties ribbon tab > Hide Secondary Event keys ( ) function. For
configuration details see Properties: Hide Secondary Event Keys (see "Hide Secondary Event Keys"
on page 267).
Note: Both modes can be used together but attention must be taken not to use contradictory hiding
conditions.
(Single-Server logon) Select Secondary Events to Show/Hide

1. To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide dialog
box by clicking Select Secondaries to hide.
2. Select a Secondary event in the Displayed or Hidden area and choose arrows to move it to the
opposite area.
 Single arrows (<, >) move individual items.
 Double arrows (<<, >>) will move all items.
Some hidden Secondary events are transcoded for a more readable display in Custom Column of the
Primary event line.
3. Click OK. When a primary event goes to air, the specified secondary event(s) assigned to the primary
event are hidden.
(Multi-Server logon) Select Secondary Events to Show/Hide for a Primary Event

in Play
The activation of these 2 secondary events display filtering is configurable per List (in multi-login mode).
ADC™ Air Client
1. To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide dialog
box by clicking Select Secondaries to hide.
2. Select the target Primary Event (Primary Event in Play). The dialog is now active for that selection.
opposite area.
Primary event line.
4. Click OK. When a primary event goes to air, the specified secondary event(s) assigned to the primary
event are hidden.
(Multi-Server logon) Select Secondary Events to Show/Hide for all Primary

Events
1. Select the target Primary Event (Other Primary Events). The dialog is now active for that selection.
opposite area.
Primary event line.
3. Click OK. The specified secondary event(s) assigned to all primary events in the schedule are hidden.
(An icon indicates the presence of hidden secondary events.)
Revising the Primary Event

When Revising the corresponding field of the Primary event (for example: Format, Scrambling, Logo,
5+1, and Pattern), a graphic edition allows user to modify the corresponding hidden Secondary event, by
choosing in a list of pre-defined values.
In the List, there is a distinct display filtering setting for the Secondary events of the OnAir/OnLine
Primary event only (does not apply for preview played events), and for the Secondary events of the
other Primary events (not playing).

ADC™ Air Client
Note: The following image is provided for reference only. The colors and window style are used to
enhance readability. It is a representation only, illustrating this type of revision. Your screen may look
different.
Managing Trigger Events

ADC v12.19 and higher support a software solution for triggering one list by another via primary events
only. These triggers allow all of the same functions available via the GPI inputs- all of the control panel
functions plus 'Skip to next N'. Also, it is possible to issue a ganged command, and to issue triggers
across connected Device Servers.
Note: This software trigger list Linking functionality only applies to playlists. Media, GMT, Compile and
Record lists do not need to be linked to each other or playlists.
Reference Note: This functionality provides an alternative to the GPI method. Historically, in order to
have one playlist control the start of another playlist on ADC a sGPI output is used on the Master playist
to send a GPI trigger to the Slave playist(s)' GPI Input. The Slave playlists are then configured to accept a
'Contact Start'.
Function Configuration:
For details on configuring Trigger events see section ‘Configuring List Types>Configuring Transmission
List Options’ in the ADC Device Server v12.19 and ConfigManager Install and Ops Reference.
Setting the Trigger Column parameter

In Air Client v4.19 and higher a Trigger column is available in a playlist. This column provides a drop-
down combo box list of selectable parameters:
• No Action (Default) • Play to Next

• Cut Next • Ready

ADC™ Air Client
• Freeze • Roll
• Hold • Run
• Play • Skip
• Play Secondar • Skip to Next
Note: This functionality applies to primary events only. All secondary events default to "No Action" and
do not allow any other command to be selected via drop-down combo-box.
Example: Trigger column Drop-down combo-box with action types.
Colors for Action events:

Events with non-blank actions are displayed in different foreground and background colors. These colors
are chosen by the user (right-click on transmission list - Colors menu).
Default colors are:

• Foreground (clBlack)
• Background (clMoneyGreen).

ADC™ Air Client
Displaying list caption with the name of Master list:

A playlist keeps information about the list which it is currently triggered by. This data (the exact list
name) is used in the caption of a Transmission List in Air Client.
• If a transmission list can be triggered by another list, it shows the name of the Master list in the
caption of the transmission window.
• If the list isn’t triggered by any other list, the caption of transmission window doesn’t differ from
previous versions.
Known Issues in Air Client and Device Server

A new command was added to list commands which requests the name of the Master list to display it in
the Transmission window’s caption. When an Air Client v4.19 sends this command several times to an
earlier Device Server (pre 12.19), the Device Server will never reply to it and so Air Client interprets thus
as a lost connection with the Device Server. To avoid this ‘connection lost’ scenario, when Air Client
v4.19 sends this command once and doesn’t’ receive a reply, it stops sending the command to the
Device Server.
Manage the Operation Log

The Air Client Operation Log tracks the operation activity within the Air Client and is recorded in binary,
and text formats. The text file and the binary file are both created when the Operation Log is enabled
(i.e. The option Enable operation log is checked (enabled) under the Properties ribbon tab option
Operation Log.)
• The binary Operation Log is written in descending order by time. The text Operation Log is written in
ascending order by time.
• The "Days To Keep" configuration is only active for the binary Operation Log. The text Operation
Logs are kept until they are manually deleted.
• Along with the binary version, the Text file version is automatically created and saved in the
Operation Log Directory specified under Properties > Operation Log.
• The binary log can be opened and viewed from within Air Client. The text Operation Log can be
opened with any Text Editor, (Notepad, WordPad, Word, etc.).
• The length of the operation log directory name is limited to a maximum 256 characters. Attempts to
save an Operation Log file with a longer name display the following warning message: 'The Directory
for Operation Log file is too Long, Please adjust to a shorter one'.
OCP Note: When the Operation Control Panel (OCP) is used for controlling a Transmission List or a group
of lists (in the same button), in addition to the ADC alias name, the Operation Log also includes the
name of the button and the list where the action was done.

ADC™ Air Client
To Open the Operation Log in Air Client

1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open Operation Log ( ) option.
2. From the browse dialog, navigate to and select the operation log to open.
3. Click OK to open. The Operation Log (binary version) is displayed in its own window.
To Save the Operation Log as a Textfile in Air Client

1. From the File ribbon tab select Open Operation Log ( ).
2. From the Open Operation Log window, navigate to and select the operation log to open.
3. Click OK to open. The Operation Log (binary version) is displayed in its own window.
4. From the File ribbon tab select Save Operation Log as text ( ).
5. In the ‘Save Operation Log as text’ window:
 Accept the default file name or - if desired- specify a new file name.
 Accept the default path or - if desired - specify a new location to save the file.
6. Click Save to write the log file to a text file.
This textfile can be copied to other locations as required. Use a standard ASCII editor, such as
NotePad, to or view the file. (For details see To Export the Textfile Operation Log (on page 88).)
To Export the Textfile Operation Log

The Air Client text format Operation Log can be exported as required. This allows the log to be read
outside the ADC system.
1. Manually navigate to the Operation Log Directory that is specified under the Properties ribbon tab
option Operation Log ( ).

2. Copy the desired .txt format Operation Log to a target location.
3. The operator can forward the text Operation Log and/or open it for viewing using any Text Editor,
(Notepad, WordPad, Word, etc.):

ADC™ Air Client
Using Air Protect

Air Protect is an option for the Automation system. When properly configured, if a problem occurs with
an event that resides on both a primary playout device and a backup "protect" device, then the air
protect option could be used.
To Use Air Protect

To use this option when a noticeable problem is occurring with an event that is protected:
1. Click on the Air Protect button on the OCP hardware control panel, or click Protect on the Software
Control Panel.
2. If the next cued item needs to be switched to the protect device instead/also, then right click on the
transmission list and select Air Protect in the Play List Options menu.
This causes the protect device to go to air instead of the primary device when the event plays.
To Check Switcher Control

This is typically used as a troubleshooting/engineering tool to check switcher control from the Air
Client software. Any switcher or router that is connected to the device server can be remotely selected
and controlled with a control panel.
CAUTION: Special attention during the use of this feature. This panel could override what crosspoint is
currently switched to Air.
1. From the Quick Access Ribbon tab, select the Switcher Control Panel icon ( ) from the Standard
group. The Choose Switcher dialog is displayed.

ADC™ Air Client
2. Select a switcher for the Switcher list and then click OK. A switcher panel for the selected device is
displayed.
3. Press the Switch button on the switcher panel. This causes the selected Input to be switched to the
Output setting.
Reviewing Tally status information in the

AsRun log text file
The Tally feature allows a report in the List (and corresponding Zoom window) GUI, and in its AsRun log
on a given Air Client station a corresponding Tally information.
Example: A typical application example of this feature is a system with List Redundancy feature: E.g. For
a given TV channel, the Master transmission list and the slave transmission list are playing in parallel
(mirrored and synchronized).
• In normal situation the Master transmission list is ON AIR (= broadcasted), and the slave
transmission list is ON LINE.
• If a problem occurs on the Master transmission list (automation or device problem), the Slave
transmission list is manually switched On Air by the operator through a change-over (or another
way).
• In that situation the previously Master list is ON LINE, and the previously Slave list is ON AIR.
• The "change-over" (or any other switching device) which allows to put 1 of the 2 redundant
Transmission Lists ON AIR provides a tally signal indicating which one (Master or Slave) is On Air.
• On the Air Client station, the Tally signal(s) information is (are) received through one (or several) GPI
board(s) by the Air client application.
Tally: On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s)
of the list
Tally status display in the Transmission List & Zoom window GUI
• The Air client can uses the Tally information of a given List to display an "On Air" / "On Line" status
and color for the playing event(s) of the corresponding transmission list(s) and zoom window(s).

ADC™ Air Client
• If a Tally is configured for a given List, and if it is seen as "On Air" according to the Tally
configuration, then the "On Air" color and ON AIR status are used in the List and its Zoom window,
• The "On Line" color and ON LINE status are used in the List and its Zoom window, if it is seen as "On
Line" according to the Tally configuration.
• The Secondary events of the On Air / On Line Primary event (first playing event of the List), use the
"On Air" / "On Line" color and status (depending of the Tally status of the List).
• Primary events in preview play use the "On Air" / "On Line" color (depending of the Tally status of
the List), but have a PLAY status.
• If no Tally is configured for a given List, then the "On Air" color and PLAY status are used in the List
and its Zoom window for playing events.
"On Air" Transmission list & its Zoom window (On Air color and status used for playing events) :
Note: The following image is provided for reference only. The colors and window style are used to
enhance readability. Your display will look different.

ADC™ Air Client
"On Line" Transmission list & its Zoom window ("On Line" color and status used for playing events):
Note: The following image is provided for reference. The colors and window style are used to enhance
readability. Your display will look different.
Log format
If this option is activated on the Air Client, and for the AsRun log configuration of a given transmission
list, the AsRun log text file indicates on a specific line each change in the OnAir/OnLine status (Tally
information associated with a specific transmission list).
The Tally information is logged in a specific line:
ON-AIR DATE/TIME ID S TITLE
-------- ----------- ----------- -- ------------
03/04/10 03:00:00.00 TALLY IS:ONAIR
03/04/10 22:30:10.00 TALLY CHANGE:ONLINE
03/04/10 22:31:00.00 TALLY CHANGE:ONAIR
The corresponding line contains :

• the date and time of the Tally status change,
• the information TALLY in the ID field,
ADC™ Air Client
• the information CHANGE:ONAIR or CHANGE:ONLINE (corresponding to the new status after a

change is detected) in the Title field.
To avoid having to scan previous log files to know the Tally status of a given one, when the daily AsRun
log file is created (at a configurable time of the day), the current Tally status is logged in the first line.
The corresponding first line contains :

• the date and time of the Tally status change,
• the information TALLY in the ID field,
• the information IS:ONAIR or IS:ONLINE (As this is not corresponding to a change of the Tally status).
Extended Play Mix/Wipes Early

The ability to play mix/wipes early allows dissolves (mixes) or wipes to be done between the source that
is currently on-air and the next source. Events that include a mix or wipe transition are required to roll
several frames early to allow the events to overlap.
Typical uses are to dissolve between VTRs inside an LMS, or when going from a station promo to a
station ID. These promos and Station IDs always have extended vision on the videotape, i.e. the actual
vision on the videotape have a longer duration, than what is shown in the Database.
Configuration Note: This feature is configured in the Configuration Manager, List Options > Mix/Wipe
tab. For configuration details reference the ADC Device Server and Configuration Manager v12
Installation and Operations Reference : section Configuring List Types > Configuring Transmission List
Options.
When properly configured, playlist timing can be automatically maintained by playing an event with a
transition for an extended duration, so that it finishes at its scheduled time, leaving the list timing
unchanged. The event is played early to provide overlap for the transition, but compensates for the
changed playlist time by playing the event for an extended time, which is equal to the mix or wipe
transition duration.
With a standard Cut transition events are played back-to-back and the list keeps its timing. However,
using Extended Play there are three options:
• Extend Old: When configured for this option, the On-Air event is extended to provide overlap
material for the transition (e.g. Dissolve or Mix). The list timing is maintained.
• Extend New: When configured for this option, the Next event is played early and for an extended
duration. The list timing is maintained.
• Extend Both: When configured for this option, the On-Air event is extended by ½ the effect
duration, the incoming event is played early by ½ the effect duration, and the new event is extended
by ½ the effect duration.

ADC™ Air Client
Note: Extend Both is not fully implemented as described above, because currently the playlist always
plays early by the full transition duration.
Example: Automatic Duration Update on the Playlist

This example applies to "Extend New" Play Mix/Wipes, and illustrates Automatic Duration Update on
the playlist from extended play mix/wipes.
• Before the events are CUED, the playlist looks similar to the following.
• Once the Events are Cued:

The incoming (New) event is extended when it is CUED
If an event has a MIX on it, and "Extend New" has been selected, the duration of the NEW event is
automatically increased in the Play List by the duration of the transition. (i.e. If the duration of the
event was 20 seconds and the transition (mix) has a duration of "S" (Slow = 60 frames = 2 seconds
using NTSC), then the Play List duration for that event is automatically changed to 22 seconds.

ADC™ Air Client
Displaying AFD and BarData Values in a

Playlist
The NEXIO Native IP driver can control ARC (Aspect Ratio Conversion) override using Secondary Events
to trigger the ARC on the NEXIO Port.
• Air Client can be set up to display the AFD data. Real AFD of media, which is stored in the Database
and transmitted to the Device Server (Driver) via the AFD column.
• The BarData parameter is implemented as an option in MoreInfo Builder. Bar data defines the
extent of the image within the coded frame.
Note: For more information see Appendix F: About AFD Codes (see "About AFD Codes" on page 321).
Create an AFD column in the PlayList

1. Configuring Video ARC Override by Stream in the Config Tool.
Note: For information on configuring the Video ARC Override by stream see ADC Device Server
v12.14 and Config Tool Installation Reference: section "Configuring Devices using Configuration
Manager > Video Disk Configuration (General) > To Configure a NEXIO Video Disk (NEXIO Native
Driver)".
2. In Air Client: go to the PlayList window, right-click and choose Columns
3. Click Add... and configure a new column as shown in the following picture.

ADC™ Air Client
4. Highlight the new column entry in the Available columns list pane and click > to move it to the
Displayed columns list pane. Use the Up / Down buttons to place it in the desired order position.
5. Click the OK button and ensure the new column is added to the Playlist. This column will display the
AFD value.
6. In ‘Revise’ mode can be selected different values from the dropdown list:

ADC™ Air Client
To Display BarData Values in a Playlist

Add an MI Additional Field
1. From Air Client’s Properties ribbon tab select MI Additional Fields ( ). The Additional Fields
Configuration dialog is displayed.
2. Click Add…
3. In the More Info Field dialog use the dropdown lists to select the following:
 The Database (i.e. ASDB) in which the Table and Field reside.
 The Table (i.e. ASEXT) in which the Field resides.
 The Field (i.e. BarData). A field with the name "BarData" must exist in the Database.

ADC™ Air Client
4. From the Configured fields pane select the newly entered field (i.e. BarData) and then click > to
move the selection to the Used fields pane.
5. When finished select OK.
Add the New Column to a Playlist

1. In Air Client: go to the Playlist window, right-click and choose Columns. The Column setting… dialog
is displayed.
2. Click Add... button. The Column Name dialog is displayed.

ADC™ Air Client
3. In the Column Name dialog, enter a name for the new column which will be used to set the BarData
value after AFD, and then click OK.
4. Select the new column in the Available columns list and click Edit... button.
5. Choose Additional API BData from drop-down list in the column settings dialog, set Property values
to Datasource: DS_API and Datafield:Bar Data, then click OK.

ADC™ Air Client
6. Highlight the new column entry (i.e. BData) in the Available columns list pane and click > to move it
to the Displayed columns list pane. Use the Up / Down buttons to place it in the desired order
position.
7. Click the OK button and ensure the new column (i.e. BData) is added to the PlayList. This column will
display the BarData value in text form.
 H - means the Horizontal (letterbox)
 V – means the Vertical (pillarbox)
 First digit is the line number of end of left or top bar.
 Second digit is the line number of start of right or bottom bar.
 If in the database there is no ‘BarData’ for the event, the cell will be empty.
8. The ‘Revise’ mode values must be entered in the same format:
Implementing ID Video ARC Override

The ‘New AFD’ value provides support for implementing ID Video ARC Override. The NEXIO Native IP
driver can control ARC (Aspect Ratio Conversion) override using Secondary Events to trigger the ARC on
the NEXIO Port.
ADC™ Air Client
Note: For more information see .
Create a Custom AFD Override column in the PlayList

1. Configuring Video ARC Override by Stream in the Config Tool.
Note: For information on configuring the Video ARC Override by stream see ADC Device Server
v12.14 and Config Tool Installation Reference: section "Configuring Devices using Configuration
Manager > Video Disk Configuration (General) > To Configure a NEXIO Video Disk (NEXIO Native
Driver)".
2. In Air Client: go to the PlayList window, right-click and choose Columns
3. Click Add... button
4. Enter a name for the new column which will be used to set desired AFD value after ARC, and then
click OK.
5. Select new column in the Available columns list and click Edit... button
ADC™ Air Client
6. Choose Additional API New AFD from drop-down list in the column settings dialog, and then click
OK.
7. Move new column from Available columns list to the Displayed columns list and place it to desired
position.
8. Click the OK button and ensure new column is added to PlayList.
ADC™ Air Client
Manage AFD Override in a Playlist

1. Create an event in the Playlist with an ID taken from the NEXIO storage. Ensure that event is
displayed blue.
2. Choose the Desired Conversion

 Determine what is the direction of Aspect Ratio Conversion that you are going to apply basing
on the Aspect Ratio of the ID and Aspect Ratio of the NEXIO stream:
• 16:9 to 4:3 or
• 4:3 to 16:9
 Revise the event and select desired AFD for the video output after conversion. Take into account
the following correspondence between AFD values and values available in configured custom
column drop-down list:
Table 1. Conversion from 4:3 to 16:9.
Desired AFD after conversion Value from corresponding custom column in Playlist
0100 16:9CF-16:9 Wide
1001 16:9CF-4:3 PillarBox
1010 16:9CF-16:9 NoCrop
Table 2. Conversion from 16:9 to 4:3.
Desired AFD after conversion Value from corresponding custom column in Playlist
0100 4:3CF-16:9 Wide
1000 4:3CF-16:9 Full
1010 4:3CF-16:9 NoCrop
3. Play the list and check results
ADC™ Air Client
 Thread and play the list.

 Look to the output video from corresponding NEXIO port and ensure that video is formatted
according to desired AFD.
4. (Optional) Try another conversion
 Unthread the list.
 Revise the event and set another desired AFD value in the configured custom column.
 Thread and play the list.
 Look to the output video from corresponding NEXIO port and ensure that video is formatted
according to desired AFD.
Using the Zoom Window

The Zoom Window option will show a view of the currently running event, the next event to run, and
the next missing event on the transmission list. When the Zoom Window is opened in the Air Client,
there are time code values in the status bar at the bottom of that window that can be double-clicked
and displayed in separate re-sizable windows.
To launch the Zoom Window

1. Ensure an active Transmission List or a playlist is loaded.
2. From the Quick Access ribbon tab select Zoom Window ( ). The Zoom Windows is displayed for
that list showing the currently running event, the next event to run, and the next missing event on
the Transmission List.
Zoom Window status bar
ADC™ Air Client
• Device Server Time: Shows the Device Server time of day adjusted by the appropriate offset. The
specified offset is shown in the next time field.
• Drop Frame/No Drop Frame. DF and NDF represent drop frame status for a broadcast facility. For
example: When drop frame is on, DF displays in the status bar. When drop frame is off, NDF displays
in the status bar.
• Source Clock Settings T/P/S: Indicates the specified type of clock input connected to the system:
(SMPTE timecode, Video Sync, or the Device Server’s internal PC clock). The displayed Source type
changes to reflect the connected input: PC (P), Sync (S), Time Code (T).
• Timezone Offset: The amount of time (in HH:MM) that the Master Time must be delayed (Or
advanced) to account for time zone differences. When configured and set to a list, the Time Zone is
displayed in the title bar of it List window, and of its Zoom window. The time zone offset is added to
the time value of each event in the List.
• Duration of the playing event. Duration is displayed in the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where hh=hours,
mm=minutes, ss=seconds and ff=frames.
• Played time of the playing event (counting up from 00:00:00:00)
• Current Timecode of the playing event (counting up from the SOM)
• N/Q/O: Time to Next (N), Audible Time to Next (Q), or Hardstart (O) event.
 N (AN/AUN): Time to Next provides a countdown through all sequential pre-recorded events
until the next N is seen in the list – mostly used for countback to live news segments.
 Q (AQ/AUQ): Audible Time to Next provides an audible countdown starting 30 seconds from a
commercial break into the next live event. To minimize its effect on existing functionality ‘N’
(Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an operator when letter ‘Q’ is entered.
Note: The Q event type option requires the "Audible Time To Next" option be enabled (checked)
on the Environment->List Options tab.
necessary to close and re-open the list windows in the client for the feature to work. (Re-loading
the lists is not necessary.)
 O (AO/AUO): On-Time/Override Also known as a hard start, time trigger, or absolute, this event
will play based on a time of day entered into the time of day field
CAUTION: An incorrect time of day value will cause incorrect playback.
• (L)ong or (S)hort. The playlist is running Long or Short and this is the gap or overlap time to the next
Hard Start.
 If the list is running Long in duration to the hardstart event, the list will cut out of any playing
event and start playing the hardstart event at the scheduled start time.
 If the playlist is running Short in duration to the hardstart event, the list will stop and wait until
the hardstart event’s scheduled start time.
ADC™ Air Client
Expandable Windows
Double clicking on the fields indicated below will launch expandable windows. These windows can be
resized as required. The can be individually closed, but will all close when the Zoom Window is closed.
In order of appearance these expandable windows are:

• TC Timecode Window: Shows the Device Server time of day adjusted by the appropriate offset. The
specified offset is shown in the next time field.
• Duration Window: Starting from zero and counting down, this window shows the remaining
duration of the current on-air event.
• Played Window: Starting from zero and counting up, this window shows the amount of time played
in the current on-air event.
• Current TC Window: Starting from the event’s SOM and counting up, this window shows the real
time code of the current on-air event. The time value displayed in this window can be used should
an operator need to break away and then rejoin the event in the same place.
• Time to Next Window: Starting from zero and counting down, this window shows the time until the
Time to Next (N), Audible Time to Next (Q), or Hardstart (O) event.
 N (AN/AUN): Time to Next provides a countdown through all sequential pre-recorded events
until the next N is seen in the list – mostly used for countback to live news segments
 Q (AQ/AUQ): Audible Time to Next provides an audible countdown starting 30 seconds from a
commercial break into the next live event. To minimize its effect on existing functionality ‘N’
(Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an operator when letter ‘Q’ is entered.
Note: The Q event type option requires the "Audible Time To Next" option be enabled (checked)
on the Environment->List Options tab.
 O (AO/AUO): On-Time/Override Also known as a hard start, time trigger, or absolute, this event
will play based on a time of day entered into the time of day field
CAUTION: An incorrect time of day value will cause incorrect playback.
ADC™ Air Client
• Long/Short Window: When a Hardstart (O) event has been set in a Transmission List, this window
shows the currently playing event is Long (L) or Short (S) by the displayed amount.
 Long means that the currently playing event is scheduled to end xx amount of time after the
Hardstart is scheduled to start. This means the currently playing event will be truncated by the
displayed amount.
 Short means that the currently playing event is scheduled to end xx amount of time before the
Hardstart is scheduled to start. This means the currently playing event will end the displayed
amount before the Hardstart begins.
 With Air Client v4.18 and higher the long/short indication at the bottom of the list window is
emphasized; the background of this field is changed to red, and the font is slightly larger and
bolded when a long/short situation is on the list.
This is illustrated in the following image:
Using SyncSkip
SyncSkip provides synchronous payout of commercials across multiple lists. This command is initiated
via the Software or Hardware control panel in Air Client and sent to the Device Server.
Note. If the current event is frozen and the SyncSkip button is pressed, SyncSkip action is performed
with all necessary calculations.
• Transmission list and As-Run Log: SyncSkipped events are shown as SYNCSKIPPED in the
Transmission List and As-Run Log.
• Software Control Panel: When the SyncSkip button on Air Client’s Software control panel is pressed,
the SyncSkip command is sent to Device Server where all operations to handle this command are
performed. The decision as to which command is finally applied, Skip or SyncSkip, is taken by Device
Server. Air Client isn’t aware of this.
• Hardware Control Panel: By default this SyncSkip command occupies button 12 (right button in the
second row) on Air Client’s H/W control panel, but its position can be changed via H/W control panel
setting in Air Client:
• SyncSkip & GPI Triggers: The GPI Input Configuration in the Config Tool allows GPI triggers to be
configured to support the SyncSkip command. When set up, if an appropriate GPI signal is received
and the SyncSkip command is chosen, the SyncSkip list action is performed.
• SyncSkip & List Redundancy: Since List Redundancy is used to synchronize lists and to keep the up-
to-date copy of Master list, it also supports the SyncSkip command.
About the SyncSkip command

The SyncSkip command concept is that the next event with a designated sequential Seg # becomes
equal to the remaining part of the current event. Since each of these events represent the entire
ADC™ Air Client
program, the SOM of the next event is shifted to the EOM point of the current event and the DUR of the
next event is made equal to the remaining DUR of the current event.
Events characteristics before and after SyncSkip: Elapsed and remaining duration are taken at the point
when the SyncSkip command is sent, so preroll is taken into account because after a Skip is performed
the event finishes playing during preroll of the next event.
Required Conditions
The SyncSkip action can be performed for primary events (Single Spot or Multi-Segment events) only if
the following conditions are satisfied.
• The current playing event:
 Is AN (time-to-next).
 Has a non-blank segment number in the segment column.
• The next event down the list within the lookahead meets the following requirements:
 The same ID as the current playing event.
 Is the same type: AN
 Has a non-blank segment number. Segment numbers must be sequential (i.e. 1, 2, 3…)
• If using Multisegments, segments must be sequential and ingested with the same SOM and full
Duration of the entire show.
If any of the above conditions are not met, this command is replaced with simple Skip.
Note: Each of two events for SyncSkip (current and next) should represent the same entire program,
with the same DUR and SOM, i.e. there should be 2 identical events in the transmission list.
Example Operation
In the following example event Demo0017 occurs six times in the list and each occurrence of the event
is followed by two 30 second spots (in this example Demo0018 and Demo0019).
• All occurrences of Demo0017 are validated to have the same SOM and DUR.
• The first three occurrences of Demo0017 are each set as an AN event and are listed sequentially in
the Seg column: 1, 2, 3. (line 1, line 4, and line 7).
• The next three occurrences of Demo0017 are set as AN events and are listed sequentially in the Seg
column: 1, 2, 3. (line 10, line 13, and line 16).
ADC™ Air Client
1. Set up the playlist to meet the SyncSkip requirements.
2. Run the playlist.
3. Suppose that Demo0017 (Seg 1) has played ~ 00:00:29.00 and at this moment the SyncSkip
command was sent (i.e. The SyncSkip button was pressed on the Software Control Panel). List preroll
is 3 seconds. After the SyncSkip command the list will look something like this:
ADC™ Air Client
4. Suppose that Demo0017 (Seg 2 on line 3) has played ~ 00:02:02.00 and at this moment the SyncSkip
command was sent (i.e. The SyncSkip button was pressed on the Software Control Panel). List preroll
is 3 seconds. After the SyncSkip command the list will look something like this:
5. Suppose that Demo0017 (Seg 3 on line 5) is playing and the SyncSkip was sent. (i.e. The SyncSkip
button was pressed on the Software Control Panel)
 The system notes that the next occurrence of Demo0017 (Seg 1 on line 10) is not sequential
with Demo0017 (Seg 3 on line 5). This means the SkipSync action is invalid and instead it is
treated as a Skip action.
 On reaching the first occurrence of Demo0017 (Seg 1 on line 10) the SyncSkip action will
become a valid action for that grouping.
Example "good" and "bad" lists

The following are examples of "good" and "bad" lists.
ADC™ Air Client
"Good" list:
"Bad" list (IDs don’t match):
"Bad" list (event are not segmented):
"Bad" list (there is no second AN event down the list within lookahead):
ADC™ Air Client
SyncSkip informational warnings

Device Server v12.23 and higher support Informational Warnings with the SyncSkip functionality. Now
when Air Client sends ListSyncSkipEvent API command:
• Air Client waits for a reply to ListSyncSkipEvent command. If the reply contains an error status, an
appropriate error message is displayed.
• When the Device Server receives a ListSyncSkipEvent API command, the Device Server verifies the
value of the resulting duration.
 If it is more than preroll, normal status is returned as a response to ListSyncSkipEvent command.
 If duration is less than preroll, an appropriate error status is returned.
 If duration is negative, it is populated with 00:00:00.00 and an appropriate error status is
returned.
Note. Negative duration is impossible. When performing SyncSkip, server subtracts the preroll value
from the remaining clip duration. However, if the remaining duration is less than the preroll, SyncSkip
isn’t executed (as well as normal Skip).
Dynamic List Selection for API triggering

This feature provides a dynamic means to alter the linked list associations from the Air Client and also on
an event-by-event basis.
Triggered Lists Selection window in Air Client

List selection components are available for a Transmission list via a Trigger selection window and a
Trigger column of the Transmission list.
Launch the Trigger selection window

Use the following procedure to launch the Air Client’s Trigger selection window
1. Select the Edit Trigger option available from the "Event" tab of Air Client’s ribbon.
ADC™ Air Client
2. The Trigger Selection window is displayed. This window shows trigger actions and enabled triggered
lists of the current selected event.
3. Use the Action drop-down list to select trigger actions.

4. Select Trigger Lists: Select All enables (checks) all lists or individually enable/disable necessary
playlists by clicking on appropriate check-boxes.
 Press OK to save changes.
 Press Cancel to discard all changes done within the Trigger window.
 Default values for newly created event: No Action, all lists enabled.
5. If the Trigger window is invoked when a group of events is selected, this window will show No
Action and all lists disabled (because each event has different data and it is impossible to represent
information from each event in a single window).
 Press OK to save changes for each of selected events.
If OK is pressed when no lists are enabled, an error message is displayed:
Note: A Trigger Selection window can be invoked for a secondary event, but any changes will
take no effect, because secondary events do not support triggering.
Managing the Trigger column

The Trigger Column is available in the Transmission List.
1. Enter Revise mode. This enables a dropdown list of actions for the column.
ADC™ Air Client
2. Select an action from the drop-down list.
3. Exit Revise mode. The Trigger column displays data in the following way:
 Action: ALL if all lists are enabled
 Action: SELECT if some of lists are enabled
 No Action if no action is chosen.
Hint with enabled triggered lists

When the mouse pointer is moved over the Trigger Column a hint is displayed to facilitate an operator’s
ability to quickly look up what lists are enabled.
Depending on mouse location, list state and other conditions, this hint shows different information:
• The Hint appears only when mouse pointer moves over Trigger column. In all other cases hint
disappears.
• For primary events the hint shows the trigger action and an array of currently enabled lists
• For secondary events the hint shows No Action and no enabled lists (because secondary events do
not support triggering).
ADC™ Air Client
• If there is no configured triggered lists (not configured in Config Tool), the hint notifies that lists are
not configured.
Limitation with Triggered lists and a Playlist window

The main difference between a playlist and a Transmission List in Air Client is that a playlist represents a
file with events and is not related to any Device Server. So it is not possible to configure any triggered
lists in a playlist window because information about triggered lists is not available.
Storing selected lists within an event structure

Enabled triggered lists are configurable on an event basis; and information is stored within event
structure. A bit-mask field is used for keeping triggered lists state (enabled/disabled) within event
structure. Each bit of this field equals 0 if the list is currently disabled and 1 if the list is currently
enabled.
Example: In the following example a user selected 3 of 4 possible lists. Bit-mask is equal to 11012 or to
1310. This method of data organization is invisible for user because it is only necessary for transferring
information between Air Client and Device Server
Restrictions
This method imposes several user restrictions:
• A maximum 16 different lists can be triggered by one Transmission List. The Config Tool Linking tab
will not allow more than 16 triggered lists to be added to one Transmission List.
ADC™ Air Client
• Triggered lists should not be changed from the Config Tool if triggers are already used in
Transmission List. Violation of this rule can result in triggered lists reordering; causing bits in bit-
mask to correspond to wrong lists, and the server to send trigger commands to incorrect lists.
• To prevent users from editing the triggered lists array, the Config Tool Linking tab becomes disabled
if at least one event within the lookahead of the current Transmission List contains a non-empty
trigger action.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Playlist Editing Operations
Playlist Editing Operations

To Open an Existing Playlist
Use play list windows to create and edit play lists.
1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open Play List icon ( ).
2. Select the play list file you wish to open and view.
3. Once the play list file is open, the file can be checked for accuracy, changes can be made, etc.
Saving a Play List File

1. Select a play list file or the On Air transmission list to save.
2. From the File ribbon tab select the:
 Save Play List icon ( ), to save the Play List to the current file name. This will overwrite if
filename exists already OR
 Save Play list As icon ( ), to save the Play List to a different file name. A file type can be
selected prior to saving.
3. In the Save Playlist dialog, type in a new file name or accept the existing file name.
4. Select Save.
Inserting Primary Events

Primary events, such as programs and commercials, constitute the majority of a play list’s events. They
may be accompanied by secondary events, and transition effects.
Events can be inserted into a play list using two methods:

• Manually. You can type event data directly into a play list.
• Move events to the play list. You can move records from the database or spots from a device
storage window directly into a play list, via drag-and-drop or copy-and-paste.
Limitation: Do not use the same ID between different record types (i.e. single spot and multi-segment
event).
ADC™ Air Client
To Insert a Primary Event

1. Position cursor on the list where you want to insert a new event.
2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Insert Primary icon ( ) or press the <INS> button on the
keyboard. (A new Primary event is inserted above the cursor.)
3. The cursor will be in Revise Mode. Type in the ID in the ID column. Below is an example of an event
in Revise mode.
When an ID is entered, it is checked against its record in the database. If the ID is not found, the
remaining fields are checked and their values may be changed or left as is according to list options
configured in the Environment dialog box.
4. If the record is in the database, the fields will fill in with data when getting out of Revise Mode.
5. Repeat these steps for additional primary events.
6. When finished inserting primary events, exit Revise mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or
from the Events ribbon tab select the Cancel icon ( ).

Note: When Insert Primary is selected again while still in Revise Mode the new primary event is placed
below the cursor. This speeds up the process of building a play list file or block of events on a
transmission list.
Inserting Multi-Segment Events

When inserting an event with multiple segments as defined in the database, you must specify which
segment to insert by entering its number in the Segment field. If you do not enter a segment number,
the Select Segment dialog box opens and displays all segments of the multi-segment event.
Limitation: Do not use the same ID between different record types (i.e. single spot and multi-segment
event).
ADC™ Air Client
To Insert a Segment
1. Click a segment in the Select Segment dialog box, and then click OK to insert it into the play list.
2. Make changes to event info if necessary.

3. When finished, exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events ribbon tab
select the Cancel icon ( ).
About Display Sequence Gaps

Although ADC automatically numbers segments sequentially there are scenarios, such as secondary
recording, that can create multi segment records with non-sequential segment numbering (i.e. gaps in
the sequence). Air Client displays such a gap properly, including all of the segments with the correct
information from the database.
Media Client Note: Media Client allows and preserves multi-segment records that have non-sequential
segment numbering (i.e. where there is a gap in the number sequence), although it is not intended that
such records would be created within the Media Client prep form.
Managing Duplicate Single Spot and Multi Segment IDs

If duplicate Single Spot and Multi Segment IDs appear in the Database, the operator can choose which to
insert on a Transmission List.
1. When a duplicate ID (e.g. ID 00011) is inserted onto a New, Edit, or Transmission List, on exiting
Revise Mode the Select Segment dialog is displayed.
2. Perform one of the following actions as required for the operation. Select Segment dialog:
ADC™ Air Client
 Choose Click on Single Spot to get the Single Spot Database Record.
 Highlight the desired Segment number, and then click OK to get that Segment's Database
Record.
 Highlight the entire record, (Multi Seg), and then click OK to get the entire Multi Segment
Database Record.
Insert Secondary Events

Secondary events are inserted using the Insert Secondary option in the Events ribbon tab. Secondary
events run in along with the primary event that precedes it. For a list of secondary events see: Appendix
B > Secondary Events (see "Secondary Events" on page 287).
IMPORTANT: ADC Air Client operators can attach up to 49 secondary events to a primary event within
the ADC Transmission List. This value is critical to know for users who utilize hard start events within
their ADC Transmission List. The logic within the ADC Transmission List requires the next hard start
event to occur within the next 50 events.
To Insert a Secondary Event

1. Launch a playlist to view.
2. Select an event on the playlist
3. From the Events ribbon tab select the Insert Secondary icon ( ) or press the <Shift + Insert> key
in the keyboard. The Secondary Events Directory is launched.
When inserting a secondary event in a play list, Air Client switches to Revise mode, allowing you to
edit field data for the event.
You can also click an existing event and manually enable Revise mode to edit the existing ID or info
in the event fields. To enter Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select the
Revise icon ( ).
4. Select the Secondary Events to insert into the playlist.
ADC™ Air Client
Note: The configuration parameters of some secondary events can be edited. For details on
configuring these events see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event (on page 125).
 Audio/Video: This function will insert a Secondary Audio/Video event into the list. It is used to
air effects with the primary, like keys and or audio over mixes.
When inserting a new secondary audio/video event in a playlist, play (P) and thread (T), but not
auto (A), are entered into the Type field. Switching is not used for this event. The event can be
used to produce the audio/video over for a key/ audio over input to a master control switcher or
as an audio/video breakaway.
An A/V event may be run to switch the switcher. To do this, enter an A, instead of a P or T, in the
Type field. The secondary event will begin with an audio-follow video transition. You may also
add a transition effect.
 Backtimed A/V: Same as a regular Sec. Audio/Video event, but the on-air time is the amount of
time before the primary event that this event will begin.
In the event Type field, these events are inserted with types P and T (but not A). No switching is
done on these events, unless this is changed. These events can be used as a key/audio over
inputs to a master control switcher.
It is possible to associate a switching event with a back timed event. To do this, change the Type
field to A. This event starts with an audio-follow-video transition. You may also add a transition
effect.
Note: Backtimed events cannot be run after up-counting events.
 GPI Contact: Inserts a GPI Contact Closure to a device that initiates a switch. The GPI Contact
will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless of value of "Time".
The event will display as played at the primary event time, although the actual GPI contact will
close at the exact time.
For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event: To
Configure a GPI Contact (on page 125).
 Backtimed GPI: Similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured backwards in
time from the start of the associated primary event.
For example, a backtimed GPI event with an offset of 5 seconds fires the GPI contact 5 seconds
before the start of the associated primary event. A backtimed GPI event cannot be attached to
an event following a primary upcount event. In this case, the system would not be able to
calculate when to begin the GPI event.
Note: Backtimed GPI events cannot be attached to an upcount event.
Configure a Backtimed GPI Contact (on page 126).
 Keyer On/Off: This allows you to define a secondary Keyer event in which a hole is cut in the
associated primary events video output and is then filled with the output of the Keyer source.
Configure a Keyer On/Off (on page 127).
 Transition Key: Similar to a Keyer On/Off event except, the key is brought up at the start of the
associated primary event with the same transition type (i.e. brought up with a fade up, cut, wipe
etc.).
Configure a Transition Key (on page 129).
ADC™ Air Client
 Audio Over On/Off: This is used to add another audio source over the primary audio/video
source. The audio over source may replace the primary audio source or be mixed with it.
Note: This event is only performed if the primary event’s A/V Data is configured to use a Master
Control Switcher.
Configure an Audio Over On/Off. (see "To Configure an Audio Over On/Off" on page 130)
 Transition Audio Over: Similar to a standard Audio Over event except that it is brought up with
the primary event and corresponding transition type.
Configure a Transition Audio Over (on page 131).
 Break: This is inserted at a point in the list where you would like the list to stop running; events
will play out normally up to this event. The first event after the break line will cue up, but will
not play out, and the program switches to black.
• To restart the list [after the break line], press Roll or Play on the control panel.
• This list may also begin if a GPI contact input is used or if preroll is initiated on a hard start
event that is next on the list.
 Comment: Used to enter Notes into the playlist. Any text may be inserted into the title field of a
comment. Comment event lines are ignored during transmission. However, they do add events
to the list size. You can enter text in the title field up to sixteen characters.
 Compile ID: Used to attach a title to the head of a compilation list (i.e. It is used to label a
compilation list with an ID). It has no effect on the playlist and is ignored during transmission.
 Data Event: This type of secondary event is associated with a device, but does not generate any
video output. Instead, the action specified by the event is performed at the time the event
would be put on air (i.e. the time entered in the on-air [or Time] column), had the event been
associated with a video device.
Typically used with video disk servers, a data event is used to control and automate the deletion
of spots from the server. The use of this event with video disk servers requires an accurate
scheduler or traffic program. If the events are not used carefully, spots may be accidentally
deleted in the video disk server. Secondary data events are used to command serial devices
requiring a simple command that does not need to run a countdown on the time of an event.
This type of secondary event attaches to a primary event that plays at the time the command is
sent to the device to execute the data event command. The primary event can be any primary
event for any device. The command is sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID.
For example, the commands for the video disk server are entered in the secondary event’s title.
• The command, Delete From Disk, is entered as DEL:XXXXXXXX:YY. X’s represent the spot ID
and Y’s represent the optional port value.
• The command, Get From Archive, is entered as GFA:XXXXXXXX:YY.
• The command, Delete From Archive, is entered as DFA:XXXXXXXX:YY.
Note: This secondary event may work differently on each device…refer to user notes for details
on this option.
IMPORTANT: The Secondary Data Event command is sent out in preroll. For example, in order
to send the command like a sAV or any other type of secondary event when the primary starts,
an offset of 3 seconds must be added.
 Barter Spot: Used for reconciliation with the traffic system. A barter spot is a source of
audio/video that is part of another audio/video source. It is not played as separate audio/video,
ADC™ Air Client
but is treated as a comment that is passed to the AsRun log and to the reconciliation process.
This event is attached to the primary event. When the primary event finishes running it is logged
to the AsRun log.
Attached to a program segment that has barter spots in it [network, nat’l]., these events appear
in the text AsRun log as Barter in the status field. In the enterprise log, they appear as BTR in the
program type field. The appearance of the spots in the logs does not positively indicate the
spots have run. If the primary event runs, the spots are logged; however, the spots may not
have actually been on the primary material.
 Record Switcher: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for inputs. During a
recording, this switches to the source denoted in the secondary events Title field. This name
must also be in the source name table for the switcher that is supplying the video to the record
device.
The event is only performed if the primary event’s device has the A/V data parameters
configured to specify the switcher number that has the matching name in its source name table.
Note: The proper configurations must be set before this function can perform as dictated.
 Switcher Audio Crosspoint: This is a secondary event that performs extra audio switching for
outputs. It allows routing audio to a different destination.
 Switcher Crosspoint: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for outputs. It
allows routing a program from one list to a different destination. While an event plays, this
function switches to the secondary event’s source:destination.
This type of secondary event allows the control of multiple crosspoints during one primary
event. The name of the new source:destination is entered in the title field. Use the format SRC,
DEST where SRC is the name of the source and DEST, the destination. You may enter a maximum
of 16 characters for the title and the name you enter must also be defined in the switcher’s
device parameter field for Source Name and/or Destination Name for the switcher that is
controlling the output for the primary event.
This type of event requires that the primary device have the specified switcher device
configured for its switching information. If the secondary event does not specify the source (title
=, DEST), the input crosspoint must be specified in the primary event’s device for the secondary
event to default the destination.
For example, in the Title field, put source and destination desired (separated by a comma or
space) i.e.…Sat1, Telco…The program airing from Sat1 will be routed to Telco. This must be
configured first in the Device Parameters and not have the same crosspoint as the air source.
To control a Router other than the configured default: If the user wants to switch a router
other than to the one assigned in the primary AV table, then the router name must be entered
in the ID field of the sXP event.
 Secondary Record: Allows for the automated recording and segmenting of live program
material, for immediate or future playback to air. Unlike most record events, this event type is
used in lists that combine record and playback activities. A secondary record event is attached
to each primary event that is being recorded. It functions only in lists that combine record and
playback material.
 Break Sync: Break sync contains an estimated time of day a pod will run, a deviation time and a
time for a window of opportunity for the operator to react to the event.
This event is normally used on a list that contains only pods/breaks of commercials. The pods
are separated by either an upcount event or by this Break sync event. The pods are triggered to
run by an external contact closure (GPI) or by clicking Play on the control panel. In normal
ADC™ Air Client
operation, a contact closure/play button is detected and the next pod on the list is played. The
break sync event is marked DONE immediately. The pod plays out until either an upcount event,
break sync event or the end of the list is encountered.
If the next pod has not played by the time of day specified on its break sync event, plus its
deviation, the automation sends out a user notification to all automation clients. The event then
waits for the opportunity time for a client to respond to the notification. If no response is
received at the end of this time, the automation marks each event in the pod and the break sync
event as being missed. It stops marking events as missed when it encounters an upcounting
event or break sync event. If the list was running an upcount event, that event is skipped and
the next upcount event runs.
During the time the automation is waiting when the break sync occurs, the user notification is
sent to all clients. One or more clients are enabled to detect the user notification. The enabled
clients display a dialog box prompting the operator to click OK to Delete Pod and Keep Pod.
The dialog box is displayed only during the waiting time and automatically closes if the operator
does not respond. This is the equivalent to clicking OK to Delete Pod since the list on the server
times out and mark the pod missed.
If the operator clicks Keep Pod, a message is sent back to the server causing the server to mark
the break sync event as done, but leaves the pod intact waiting for the contact closure/play
button. There is no other user notification for this pod.
If the contact closure/play button does not occur, the time of day for the break sync event for
the next pod may occur. To eliminate a potential problem, the next break sync event is used to
mark the previous pod missed. This occurs automatically at the time of day of the next break
sync event minus its deviation time. When this occurs, all events before this event are marked
missed. If the automation had been running an upcount event, then this upcounter and the next
up-counter before this break sync event are terminated before this event runs.
 Secondary System: Used to allow the sharing of resources between lists.
This event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignment during the
execution of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a
primary event. When this event type is run, it is able to move unowned device heads to the list
that is running this event or release device heads in order to make them available to another
list. It is up to the traffic department to schedule the assignment and release of heads so that
two lists will not conflict in their usage of these heads.
This event is programmed by filling in the time, ID and title fields of the event with control
information. The time field controls the time when the event will run offset from the primary
event. The following event IDs act as commands to the list:
• Assign: Will assign the device and head(s) specified in the title field to the transmission list
the event is located in. The title format is: DEVICENAME,X[,Y]
Where,
DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device,
X is the head number assigned to the list
[,Y] is the number of other heads to be assigned.
• Release: Removes the device and head(s) specified in the event title field from the
transmission list the event is located in and returns it back to the system as an unowned
device head. The title format is identical to the above described.
• Protect: Performs a protect assignment on the device and head(s) to the device specified in
the type field. The title format is: PROTECTNAME,DEVICENAME,X[,Y]
ADC™ Air Client
Where,
PROTECTNAME is the name of the device that is to be protected.
DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device.
X is the head number assigned to the list.
Y is the number of other heads to be assigned.
Note: You must first have assigned the primary device heads to the list before assigning the
protect heads.
• ‘Space Character’: A space character may be substituted for the comma in any of the title
field commands.
 Backtimed System: Works in the same manner as secondary system except that this event type
runs prior to the primary event by the time specified in the Time field.
 External: Use an External secondary event to send commands or other information to a device
through a device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending
commands or other information to a specific device on the device server. When inserting this
secondary event, use the text editor to enter the commands.
Configure an External Secondary Event (on page 132).
 Data Event with Data: Use this event to send commands and other information to a specific
device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor to enter
the commands. The commands are sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID.
Configure a Data Event with Data (on page 133).
5. When finished click OK. The secondary event is placed above the cursor in the play list.
Configuring an Editable Secondary Event

The configuration parameters of some secondary events can be edited. When inserting an editable
secondary event, a dialog box allows you to configure its attributes and settings.
Editable secondary events include GPI Contact, Back Timed GPI, Keyer On/Off, Transition Key, Audio
Over On/Off, Transition Audio Over, External and Data Event with Data.
To Configure a GPI Contact

This procedure configures a GPI Contact Closure secondary event that has been inserted into the list.
IMPORTANT: The GPI event controls the contact closure on a GPI card. The Air Client workstation must
have the optional GPI card. For more information about GPI and switch-only device configuration,
reference the Device Server Operations and Installation documentation.
Note: The GPI Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless of
value of "Time". The event will display as played at the primary event time, although the actual GPI
contact will close at the exact time.
ADC™ Air Client
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary GPI event already in a playlist, click the
event’s number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit Secondary icon ( ). The
Secondary GPI dialog is opened.
2. Set the following parameters for each event:

 ID: Specify the ID of the secondary event (e.g. GPI). If required, click the Browse button (…) to
locate.
 On Time (offset): An offset indicates how long after the start of the primary event the contact
closure should occur. The offset is entered in the event’s on-air field.
 Duration: The duration value sets the duration of the pulse or length of closure of the contact.
The duration is entered in the event’s DUR field.
The GPI closure may be longer than the associated primary event.
3. When finished click OK.
To Configure a Backtimed GPI Contact

This procedure configures a Backtimed GPI Contact Closure secondary event that has been inserted into
the list. Backtimed GPI is similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured backwards
in time from the start of the associated primary event.
ADC™ Air Client
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary Backtimed GPI event already in a
playlist, click the event’s number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit Secondary icon
( ). The Backtimed GPI dialog is opened.

 ID: In the playlist, a switch-only device’s ID must be entered in the secondary event’s ID field. If
required, click the Browse button (…) to locate.
 Back Time (offset): An offset indicates how long before the start of the primary event the
contact closure should occur. The offset is entered in the event’s on-air field.
 Duration: Enter the length of time the GPI contact is closed. This value can exceed the duration
of the primary event. The duration is entered in the event’s DUR field.
To Configure a Keyer On/Off

This procedure configures a Keyer On/Off secondary event that has been inserted into the list. This
option allows you to define a secondary Keyer event in which a hole is cut in the associated primary
event’s video output and is filled with the output of the Keyer source.
ADC™ Air Client
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary key event already in a playlist, click the
event’s number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit Secondary icon ( ). The Key
Event dialog is opened.

Note: The task performed by the key depends on the capabilities of the device you are using. This
function will only be performed if the primary event’s A/V Switching data is configured to use a
Master Control Switcher.
 Modifier: This parameter specifies how the key source is outlined. The options are normal,
shadow, drop shadow and border.
 Source: The key fill’s source. When self is selected, the fill input both cuts and fills the hole.
When external is selected, the key input cuts the hole and fill input fills it in. When chroma is
selected, the key is determined by the colors of the background video.
 Matte: When selected, fill input is replaced by a matte source. The matte source color is
determined by the mixer controls.
 Key Hold: When selected, this option will keep the keyer on through subsequent primary
transitions.
 On Time: This will determine the start time of the keyer event. This option determines how long
after the start of the primary event the key is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5
seconds or the key will arrive late.
Note: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition
Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00:00.00.
ADC™ Air Client
Duration: Determines the length of time the key is overlaid. Do not specify a keyer event to turn
off during the next event’s preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions
concurrently. In order to have the key last as long as the primary event, make the duration field
blank.
• The duration of the keyer event can either be blank, or specified as equal or greater than to:
the duration of the primary minus the secondary's (normal) offset.
the duration of the primary plus the secondary's back timed offset.
the duration of the secondary's end-timed offset.
• The keyer can be removed by the End Key Hold function.
 Speed and Effect: The speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also
set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located above the time
fields. Effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut.
 Key: Specifies which key source to use. Do not specify a keyer event to turn off during the next
event’s preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions concurrently. Also, it is not
possible to have two transitions overlapping in time. However, you can associate two keys with
the same event as long as you set their 'on time' and duration so they do not overlap.
To Configure a Transition Key

A Transition Key is similar to a Keyer On/Off event except, the key is brought up at the start of the
associated primary event with the same transition type (i.e. brought up with a fade up, cut, wipe etc.).
ADC™ Air Client
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary event already in a playlist, click the
event’s number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit Secondary icon ( ).
2. This type of secondary event has a configuration dialog box similar to Keyer On/Off;
 For the transition key, the value of the offset cannot be set.
 It is possible to define a transition key event so it will last as long as the primary event. To do
this, make the duration field blank.
 If the key hold option is on, the key is held over the transition in the same way as an ordinary
secondary keyer event.
To Configure an Audio Over On/Off

Audio Over On/Off is used to add another audio source over the primary audio/video source. It can be
set with a percentage over ratio (For example, if set to 100%, it will completely replace the primary
event’s audio.)
Note: The event is only performed if the primary event’s A/V Data is configured to use a Master Control
Switcher.
ADC™ Air Client
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary audio over event already in a playlist,
click the event’s number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit Secondary icon ( ).
The Audio Over dialog is opened.

 Audio Over: The number of the audio input line on the mixer.
 Ratio: The ratio of over audio source to primary source audio, ranging from 0 (all primary
sources) to 99 (all audio over source).
 Speed and Effect: The Speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also
set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located next to the time
fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut.
 On Time: This determines the start position of the event and how long after the start of the
primary event the audio is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5 seconds or the event
arrives late; however, you may use the transition.
Note: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition
Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00:00.00.
 Duration: Determines the length of time the event is overlaid.
Note: To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the
duration field blank.
To Configure a Transition Audio Over

Transition Audio Over is similar to a standard Audio Over event except that it is brought up with the
primary event and corresponding transition type. It allows specification of a secondary audio event to
coincide with the primary event in the same manner as a transition keyer event.
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary Transition Audio Over event already in a
playlist, click the event’s number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit Secondary icon
( ). The Transition Audio Over dialog is opened.
ADC™ Air Client
2. The Transition Audio Over dialog options are identical to that of the audio over on/off secondary
event, except that the ontime option is missing (the ontime for a transition audio over event is 0).

 Audio Over: The number of the audio input line on the mixer.
 Ratio: The ratio of over audio source to primary source audio, ranging from 0 (all primary
sources) to 99 (all audio over source).
 Speed and Effect: The Speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also
set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located next to the time
fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut.
 Duration: Determines the length of time the event is overlaid.
Note: To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the
duration field blank.
 Ontime: The ontime for a transition audio over event is 0.
To Configure an External Secondary Event

Use an External secondary event to send commands or other information to a device through a device
server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending commands or other
information to a specific device on the device server.
ADC™ Air Client
1. When this secondary event is inserted into a list, the Secondary External Event Text Editor dialog box
opens that prompts for the data to send to a device. Normally this box is a text editor window, but if
there is a special .dll file for the device, this may vary.
2. In the text editor, enter the data to send to a device on the network.
3. When finished click OK. Air Client inserts a line in the playlist or transmission window and enters
into Revise mode. vDT is inserted in the Sec field.
4. When finished, exit Revise mode. To exit Revise mode on the list, press <ALT + R> or from the
Events ribbon tab select the Cancel icon ( ).
To Configure a Data Event with Data

A Data Event with Data secondary event is used to send commands and other information to a specific
device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor to enter the
commands.
ADC™ Air Client
1. When this secondary event is inserted into a list, a text editor dialog box opens that prompts for the
data to send to a device.
2. In the text editor, enter the data to send to a device on the network.
 Limit: 4000 characters maximum
 Data separated by carriage return linefeed (CRLF)
3. When finished click OK. Air Client inserts a line in the playlist or transmission window and enters
into Revise mode. sDAT is inserted in the Sec field.
4. When finished, exit Revise mode. To exit Revise mode on the list, press <ALT + R> or from the
Events ribbon tab select the Cancel icon ( ).

The time in the time field is the offset from the preroll of the associated primary event. At the offset
time, the commands are sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID.
Manage Back-Timed Events

It is possible to create a back-timed event by editing the event type instead of having to replace the
event with a back-timed event. This is accomplished by placing a "<" feature in the event type field to
create a back-timed event.
Event Type Field Syntax:

StartEventEndTimed = PT >
MatchPrimaryDuration = PT =
StartEventBackTimed = PT <
 A ">" feature in the event type field creates an end-timed event.
 It is recommend to stop using backtime event types (Like: bGPI, bAV, etc) and instead use the
normal events (sGPI, sAV) with the backtime modifier (PT <).
ADC™ Air Client
 These events are available on the translator as ExtendedEventControl := [tStartEventEndTimed]

or [tStartEventBacktimed]
Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed

The following Lists which secondary events can be back-timed by enabling the
StartEventBackTimed bit in the event control field.
For a reference of secondary events see: Appendix B: Secondary Events (see "Secondary Events" on page
287).
• Data Events can be run back-timed. When run back-timed they are run at the offset value before the
first frame of the primary they are attached to.
• Transition events (KEY and AUDIO OVER) always run at pre-roll of the primary.
• Keyer, Audio Over, Combined Audio/Video with Audio Over or Key, Record Switcher, and Source
Switcher Events cannot be back-timed. While it might seem that there are uses for this, these events
require using the primary event to handle switching, and the primary event may not be threaded at
the time these events are run. Without having a primary device threaded there is no way to
establish the audio/video output path to apply the switch to. There may also be a conflict with using
the Master Control switcher during the transition of the actual primary.
EVENT TYPE ALLOWED
Break Event (Stops List) no
Logo Event (Equivalent to Break Event) no
Audio/Video Event YES
Back-timed Audio/Video Event no
GPI Event YES
Back-timed GPI Event no
Keyer On/Off no
Transition Keyer On/Off no
Audio Over On/Off no
Transition Audio Over On/Off no
Combined Audio/Video with Audio Over no
Combined Audio/Video with Key no
BreakSync Event (custom feature) no
Data Event YES
System Event YES
Back-Timed System Event no
Record Switcher Event no
Source Switcher Event no
Record Device Event (for recording live events) no
Comment Event no
ADC™ Air Client
EVENT TYPE ALLOWED

Compile ID no
Barter Spot no
To Specify ‘PT’ Event Type syntax

1. Open a list.
2. Highlight a primary event
3. Insert a target secondary event (See above "Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed".)
Or
Select an existing secondary event. (See above "Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed".)
4. Enter Revise Mode
5. Specify Type as the desired Event Type syntax (PT > , PT = , PT <)
6. Exit Revise Mode.
Manage End-Timed Events

End-timed means offset from the end of the primary event.
• Secondary events can be end-timed by enabling the StartEventEndTimed bit in the event
control field.
• Secondary events can be started at an offset from the end of the primary event (end-timed). This is
accomplished by placing a ">" feature in the event type field to create an end-timed event.
Event Type Field Syntax:

StartEventEndTimed = PT >
MatchPrimaryDuration = PT =
StartEventBackTimed = PT <
 A "<" feature in the event type field creates a back-timed event.
 These events are available on the translator as ExtendedEventControl := [tStartEventEndTimed]
or [tStartEventBacktimed]
When Enabling a Key

End-timed events can be used to enable a key on the last 20 seconds of program material. Since the
exact program segments length may not be known by traffic at the time the schedule is made, an end-
timed event allows traffic to accurately bring the key on for the last 20 seconds.
ADC™ Air Client
When Event Duration Matches the Offset

When using end-timed offset events whose duration matches the offset, such as an Audio Over device
that runs 20 seconds from the end for 20 seconds, there are two ways to specify this event.
• Put 20 seconds in for the duration for the event, or
• Use any arbitrary duration, but enable the MatchPrimaryDuration bit in the event control
field.
Secondary Events that can be End-Timed

The following table lists which secondary events can be end-timed by enabling the StartEventEndTimed
bit in the event control field.
• Transition events (KEY and AUDIO OVER) always run at pre-roll of the primary.
• End-timed events following UpCounter events are not supported.
EVENT TYPE ALLOWED
Break Event (Stops List) no
Logo Event (Equivalent to Break Event) no
Audio/Video Event YES
Back-timed Audio/Video Event no
GPI Event YES
Back-timed GPI Event no
Keyer On/Off YES
Transition Keyer On/Off no
Audio Over On/Off YES
Transition Audio Over On/Off no
Combined Audio/Video with Audio Over YES
Combined Audio/Video with Key YES
BreakSync Event (custom feature) no
Data Event YES
System Event YES
BackTimed System Event no
Record Switcher Event YES
Source Switcher Event YES
Record Device Event (for recording live events) no
Comment Event no
Compile ID no
Barter Spot no
ADC™ Air Client
To Specify ‘PT’ Event Type syntax

1. Open a list.
2. Highlight a primary event
3. Insert a target secondary event (See above "Secondary Events that can be End-Timed".)
Or
Select an existing secondary event. (See above "Secondary Events that can be End-Timed".)
4. Enter Revise Mode
5. Specify Type as the desired Event Type syntax (PT > , PT = , PT <)
6. Exit Revise Mode.
Enable a List Freeze

ADC offers the ability to freeze on the last frame of a videodisk clip before a live (generally a promo, or a
specific buffer event) in order to wait if the journalist is not ready on time and make the switching to the
live manually on the MCS.
Option 1: Using a secondary Backtimed System event (bSYS)

1. For a List with a Preroll of 2 seconds, if a Freeze is required on the last frame of a Profile clip before a
live break: (Your display may look different.)
2. Attach a Backtimed System event (bSYS) to the Live event to freeze: (Your display may look
different.)
3. Increase the Duration of Profile clip (Demo0001) before the news break (STUDIO1 switch only) to 5
seconds to ensure the preroll of STUDIO1 will not have started when the freeze event plays.
4. Set the Backtimed offset of the freeze event to play on frame 00:00:09.17 after the beginning of
Demo0001. This to effectively address the device latency involved with executing the freeze (7
frames) 00:00:09.24 (i.e. the last frame).
The result is: (Your display may look different.)
5. Once the list is frozen, the operator switches manually the MCS to the live source.
ADC™ Air Client
Option 2: Using a Secondary System event (sSYS)

1. If a Freeze is required on the last frame of a Profile clip before a live break, attach a Secondary
System event (sSYS) to the event to freeze:
2. The result is: (Your display may look different.)
3. Once the list is frozen, the operator switches manually the MCS to the live source.
Enable a Data Event (sDAT)

A Data Event is a type of secondary event that is associated with a device, but does not generate any
video output. Instead, the action specified by the event is performed at the time the event would be put
on air, had the event been associated with a video device.
For video disk servers, a data event is used to control and automate the deletion of spots from the
server. The use of this event with video disk servers requires an accurate scheduler or traffic program. If
the events are not used carefully, spots may be accidentally deleted in the video disk server. Secondary
data events are Secondary Events used to command serial devices requiring a simple command that
does not need to run a countdown on the time of an event.
Note: This secondary event may work differently based on the device being used. For a list of secondary
events see: Appendix B: Secondary Events (see "Secondary Events" on page 287).
IMPORTANT: The Secondary Data Event command is sent out in preroll. For example, in order to send
the command like a sAV or any other type of secondary event when the primary starts, an offset of 3
seconds must be added.
Data Event Commands

This type of secondary event attaches to a primary event that plays at the time the command is sent to
the device to execute the data event command.
• The primary event can be any primary event for any device.
• The ID of the secondary data event must match the ID MATCH NAME of the disk port to perform the
action. Multiple Secondary Data Events may be placed on a single primary event.
• The command is sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID. As an example, the
commands for the video disk server are entered in the secondary event’s title.
ADC™ Air Client
• These events are executed at preroll time of the primary event. Since these commands are
performed instantly no heads are threaded and the disk status does not change (unless the disk
goes BUSY for a moment).
• The event is marked done if ADC sends the command to the disk. The event is marked missed if ADC
cannot execute the command for any reason.
While many of these functions are not implemented on many disk systems, the following functions have
been implemented:
• Local Disk System Commands:
 Delete: DEL:AnID or D:AnID
 Delete Protect: PRO:AnID or P:AnID
 Delete UnProtect: UNP:AnID or U:AnID
• Archive System Commands:
 Get From Archive: GFA:AnID:TapeID or G:AnID:TapeID
 Delete From Archive: DFA:AnID:TapeID
 Send To Archive: STA:AnID:TapeID or S:AnID:TapeID
• Network or Fiber Channel System Commands:
 Delete From System: DFS:AnID
 Move or Copy To Disk: MOV:AnID:#1:#2 or M:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4… or C:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4…
 Delete From Disk: DFN:AnID:#1
 Abort Disk Transfer: ANC:AnID:#1:#2 or A:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4… or T:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4…
• Command Parameter descriptions:
 AnID is the ID to perform the function on.
 #1 is the source unit number of the source video disk in the networked disk system. #2:#3:#4…
are destination unit numbers configured for the networked disk system (only one destination is
required, but as many that will fit in the title field may be specified.
 TapeID is an optional parameter that is the Tape ID of the tape in the archive system that this
file should be operated on.
Add a Transition Effect

Transition effects can be added between events in a playlist. A master control switcher is required to use
transition effects. A transition effect is configurable according to type, speed, key hold status and mixed
audio/video and wipe effect qualifiers.
1. Open a Playlist and ensure Revise mode is off/disabled.
 To exit Revise mode on the list, press <ALT + R> or from the Events ribbon tab select the Cancel
icon ( ).
2. Select the event in a playlist to assign the transition to by clicking the event number of the event.
ADC™ Air Client
3. From the Events ribbon tab select the Edit Transition Effects icon ( ) The Transition Effects
dialog is displayed.
4. Configure the following options as required:

 Transition Type: Select the type of effect to run between events by using the icons located next
to the time fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut.
 Transition Speed: Select the speed of the transition effect. Options are Slow, Medium, Fast.
 End Key Hold: Checking this box causes the transition of an event to remove any key that was
held by a previous keyer event.
 #: Specify the qualifier for mixed audio/video and wipe effect. Qualifier values range from 0 to
255 and are facility-dependent.
Cut, Copy, Paste Playlist Events

The following procedures outline basic Cut, Copy Paste operations that can be performed from a
Playlist.
To Cut an Event from a Playlist

1. Select event to be cut by clicking on event number on list that corresponds to current location of
event to be cut.
2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Cut icon ( ). The event is cut from the list and put onto a
clipboard in the software.
ADC™ Air Client
To Cut a Block of Events from a Playlist

1. Select the first event of a block to be cut by clicking an event number on list that corresponds to
current location of event to be cut.
2. Holding down the Shift key, use the mouse to select the last event of a contiguous block of events.
This causes a sequence of events to be highlighted.
3. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Cut icon ( ). The block of events is cut from the list and put
onto a clipboard in the software.
To Copy an Event from a Playlist

1. Select event to be copied by clicking on event number on list that corresponds to current location of
event to be copied. (The event remains on the playlist or transmission list when copy is chosen).
2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Copy icon ( ). The event is copied onto a clipboard in the
software.
To Copy a Block of Events from a Playlist

1. Select the first event of a block to be copied by clicking an event number on list that corresponds to
current location of event to be copied.
3. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Copy icon ( ). The block of events is copied from the list and
put onto a clipboard in the software.
To Paste Cut / Copied Event(s)

1. Copy an event line. For details see: See To Copy an Event from a Playlist (see "To Copy an Event from
a Playlist" on page 142).
2. Position the cursor on the play list where the event will be pasted.
3. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Paste icon ( ). This pastes the event(s) into the list at the
specified location.
ADC™ Air Client
Copy/Paste Cells
A cell can be Copied / Pasted in the Air Client Play list form or Transmission list form.
1. Select the cell to be copied.
IMPORTANT: Cell copy is only permitted from three columns: Title, SOM, or DUR column.
2. Copy the Cell: From the main menu select Edit > Copy. The event is copied onto a clipboard in the
software.
3. Position the yellow cursor on the play list column where the event will be pasted.
IMPORTANT: The selected pasted cell must have the same column index as the copied cell. (e.g. A
cell cut or copied from the Title column can only be pasted in the Title column.)
4. From the main menu select Edit > Paste. This pastes the event(s) into the list at the specified
location.
Clear / Delete Playlist Events

Use the following procedure to delete an event from a playlist.
1. Select an event to be deleted. Click the event number on the list that corresponds to current
location of event to be cut.
2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Clear icon ( ) or press <Delete> on the keyboard. This
deletes the event off of the list.
Note: This event is not placed on the clipboard. Once deleted it is gone.
To Clear a Block of Events from a Playlist

1. Select the first event of a block to be copied by clicking an event number on list that corresponds to
current location of event to be copied.
3. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Clear icon ( ). The block of events is cleared from the list and
put onto a clipboard in the software.
Note: The events are not placed on the clipboard. Once deleted they are gone.
ADC™ Air Client
Moving Events within a List and Between Lists

An operator can use drag- and-drop or Cut and Paste on the Edit ribbon tab to move (reorder) events
within a playlist, copy events between playlists, or copy events from a device storage window or
database window directly into a play list.
Edit Operation Notes:

• An event must be dragged by its event or spot number to move it to a playlist.
• When dragging-and-dropping, all secondary events associated with primary events are moved with
the primary event. This is not true when using cut and paste.
• Drag and drop only works within the look ahead. You cannot drag an event from beyond the look to
within the look ahead.
• Cut and Paste will work if an event is Beyond the look ahead and needs to be placed within the look
ahead.
WARNING: Unless the List options are set to get around this, copy-and-paste should never be used
when using a traffic system that uses reconciliation because this will cause the event to repeat the
reconciliation key.
Open the source List(s)

Open the list or lists to be used when moving events:
• If moving events within a single playlist, open the playlist.
• If moving between playlists, open the destination playlist, and the source playlists.
• If moving from other windows to a playlist, open the destination playlist, and the source windows
(device storage window and/or database window)
To Drag-and-Drop a Single Event

1. Select the event to be dragged. Click the event number on the list that corresponds to current
location of event to be cut and continue to hold down on the mouse button.
2. Drag up or down to the location the event will be dropped. (note – stay in the event column)
3. Position yellow cursor on the play list where the event will be dropped.
4. Release the mouse button to drop the selected event above the cursor.
 Dragging and dropping within one window is effectively a ‘cut and paste’
 Dragging and dropping from one window to another is a ‘copy, paste’
ADC™ Air Client
To Drag-and-Drop Multiple events

1. Press and hold the Shift key and click an event, then click-hold another event to select a range.
2. Drag the selection to an event in the playlist before which you want to insert the selection. The
yellow cursor is positioned on the play list where the event will be dropped.
3. Release the mouse button to drop it. The events are inserted above the target location.
Move Events using Copy / Paste

WARNING: Copy-and-paste should never be used if you are using a traffic system that uses
reconciliation because this will cause the event to repeat the reconciliation key.
1. As an alternative to drag-and-drop, click an event, spot or record, or the range of, then from the Edit
ribbon tab select the Copy icon ( ).

2. Click the event in a playlist after which you want to insert the selection, and then from the Edit
ribbon tab select the Paste icon ( ).
Revise Playlist Event Field Text

Revise allows the operator to "revise" (edit) the text in a particular field of an event.
1. Position cursor on a specific event field.
2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Revise icon ( ) or press <Alt+R> on the keyboard.
3. The Revise option is highlighted to indicate the client is in Revise Mode. Revise is also shown at the
top of the window. The cursor is now in Revise Mode ready to type.
4. Revise the event as needed. If Enter is pressed prior to getting out of Revise Mode the database will
be checked.
 If the ID is not found, a warning message will appear. Click OK to continue
5. When finished exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events ribbon tab
select the Cancel icon ( ).

Note: If currently in Revise Mode – Cancel can be used to put event back to what it was prior
revising the event. Cancel does not work if the operator already clicked off the revised event, or the
operator already got out of revise mode).
ADC™ Air Client
Clear Done Events

An event that is marked done can be dragged and dropped down the transmission list and then re-
activated so it can play on the list again.
1. Position the cursor on the event that is marked Done.
2. Drag and drop this event down the list to where it will need to re-air.
3. With the cursor on the Done event that was dragged, right click on the playlist window and from the
popup menu select Clear Done Events.
Note: In order to facilitate proper reconciliation, events which have been As-Run can never be
revived. When an ADC user invokes the "Clear Done Events" function to replay an event on the
transmission list, the event is treated as a newly inserted event in the Transmission list and a new
GUID is assigned, so this is a new event both in the Device Server, in the Live-Update, and in the
Traffic.
Replace an Event ID
Replace allows operator to find and then replace the ID with a designated ID.
1. Position the cursor at the top of the list in the ID column.
2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Replace ( ) icon. The Replace ID dialog is displayed.

 "Find what" field: Type in the ID to find. (e.g. Demo0001)
 "Replace with" field: Type in the ID to replace with.
 Match whole word only. Check to have search look for whole word matches.
 Match case: Check to have search look only for entries that match the case (Upper or Lower) for
the entry specified in the "Find what" field.
 Ignore secondary event: Check to ignore secondary events in "Find" operation. (When a search
in list is typically done, the result includes secondary events. If there is a secondary event with
the same ID, the user may not want to find it.)
ADC™ Air Client
 Direction: Specify the search direction: Up the list or Down the list form the current cursor
position.
4. Select Find Next.
5. If the ID is in the database, an information box appears with the database info for the replacement
ID.
6. Select OK to replace the found ID with the replacement ID.

7. (Repeat steps 5 – 6 until all records are found.)
Note: Replace All can be used to speed up the process. Ensure the replacement spot is not already
in a break with the ID being replaced. This will prevent the same spot to air back to back.
Ripple Time
AutoRipple is the process of adjusting the time column to reflect the time of day each event will play
based on the duration of each event. As an event plays to air, the time field of the events following
down the list will adjust as necessary to reflect the approximate time of day they will execute.
• This is especially useful if the start time of an event is changed. Ripple time allows the start times of
the following events to be updated to reflect the adjusted time.
• The exception to this scenario is if a hardstart is located on an event. A hardstart will not allow the
times to ripple past it and the events following may not reflect the correct time of day they will
actually play.
Due to this blocking of AutoRipple it may be necessary to ripple the times manually to keep the list
accurate to what time of day the events will play.
To Manually Ripple Times

1. Position cursor in a column of the event that the Ripple Time will be initiated from. Modify the time
as required and if necessary.
ADC™ Air Client
2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Ripple Time icon ( ) or press <Alt+M> on the keyboard.
The time field ripples from the event the cursor is located on down to the next hard start or the end
of the list. Each successive event is offset by the duration of the previous primary event.
Note: All events’ start times are changed until a hard start event is encountered. Hard start events
interrupt any preceding events whose times overlap its start time.
Checking if a List is Timed Out

Ripple time can be used between hard starts to check if the list is timed out between the hard starts.
• If Ripple Time is initiated on an event and a hard start is located on a future event an info box
appears if the events are running long or short to the future hard start.
• The info box informs the operator if there is overlap (long) or gap (short) time to the next hardstart.
Managing Pull Lists

The Pull List window lists all missing events in a play list. Missing media are events not located in any of
the devices assigned to the transmission list that the Pull List was generated from. Once opened, the Pull
List Window can be refreshed on demand (F5 key and Refresh function of its contextual menu).
Review Missing Events using the Pull List Window

Use the following procedure to review missing events using the Pull List Window.
1. Ensure a list is open for viewing
2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Pull List icon ( ). A Choose Order box appears.
3. Choose the order to display any found missing material.
ADC™ Air Client
 Event #: List entries in order as they appear on the playlist.

 ID: List entries in sequential ID order, lowest to highest.
 Box ID: List entries in sequential Box ID order: lowest to highest, numbers before letters.
 Chronological: List all entries by time only as they would fall within a 24hour period. (Not by
Date/Time.)
4. Click OK. Any missing items appear on the Pull List.
Note: The Pull List displays a single entry for a multi-segment program ID. The total number of
segments in the list is displayed in the Occurrences column.
 The event column designates the location of the missing event on the play list.
 The TOD Time of day column is the time of day on the play list the event is scheduled to play.
 If the record is not in the database, the Comment column indicates this by a "Not Made"
comment.
 The Occurrences column shows the number of times the event is scheduled on the play list.
 The SOM and Duration on the Air Client Pull List allow it to be used as a Dub List on the Media
Client.
 The Segment number (01 to 99) field can be displayed.
 The Title field will indicate if an ID is on a Storage Device or not and if it is in the Database or not.
ADC™ Air Client
About MultiSegment events

The Pull List displays a single entry for a multi-segment program ID. The total number of segments in the
list is displayed in the Occurrences column for that event.
Timezone in a Pull List

A Pull List requested for a List with a Time Zone configured will take in account the Time Zone in the TOD
column of the Pull List. The Time Zone name is displayed in the title bar of the Pull List window (like for
the List window), and the offset value in the status bar.
The following image is provided for reference. The colors are used to enhance readability. Your display
will look different.
GMT Pull Lists

The GMT Pull List option allows to list in the Pull List only the clips missing in the devices assigned to the
List and not in a GMT source device usable for this List. This helps operators determine if the missing
media is already loaded into a GMT source device if it is not on the Pull List.
To use GMT Pull Lists select the Properties ribbon tab, click the Environment… icon ( ), select the
List Options tab, and check the option "Use GMT Pull List" option.
 The Administrator or operator with security rights can enable the new GMT Pull List.
 As with others options (e.g., Storage Options/ Display Free Disk space), a confirm/warning dialog
box is displayed to the operator when this feature is selected. From this dialog the operator can:
ADC™ Air Client
• Click Ok to confirm and enable new option. This parameter is saved in the ini file of the
application so the selection is not lost when the Air Client is closed.
• Click Cancel to invalidate option.
• If Enabled (Checked), when the operator chooses Events>Pull List, the Pull List window is displayed
on top of the transmission window and a warning message appears (Job in Progress) along the
bottom of the Pull List window. Once complete, the warning message in Pull List window disappears.
It is not listed in the Pull List result.
• If Disabled (Unchecked), is it is listed in the Pull List result.
Show/Hide Columns in a Pull List

The ADC Air Client v4, Pull List utility allows the show/hide of columns on the Pull List display. This
option is similar in functionality to the Columns option of the playlist/transmission list.
1. Right click on the Pull List and from the right-click popup menu select Columns. The Column setting…
2. Use the Column setting… dialog to specify which columns to show or hide.
3. Select a Column in the Available columns or Displayed columns area and choose arrows to move it
to the opposite area.
 Single arrows (<, >) move individual columns
• moves entry from Available pane to Show pane.
• moves entry from Show pane to Available pane.
 Reset moves all columns to the Show pane.
 Cancel aborts the operation and closed the Column Configuration dialog.
 Help launches the application Help system.
ADC™ Air Client
4. Click OK. When the Pull List is displayed the columns shown will be as specified.
Add DBStatus Field as a Column

Any one Database field can be displayed in the DBStatus column of the Pull List Window. For example,
the status PAD / Not PAD (Ready for air / Not ready for air) could be displayed.
The following parameters of this additional column are configurable in the Air Client ini file.
These parameters are:

• The column name (i.e.: Status)
• The Database field to display, and the DB table concerned
• The value to display if the clip is not found in DB (i.e.: Not Found).
The section corresponding to these parameters in the aclnt32.ini file is done manually (if the feature is
required, a Pull-List_Status.txt file to copy/paste and adapt will be provided).
For instance: [Pull List ColX]
Name=DB Status
DBField=ASEXT/Status
Default=Not filled
Recycle Bin Window

When the Air Client software user deletes one or several events from the "Transmission list", if the "Link
to Recycle Bin" option of the "Transmission list" is checked, those events are written into the
"RECYCLE.lst" file. The Link to Recycle bin option is located in the "Security" tab of the Playlist Options
Menu (right click menu on transmission list).
• This setting if enable is active for each list independently.
• Multi-login to several device servers is managed (relative parameters saved in aclnt32.ini).
• This "RECYCLE.lst" file is saved in the local directory of the Air Client application.
The Air Client software can retrieve deleted events in the "Recycle Bin" window that displays the
"Recycle.lst" file. This file saves the events deleted from a transmission as well as the cut events, in the
case where the user cuts some events but does not paste them, so those events could be lost.
• When a primary event with hidden secondary events is cut or deleted from the list, the primary and
its relative secondary events are copied in the Recycle Bin.
• Any new entry of a cut/deleted block is done at the top of the in the Recycle Bin.
• The chronology of the action can be easily found.
ADC™ Air Client
• At each modification of "Recycle.lst" file, the "Recycle Bin" window is updated. Possible
modifications include: the insertion of events in the "Recycle.lst" file and a purge on an event.
To use the Recycle Bin
From the Tools ribbon tab select the Recycle Bin icon ( ). The Recycle Bin window is displayed with
any contents.
• To reuse the events of the "Recycle Bin" window in a transmission list or in a playlist, the user can
use a copy/paste or a drag&drop operation.
• Clicking on a block header selects all the events of the bloc. This allows an easy and fast selection
before copy or drag-and-drop action.
 Each cut or deleted event or block of events begins with a header that gives information about
the edition action made on this range. The header is a comment event giving the following
information:
• In the Time field: The hour of the edition action.
• In the ID field: The action done (DELETE / CUT) on the event(s) under the header.
• In the Title field: The Server name - the List name where the action was done - The Date of
the action.
Empty Recycle Bin option

An operator can choose to manually delete all events in the Recycle Bin.
1. On the ribbon menus select Tools> Recycle Bin. The recycle Bin window is displayed.
2. Right click on the window and from the context menu select ‘Empty Recycle Bin’.
ADC™ Air Client
3. A confirmation box is displayed:
 Select ‘Yes’ to delete the events in the Recycle Bin.

Or
 Select No to cancel the action.
Warning Box when the Recycle Bin exceeds 2,000 events

Added a warning box that warns the user when the number of events in the Recycle Bin exceeds 2,000
events. Since having an excessive number of events in the Recycle Bin can impact client performance,
the user is prompted to empty the Recycle Bin when it contains a high number of events. When there
are more than 2, 000 events in the Recycle Bin a warning box is displayed: ‘There are a high number of
events contained in the Recycle Bin which can impact Air Client performance. Empty Recycle Bin? Yes
No.
• Clicking Yes deletes the events in the Recycle bin.
• Clicking No clears the warning.
Note: As long as the number of events in the Recycle Bin is over 2,000, the warning message will
reappear every 15 minutes until the user clicks Yes, manually empties the recycle bin or the auto-purge
deletes the events.
To enable use of "RECYCLE.lst"

In normal operation the "RECYCLE.lst" file is not use as a standard play list, but through the Recycle Bin
feature. The administrator sets this option by:
1. Right click on an open playlist window and from the popup menu select Options… This opens the
"Options" dialog box
2. From the Options dialog select Security tab and enable (check) "Link to Recycle Bin" option.
Note: The access to the functions of this Security tab is granted to the System Configuration permission
only, from login.
To Configure Colors
The foreground and background colors of the "Header" comment event are configurable from the
"Colors" command of the pop-up menu that opens the standard configuration color of event dialog box
(it is also the case for Playlist and List).
1. Open the Recycle Bin window
ADC™ Air Client
2. Right click on the Recycle Bin Window and from the popup menu select Colors. The "Select Colors"
3. Use this dialog to set Event Colors and select default colors. For details on using this dialog see
Configuring Event and Window Parameter Colors (on page 229).
To Configure a Purge
To prevent the Recycle.lst file from becoming huge, a purge of the oldest part of the file can be
configured by the administrator.
Note: The access to the functions of this Security tab is granted to the System Configuration permission
only, from login.
1. Right click on the Recycle Bin Window and from the popup menu select Options. The "Recycle Bin
Options" dialog is displayed.
2. Use the Purge tab of the "Recycle Bin Options" dialog to configure purge operations for this window.
3. Configure the following parameters as required:

 Start Of Day: Define the time of the triggering of the purge.
 Hours To Keep: Specify which events, in the "Recycle.lst" file, will be kept or not.
4. When finished click OK. The events, which exist in the "Recycle.lst" file that are greater than the
defined hours, are deleted.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Managing Resource Windows
Managing Resource Windows

Robust Database Search Window
Air Client allows for full database searches using the Robust Database Search Window. This window
allows an operator to search for and review records of existing spots and, if spot information is already
recorded in the database, to export the information to the playlist.
To Search for a Record

1. From the File Ribbon tab select Robust Database Search ( ). This opens the Robust Database
Search window. Search Parameters are specified in the Find records Group box.
ADC™ Air Client
2. In the Find Records pane, specify the Record Types: Click the type of record(s) you to search for.
These settings are used to limit searches to records of certain types.
 To include a record type in a search, select its checkbox. To exclude a record type from a search,
uncheck the box. The default is to include all record types (all boxes checked).
 To include all listed record types in a search, click the All button.
 To exclude all listed record types from a search, click the None button.
Available record Types: The record types available for inclusion or exclusion in a search are:
 Single: A single spot record. A single spot has only one SOM and EOM.
 Aspot: A master spot on a multi-spot library tape.
 Bspot: A backup spot on a multi-spot library tape.
 Multi-Seg: A multi-segment record. A multi-segment record can have multiple SOMs and EOMs,
whereas a single spot can have only one SOM and EOM.
 Lib Box: (Tape only). The ID of a multi-spot record. The library box contains from 1 to 99 spots,
with each spot containing its own unique material ID.
 Disk: A record created in Louth TurboMedia for material residing on a video disk.
3. In the Find Records pane, select the Search By field type. This parameter determines on which field
a database search is based. The exception to this is Duplicates (see below).
The values for the Search By parameter may be any of the following:
 Material ID. The ID of the spot.
 Title. The title of the spot.
 User Data. This parameter searches for the text in the User Data field of the spot’s record that
matches the text in the adjacent parameter field. Only 6 characters can be specified if you are
using a standard database and 16 if you are using an extended database.
Note: All clients connecting to the same Database and Device Server's in a facility should be
configured in the same mode (extended or non-extended).
 Made On. Searches for spots that were created on the same date as specified in the adjacent
parameter field.
 Played. Searches for spots played on the date specified, if the Air Client workstation that played
the spot is configured to record play dates. If it is not, you will not be able to find the spot you
are looking for by this parameter.
 Purge On. Searches for spots that will be purged on the date specified.
 Tape ID. Searches for text in three fields—Media ID, Box ID and Alternate ID—that matches the
text entered in the adjacent parameter field.
 Duplicates. Searches for duplicate material IDs that exist for more than one type of spot and
displays them in the Search Results pane.
Note: When Duplicates, Purge On and Tape ID are specified as search parameters, all records
types are searched. Any settings you specified in the Record Types area are ignored. For
example, you cannot search for duplicate single spots only.
ADC™ Air Client
4. In the Parameter field next to the Search By field, enter all, or a segment of, the information the
property you specified above must contain.
5. In the Find Records pane, choose the Search Range. These search qualifiers determine how specific
the search is.
Two different Collation sets are currently being used with ADC SQL Servers. Your search results
depend on Collation set for which your Database is configured.
The following logical operators are available:

Note: When specifying a range of values, the value in the first parameter field must be less than the
value in the second parameter field or an error message displays. The hierarchical search order of
characters and numbers is: numbers come before capital letters and capital letters come before
lowercase letters. When specifying a range of dates, the first date specified in the range must be
earlier than the second.
 Is. This operator only lists records that contain the exact value specified in the Parameter field
next to the Search Parameters button.
For example, if you click ID on the Search Qualifiers button and enter 12345 in the Parameter
field, only the spot whose ID number is 12345 appears in the Search Results pane.
 Is between. When this operator is selected, an additional Parameter field appears next to the
Search Qualifiers button. The value entered in the Parameter field above it and the value in this
new field determine the range the value of the property you specified in step three must be
between.
For example, if you click ID on the Search Qualifiers button, enter 001 in the top Parameter field
and 003 in the bottom Parameter field, only the spot whose ID number is 002 appears in the
Search Results pane.
 Is before. This operator lists records whose property value specified in the Parameter field
precedes the value of the property specified in the Search Parameters button.
For example, if you click ID on the Search Qualifiers button and enter 12345 in the Parameter
field, only spots whose ID number is less than 12345 appear in the Search Results pane.
 Is after. This operator lists records whose property value specified in the Parameter field is
greater than the value specified in the Search Parameters field.
For example, if you click ID on the Search Qualifiers button, enter 001 in the Parameter field,
only spots whose ID number is greater than 001 appear in the Search Results pane.
 Is outside. This operator lists records whose property value specified in the Parameter field is
outside values specified in the Search Parameters field. The value entered in the Parameter field
above it and the value in this new field determine the range the value of the property you
specified in step three must be outside.
ADC™ Air Client
6. Once the search parameters are specified, click the Search button. The results are displayed in the
Search Results pane, located under the Find Records pane.
A Results Summary is displayed at the bottom left corner of the window. (Display colors have been
modified to enhance readability. Your display may appear different.)
 Found: # of records found that met search criteria.

 Selected: # of ID’s highlighted.
7. (Optional) Records can be sorted (ascending/descending order) by clicking on a column header and
property columns resized by dragging with the mouse.
Managing Search Results

The results of a database search are displayed in the Search Results pane. A right click menu is available
from the Search results pane to help manage search results.
Option Description
Copy Copies the highlighted record
CopyAll Copies all records in the Search Results pane.
Save As Text Allows the user to save the highlighted records to a text file.
Print Prints the highlighted records. A printer must be configured.
Print Notes If this option is selected—the checkmark indicates it is selected—and Print is
chosen, any notes associated with any selected record will also be printed.
Show This option will display more information about selected Multi-Segment or Multi-
Spots/Segments Spot records. If one of these record types is selected when this option is chosen,
ADC™ Air Client
Option Description
the spots or segments associated with that ID will be displayed in a separate pop-
up box.
Show <<This option is grayed out and currently unavailable.>>
Spots/Segments
(no sorting)
Show Search When these options are on—as they are shown here—the database window will
Panel display as it does on the previous page. If these options are turned off, either the
and search panel—the panel including the search parameters—or the Details panel—
Show Details the panel on the bottom of the screen displaying the details of a selected record—
Panel will disappear from the screen allowing more records to be displayed in the search
results panel.
To Review Record Details

Select / highlight a record in the search results pane. All available information on the selected record is
displayed in the Show Details pane located beneath the Search Results pane. Select the desired tab to
see various information related to the record. If multiple records are highlighted, the fields of the last
record clicked are displayed in the Database Parameter pane.
To change the column width

The width of each column may be adjusted by passing the cursor over the right edge of the column, and
holding down the mouse button to drag the edge of the column when the cursor resembles a crosshair .
To Resize Columns
If any particular record information, such as ID or title, is too wide to be displayed in a column, the
information is truncated and followed by ellipses (...). You can widen columns to show the truncated
information.
ADC™ Air Client
1. Position the pointer over the right border of the column heading.
2. Drag the border to the right. If the total width of the columns exceeds that of the Search Results
pane, a scroll bar appears at the bottom of the pane, allowing you to scroll hidden columns into
view.
To Sort Records by Column

You can determine how records are sorted in the Search Results pane using their property column
header.
Click on a field's column heading to sort all the records displayed in the Search Results pane by that field.
The order of the sort follows the alphanumeric hierarchy: numbers come before capital letters, and
capital letters come before lowercase letters.
Each click on a header toggles sort in ascending or descending order. For example, if records are listed in
ascending order, clicking the ID column header sorts them in descending order.
To Save As Text
Right-click on a selected record in the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up menu
select Save As Text.
Saves the output displayed in the Search Results pane as a data (.dat) file. Selecting this command
invokes a dialog which prompts the user for the filename to save as.
To Print
Right-click on a selected record in the database search results pane and from the pop-up menu select
Print.
Prints the output displayed in the Search Results pane. Selecting this command invokes a dialog which
allows the user to configure the print job.
Show Segments
Note: This option is available for multi-segment only; it is grayed out for all other selections.
Right-click on a selected record in the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up menu
select Show Segments.
ADC™ Air Client
Opens a Segments Record dialog that displays segment information of a highlighted multi-segment
program display.
About Display Sequence Gaps

Although ADC automatically numbers segments sequentially there are scenarios, such as secondary
recording, that can create multi segment records with non-sequential segment numbering (i.e. gaps in
the sequence). Air Client displays such a gap properly, including all of the segments with the correct
information from the database.
Media Client Note: Media Client allows and preserves multi-segment records that have non-sequential
segment numbering (i.e. where there is a gap in the number sequence), although it is not intended that
such records would be created within the Media Client prep form.
Showing More Records

There are two options available: [Show Search Panel] and [Show Details Panel]. Both are for expanding
display area of search result panel.
• Disable Show Search Panel: Right-click on the database search results pane, and then from the pop-
up menu disable (uncheck) Show Search Panel. This action hides the Find Records tab pane. Hiding
the Find Records tab pane expands the Search Results pane, allowing more records to be viewed at
one time.
 To re-enable the display of this area, right-click on the database search results pane, and then
from the pop-up menu enable (check) Show Search Panel.
• Disable Show Details Panel: Right-click on the database search results pane, and then from the pop-
up menu disable (uncheck) Show Details Panel. This action hides the area displaying additional
information of the highlighted record and the Find Records Material, Media, and Notes tab panes.
Hiding this area expands the Search Results pane, allowing more records to be viewed at one time.
ADC™ Air Client
 To re-enable the display of this area, right-click on the database search results pane, and then
from the pop-up menu enable (check) Show Details Panel.
To Copy a Record to a Transmission List

Use this procedure to copy a Record to a Transmission List.
1. Select/highlight a record or records on the Search Results pane.
2. Right click on the Search Results pane and from the popup menu select:
 Copy: To copy the highlighted record(s) to the clipboard.
 CopyAll: To copy all records in the Search Results pane to the clipboard.
3. From the Air Client main screen, open a Transmission List. (For procedure details see To Open an
Existing Playlist.)
4. Position the cursor on the list at the point the event or events are to be copied and paste the
contents of the buffer to that location. (For procedure details see To Paste Cut / Copied Event(s).)
Drag and Drop a Record to a Playlist or Transmission List

Use this procedure to Drag and Drop a Record to a playlist or Transmission List.
1. Select/highlight a record or records on the Search Results pane.
2. Drag and Drop the record to the desired location on an open playlist or Transmission List.
Device Status Window

The device status window allows you to check the connection status of devices assigned to a specific
device server and provides other device information to help you identify the source of event errors.
ADC™ Air Client
To Open the Device Status Window

1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the Device Status icon ( ). The Device Status window is
displayed.
This window gives the status of all devices in control by the device server.
 The status bar displays the time of a device server. Time source originating from a PC is
represented by the letter P. The letter T represents time from a timecode generator and the
letter V for reference video.
 NDF and DF represent drop frame status for a broadcast facility. For example, when drop frame
is off, NDF displays in the status bar.
 The color of a device also signifies its status. By default, when a device is black, its status is
normal and its events may be added to a playlist. Devices that are green are in use by a playlist
in a transmission window. If a device is not connected or responding, the spot displays in red in
the device status window.
 Device Status window columns can be reviewed for:
• Port: Specifies which port a device is connected to. The status of a disk port is displayed on
one line for each head. When playing, one line displays the status of the on-air event and
the other displays the status of the next spot to air.
• Device: (Device Name) Displays the device name and type when configured on the Device
Server.. To open a VTR device’s control panel, double-click the VTR in the device status
window. The control panel only opens if the VTR contains a tape and is properly connected
and configured.
• Status: Current status of the device. Status key words include:
No dev: No device is connected to the specified port.
No comm.: Air Client is unable to communicate with the specified device.
Unthreaded: The device is not threaded.
Cued: The device is cued.
Play: The device is playing a spot.
Standby: The device is in standby.
Online: The device is online.
Offline: The device is offline.
ADC™ Air Client
• Owner: Transmission list assignment of the device. Specifies which playlist or cache a device
is assigned to. If the owner field is blank and you want to use the device, it must be
configured in the device server.
• Pos: (Position) Transmission list event # location of the device. Displays the playlist position
number of an event the device is playing.
• ID: Displays the ID of an event the device is playing. This is the current Id that is threaded in
a particular device.
• Dur: (Duration). Specifies the duration of the cued or playing event associated with the
device. This is the duration the device is currently scheduled to play the event. A device that
is playing will be green and reflect the counting duration of the event. An "A" event would
be counting down, while an "AU" event will be counting up.
• Information: Displays the input and output ports of a switcher, if applicable. If a switcher is
connected to a device server, the information field displays the device status (online or
offline), including general information. Certain devices (Switchers, Routers) may give extra
information of device status.
To Filter Device Status Rows/Columns

Use this procedure to filter rows via columns in the Device Status Window.
1. Open the Device Status window.
ADC™ Air Client
2. Filter by the values in the column. Move cursor to the columns header and push the displayed
combo button.
3. Choose the items from the filter dropdown to filter by. The Grid is filtered by selected values.
Customizing the filter in the grid.

The Filter Builder dialog allows end-users to build complex filter criteria with an unlimited number of
filter conditions combined by logical operators.
ADC™ Air Client
1. End-users can invoke the Filter Builder dialog using the Customize… button displayed within the
filter panel. This dialog is also invoked when choosing the (Custom…) item from the filter dropdown.
2. Click on the column's caption to select the column.
ADC™ Air Client
3. In the operator box, select the condition.
4. Input the value to filter by.
5. Click the button "..." to add condition, add group or remove the row.
6. Click the OK button to apply the filter criteria and close the dialog. The grid View now displays only
the records matching the set criteria.
ADC™ Air Client
Saving to/Loading from an External File

The Filter Builder dialog allows you to save filter criteria to and load them from an external file. Clicking
the Save As… or Open… buttons activates one of these dialogs. Filter settings are stored in a file with an
flt extension.
Sort data by columns

It is possible to sort data by columns. The first click on a column header sorts data in ascending order
and the second by descending order, etc. To clear sorting by a column, click the column caption holding
the Ctrl key down. You can also sort data by multiple columns. To do this, click on column headers while
pressing the Shift key.
A small arrow displayed within a column header indicates the current sort order.
• The up-arrow indicates the ascending sort order.
• The down-arrow – the descending sort order.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshoot transmission list problems (incorrect status of devices) by checking the Device Status
window for problems with individual devices.
• If a device is not available or not communicating correctly, the text indicates the situation.
• The status also reveals if the device is not communicating or there is no device currently connected.
ADC™ Air Client
Note: A VTR's device control panel can be opened if the VTR is currently loaded with a tape. This is
useful when device control is needed without looking for the event on the transmission list. Since all
VTRs for all lists are shown here, ensure the correct VTR is selected.
Device Storage Window

The device storage window lists the media in a device connected to a specified server. When an event
cannot be found, you can use the device storage window to verify that its information matches the spot
ID on the device.
Also, when creating or editing playlists, you can lookup spots on a device’s media. You can search for a
spot’s ID or title and then drag it to a playlist window. Use the database, which is accessible on the right-
click menu of the device storage window, to access a spot’s record information.
Cut Copy / Drag Drop to Playlist. Records can be copied and pasted or drag and dropped from this
window into a play list or transmission list.
Note on XDCAM Storage Locations: XDCAM cart, model A480, has 6 faces and each face has 80 bins,
with up to 600 disk’s loaded in the cart. A bin number with the first 2 digits specifying the face and the
second 2 digits specifying the bin number allows an operator to know where in the cart the disk resides.
Air Client displays this XDCAM storage information: the cart as a storage location with the cart face/slot
number and disk label displayed.
To Open the Device Storage Window

This option will give a storage window view of the video server inventory.
1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the Device Storage icon ( ).The Choose Device dialog is
displayed.
ADC™ Air Client
2. Select the target storage device to check the inventory and then click OK
 The status bar displays the time of a device server. Time source originating from a PC is
represented by the letter P. The letter T represents time from a timecode generator and the
letter V for reference video.
 NDF and DF represent drop frame status for a broadcast facility. For example, when drop frame
is off, NDF displays in the status bar.
 The second tray in the status bar displays the number of spots on the device. The third tray
displays the number of minutes used on a disk and the remaining available minutes. The last
tray displays the device’s status.
 The color of a spot also signifies its status. When a spot is black, its status is normal and may be
added to a playlist. Spots that are green are in use by a playlist in a transmission window. On
Sony cart machines, if a spot’s title does not match its record in the database, the spot displays
in red in the device storage window.
 Device Storage window columns can be reviewed for:
• Num: (Number) The number of the spot in the window.
• Spot ID: The ID of the media located in the device.
• Title: The title of the media located in the device.
• Duration: The spot’s duration.
• Spot #: Displays the spot number of the media which is assigned by the device.
• Play Date: The date the media was last played.
• Status: The media’s status: normal (available for use), In Use (playing), Title Mismatch (for
Sony cart machines only) and Protect.
• Status bar indicators:
Total Available record space on the device
The size of the largest contiguous recording available on the device.
To Refresh a Window
To refresh a display, right click on the window and from the pop-up menu select Dynamic Display or
press <F5> on the keyboard. This updates the content of the window.
ADC™ Air Client
Protecting and Removing Spots

Spots in a device storage window can be delete-protected in the device storage window to ensure they
are not removed from the media. You can also remove spots so they are no longer available for air.
To Remove a Record from the server

1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column.
2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Remove or press <Delete> on the
keyboard.
3. The system prompts to confirm. Click OK to confirm.
To Protect a Record
1. Highlight an event or range of events by clicking on its entry in the number column.
2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Protected. The record is
protected and it’s Status is set to P. (Protected events display a P in the Status column.)
To Unprotect a Record
1. Highlight an event or range of events currently protected by clicking on its entry in the number
column.
2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Unprotected. The record is
unprotected and its Status is reset.
To Check or Search for a record

Note: A status panel in the Device Storage window blinks to indicate a search is in progress. This lets
operators know during long searches that Air Client is functioning and not hung.
To Check a Record against the database

1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column.
2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Database. The database window
opens with the comparison result.
3. (Option) A record can be drag-and-dropped from the Robust Database window to an open playlist or
Transmission list.
ADC™ Air Client
To Search for a Record by ID

1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column, right click on the window, and then
from the pop-up menu select Find ID.

 Find what: Enter the search string text.
 Check to Match whole word only.
 Check to Match Case.
 Select Search Direction in the window: Up or Down.
3. Click Find Next.
To Search for a record by Title

1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column, right click on the window, and then
from the pop-up menu select Find Title.

 Find what: Enter the search string text.
 Check to Match whole word only.
 Check to Match Case.
 Select Search Direction in the window: Up or Down.
3. Click Find Next.
ADC™ Air Client
Moving Spots and Records to Playlists

A record, or multiple records can be moved from the Robust Database window or a Device Storage
window to an open playlist or Transmission List using drag-and-drop or Cut and Paste from the Edit
ribbon tab.
• Drag/Drop from Device Storage Window: Select a record on the Device Storage Window, then
move the record by dragging it from the Device Storage Window and dropping it into a playlist.
• Drag/Drop from Robust Database Window: Select a record, then right click and from the menu
select Database. This launches the Robust Database window. Move the record by dragging it from
the database window and dropping it into a playlist.
• Cut/Copy/Paste from Device Storage Window: Selecta record on the Device Storage window, then
from the Edit ribbon tab select the Cut icon ( ). Click the event in a playlist after which you want
to insert the cut record, then from the Edit ribbon tab select the Paste icon ( ).
Note: Dragging-and-dropping a multisegment record to a playlist opens a multisegment window.
Moving Multiple Records

To move a range of multiple records, hold Shift and click the first record in the range, then click-hold the
last record in the range. Drag the selection to a playlist and release the mouse button to drop it.
Instead of dragging a selection range to a playlist, you can click Cut from the Edit ribbon tab, click the
event after which you want to insert the range and click Paste from the Edit ribbon tab.
More Info Window

When the functionality has been purchased, this option allows the custom configuration of a More Info
column using an ODBC database. The customer uses station-defined procedures to configure
functionality on this display.
More Info Windows display data from the automation database. Access to these fields depends upon
the client they are being accessed from.
• In the Air Client, the objective of the More Info Window is to make available any information in a
record by displaying it in a single window. This information can be the data captured using the
Media Client, as well as what currently exists in the database.
• In Air Client, they display not only the standard fields found in both the ASDB and the ASSEG tables,
but also any fields that are added to the database, normally in the ASEXT table.
For information on setting up the More Info Window see Configuring System Properties: More Info (see
"More Info" on page 267).
ADC™ Air Client
To Display the More Info Window

To display the More Info window of an ID in Air Client:
• Double-click the event number on a play list or transmission list window.
Note: Double-clicking anywhere else on an event line will result in an undesired action to occur or
initiate another feature of Air Client.
OR
• Within the Play List Window, right click and then from the pop-up menu select "Show MoreInfo."
For Example: When the event number is selected, the data associated with the material ID is displayed
in the More Info window. The following is an example window. Your window may be defined differently.
Video Window
Air Client can include an optional feature that displays the on-air event in a video window. It can be used
for monitoring the Output Stream, but has no control functionality. A video board installed in the Air
Client workstation must be connected to the output from the on-air video stream.
To Display the Video Window
When this feature is available, from the Tools ribbon tab select the Video Window icon ( ). The view
window is launched.
If this is not configured a warning message is displayed:
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Managing Compile Lists
Managing Compile Lists

About the Compiler Option
The compiler is an optional feature of Air Client that allows you to create groups of spots, or pods, to
play to air. Compiling spots into pods allows you to air multiple commercial breaks from one device
instead of playing spots from multiple devices. Each pod in a playlist plays as a single event and is
identified by the compile tape ID.
The compile list window is used to create pods and edit its spots. Editing spots when the pod is loaded in
a transmission window may cause unexpected results. You can also play spots from the compile list
window, allowing you to assess the air quality of the media.
List Filename Character Limits: Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst & .cur), Auto
List Save Lists, (.rcv & .rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32
characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a
Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters.
Creating a Compile List

A compile list is created identically to a playlist in a playlist window.
1. To open a compile list window, from the Resources ribbon tab select the View List... icon
( ).The Choose List dialog is displayed.

2. Select a compile list from the Choose List dialog, and then click OK.
To view the individual spots of a compile tape

In a compile list window, you can view the individual spots of a compile tape by using the append, load
and insert list menu options on the right-click menu.
To remove all spots from a compile list window

To remove all spots from a compile list window, point to Compiler on the right-click menu, then click
Clear List.
To prepare a list for compiling

Also, you can use the compile list window to prepare a list for compiling by performing these tasks:
1. Insert a Secondary Event Compile ID at the top of the compile list to indicate where the compiler
begins compiling the list. Air Client automatically switches to Revise Mode.
ADC™ Air Client
2. Enter an ID in the ID field of the Secondary Event Compile ID. This is the compile tape ID number
that will display in the ID field of a playlist when the compiled events are inserted. Each tape
containing a compile list must have a compile tape ID number and is used to identify all of the spots
on the tape in a playlist.
3. Insert spots into the compile list.
4. At the end of the compile list, insert a secondary break event or enter Revise Mode (press ALT + R
or from the Events ribbon tab select the Revise icon ( ).)
5. Remove letter A from the Type field of the last event to indicated the end of the compile list.
Note: Events are compiled according to the value in the Type field.
Remove A from the Type field to indicate which events you do not want to compile. Only events
containing A in the Type field are compiled.
Compiling a Compile List

After creating a compile list, use the compiler’s control panel to compile its spots on one tape.
1. Right-click the compile list window and from the popup menu select Compiler > Panel. This opens
the Compiler control panel.
2. Select the button function to perform. A description of the function of each button on the compiler
control panel follows:
 Compile: The Compile button begins the compile process, beginning with the first pod. This
feature will only compile one pod at a time, stopping at each break event allowing you time to
insert another tape.
 Auto: The Auto button also begins the compile process, except that the compiler compiles as
many pods as will fit on a single tape. The compiler will not stop at each break event; however,
each compiled pod remains separated by their secondary compile ID and break events.
 Cue One: The Cue One button cues the tape to the SOM position of a selected event, allowing
you to preview it.
 Cue Up: The Cue Up button cues the record tape to the pod’s SOM, allowing you to preview an
entire compiled list.
ADC™ Air Client
 Replay: The Replay button plays a pod or event that is cued by the Cue Up and Cue One buttons.
You cannot replay lists or events until they are cued with either the Cue One or Cue Up buttons.
 Cancel: Use the Cancel button to abort the compile process. You must recompile the list after
clicking this button.
3. During the compile process information is displayed in the Record Device Status field and the
Compiler Error field:
 The Record Device Status field displays the status of the compile list’s record device.
When compiling, messages appear in the record device status field indicating the status of the
compile process. Following is a description of each status message: ◆ Cueing. When the
compile process begins, the recordable material cues and the source material cues and threads.
• Prerolling Compiler. When the compiler is cued, the source device is in preroll and is
advancing to the SOM of an event.
• Compiling. Displays as the compiler is compiling events.
• Saving List. Displays when the compiler saves a compile list.
• Waiting to Restart. After the compiler saves a compile list, this message displays until the
compiler is restarted after it stops between break events.
Note: This is only applicable when compiling in Auto mode.
•Canceling. When the compile process is canceled, this message displays until the recorders
stop.
• Waiting for User. When an error message is displayed in a dialog box, this message displays
until you close the dialog box.
 The Compiler Error field displays any errors that occur during the compile process.
When the compiler encounters an error, it displays the error in the compiler error field on the
control panel. Following is a description of each error:
• No recorders or recorders not threaded. Either no record devices are assigned to the
compiler or there is no recordable media in the devices.
• Recorders are still moving. This error displays if the recorders are still moving when the
compile process is initiated.
• Unable to thread and/or cue. Either the recorders did not cue or the first event in the
compile list did not cue or thread.
• Operation canceled by user. Displays when the compile process is canceled.
• Compile tape mismatch. The compiler tape ID for the compile list does not match the ID in
the record device.
• Encountered end of usable tape. No more recordable media is available for the compiler to
record events on.
• Unable to locate compilable event. There are no events in the compile list to be compiled.
• Compiler skipped break/POD. The compiler skipped a break event or pod because of a
missing media error.
• Record ID has changed. The compiler detected a different compile tape ID in the compile list
than that in the record device. A dialog box appears, allowing you to confirm that you
changed the tape in the device.
4. When a list is compiled, the file is saved with a .CPL extension, instead of the .LST extension.
ADC™ Air Client
Recompiling a Compile List

If you cancel the compile process before the entire list is compiled, or you want to insert another spot in
a list that has already been compiled, you must recompile the entire list before playing on-air. Before
recompiling the list, however, you must first mark the compiled spots as uncompiled by pointing to
Compiler on the right-click menu and clicking Clear Compile Events.
Other Compile List Functions

The following functions are optional and may not be available on your Air Client workstation.
• Jam New IDs: Jam New IDs marks a point on a compile list from which to create a Sectional List. A
sectional list is a compile list that is recompiled with a new ID and saved with the extension .SEC. It is
identical to the original compile list, except that it contains only the timecode of the original list and
not the events.
A sectional list is used to play regional spots in place of the spots recorded in the compile list. Both
the sectional list and the compile list must be loaded in separate transmission list windows before
aired. To broadcast the sectional list, the compile and sectional list must be played simultaneously.
The compiled list references the sectional list to determine when its spots’ air. When the spots of a
sectional list air, the compile list plays normally; however, in some broadcast regions, compile list
spots will be substituted by spots in the sectional list.
• Mark Exception: Mark Exception marks an event in a compiled list as an event to recompile into a
sectional list. To create the sectional list, you must change the event ID of all of the events that you
have marked as exceptions to another ID. The sectional list is created to play regional spots in place
of national spots, so, the ID replacing the original compile ID should be the ID of the regional spot.
Spots that are marked as exceptions will have the letter X next to letter A in the Type field of the
compile list.
These spots are recompiled with the regional spots in place of the national spots. When the
sectional list is loaded into a transmission list window, all spots not marked as exceptions are
ignored by Air Client. When a sectional list is compiled, the timecode from the original compile list
will be transferred on a new tape with the marked exceptions.
• Thread Into VTR: Use this option to specify the VTR in a cart machine to thread the source tape into.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Error Management
Error Management
About Displaying Errors
To Simultaneously View All Air Client Errors
To simultaneously view all Air Client errors in a separate window, from the File ribbon tab select the
Display Errors icon ( ).
From the Choose Server dialog box, click a server whose errors you want to view and click OK. An Error
Log window displays all errors occurring for the server you selected.
To View Error Logs
To view error logs saved as text files, from the File ribbon tab select the Open Text... icon ( ), and
then choose a file you want to view.
window shows the directory specified in Properties/Environment. If the operator browses to a different
location, the Dialog "remembers/remaps to" the last used folder, and opens it by default the next time
"File/Open Playlist, File/Open Text, Append/load/insert list' is used.
To Display Errors
1. From the File ribbon tab select the Display Errors icon ( ). An error display will appear with the
most recent errors.
2. To clear these errors, from the File ribbon tab select the Clear Errors ( ) icons.
Note: This does not clear errors saved in the error log. The errors display is only a clipboard of errors
since the last time the errors were cleared.
ADC™ Air Client
Clearing Error Messages from the Air Client

Desktop
Error messages are displayed in the status bar of the Air Client desktop.
• Uncleared error messages are displayed in Bolded black text.

• Cleared error messages are displayed in ‘normal’ black text.
To Clear Error Messages

1. Clear any error message by pressing <F4>, or clicking the F4 button located in the lower left corner
of the display.
2. If there is more than one error message, press <F4> to clear the next message displayed after the
previous one.
3. The last error message displays in black, instead of red, after pressing <F4>. To remove this last
message from the desktop, from the File ribbon tab select the Clear Errors icon ( ).
List Validation
The list validation option checks through the list of events for potential problems and lists the events,
and their errors.
• Sequence: (sequence = missing segments within a series, or segments out of order) The segment
number is out of sequence for the same tape ID in the list, denoted with "sequence" in the error
type field.
• SameSeg: (same segment = same segment number back-to-back) The segment number is followed
by same segment number for the same tape ID in the list, denoted with "sameseg" in the error type
field.
• Separates: (separates = segments not separated by a break) The segments are not separated by a
break, denoted with "separates" in the error type field.
• SameID: (same id = same ID back-to-back) The ID is followed by same ID in the list, denoted with
"sameID" in the error type field.
Note: The error type for each event is a warning only. All events will play.
List Validation window

The error type for each event in a List Validation window is a warning only. The operator should check
the events listed to ensure proper playback.
ADC™ Air Client
1. While viewing list, from the Events ribbon tab select the List Validation icon ( ). The list
validation info dialog appears listing any errors.
If Air Client was not able to find any errors within the transmission list based on the described error
criteria above, a List Validation confirmation box is displayed.
2. (Option) To save the list to a textfile, click Save.

A Save As Text dialog is displayed requiring the operator to specify a file name and then click Save.
3. (Option) To print the list, click Print.
A Print dialog is displayed, requiring the operator to specify a printer (if other than default) and then
click OK to print.
4. Click Close to close the List Validation dialog.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Emergency Operations
Emergency Operations
Main/Backup Changeover
(FOR NON-CLONING STATIONS)
The following are Changeover indications:

1. The screen freezes up (Countdown of current event, and clock displayed in lower left corner will
stop moving).
2. A pop-up warning message appears indicating the main Device Server has aborted operation. Click
Yes or OK, to use the alternate Device Server.
Recovery Steps
1. Always try RETRY first, maybe your client just lost connection and the Device Server is actually still
OK (you can also confirm this by checking for the same error status on other nearby clients) **If
RETRY fails, wait before you answer YES to "USE ALTERNATE" – Note the time that WAS left on your
current event, and/or the start time indicated on the auto ripple next to the next event. Note this
time, and how much time is roughly left.
**BEFORE PERFORMING STEPS 2 and 3**
 Ensure the BACKUP Device Server is actually on, and the application is running. If a co-worker
can help with this step that would be a good idea, since you will have limited time to complete
these steps.
 If you’re in a TAPE EVENT you must put the deck into LOCAL and leave it in LOCAL FOR THE REST
OF THAT EVENT.
2. Throw the MAIN/BACKUP transfer switch (usually in racks by the Device Servers themselves) – this
will give control of all your devices over to the BACKUP Device Server. This is also a step you may
want to get a co-worker to do while you look after the Air Client side.
3. Answer YES to the "MAIN Aborted – Use alternate" prompt.
4. Look at the top of the windows bar for MAIN to change to BACKUP, you may see an hourglass during
this time, about 30 seconds.
ADC™ Air Client
MAIN.
Changes to BACKUP.
5. After a successful connection to the BACKUP, the system prompts to "Reload Transmission Lists" on
the alternate Device Server; click YES or OK to continue. [This only happens if you’re configured for
Auto List Save, and it is best if ONE CLIENT is set up to do this for all playlists]
Note: When the client logs in to BACKUP, the Transmission lists will NOT NECESSARILY open for
viewing (though they are indeed already loaded if "Reload" prompt above was chosen). Remember
to use the VIEW LIST option (from shortcut button, or from Resources/View List) to see the active
transmission list(s). You should discover them already loaded at this point if you had answered YES
to step 4. You may need to delete a few events to get up to the current event. Delete UP TO AND
INCLUDING on-air event. Your list had already started the current event (which is now already in
progress playing out of the Disk [or VTR in LOCAL]) so its line item needs to be removed from the
list.
6. At this point your client should be logged into BACKUP and your list should be loaded and parked on
the next-needed event. Your events should now be blue and ready to cue and roll. DO NOT hit PGM
RUN, and DO NOT CUE EVENTS at this point.
 If you are on server-based content (file trailing on for remainder of on-air event) an early cue
command will stop your on-air event and you will be in black.
 If you’re in a tape based event, leave it in LOCAL. Switching to remote will cause the tape to
register and cue to subsequent segments or eject, both scenarios will take you off the air, so
keep it in LOCAL until the segment has ended.
ADC™ Air Client
7. To resume automated playout, you can either place a hard start on the first spot in the break, or
wait for the end of the still-playing current on-air file, then (at the fade to black) hit PGM RUN, to
cue, then ROLL (or PLAY).
REMEMBER: If you are using an Operator Control Panel (OCP), it will not be lit up (usable) initially so
you will need to use the software panel to roll the list at first.
Other Considerations
Video server ports that are set to "Stop Disk Play/Record on Init" will reset to black, thus stopping your
on-air event when the transfer switch is thrown. If you want the option to be able to failover and have
the current file stay on the air during the failover process, ensure at least one of the ports in a given set
(the AIR or the PROTECT [or both]) are set so they do NOT "Stop Disk Play/Record on Init."
This is configured from the Configuration Manager tool. For details reference the ADC Device Server v12
and Configuration Manager Installation and Operations Reference.
System Power Up and Down Sequences

ADC Automation System components power up sequence is performed in reverse order to their Power
down sequence.
ADC™ Air Client
Power Up Sequence Power Down Sequence
1st File Server 1st
2nd Device Server 2nd
3rd B/U Device Server 3rd
4th Clients(s) 4th
5th Devices** 5th
**Note: Only applies when powering up or down of device is required.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Automated Recording
Automated Recording
Record Lists
The ADC provides features for automating the recording of taped and live events. The material you
record can come from any source – network/satellite feed, studio, or tape.
• With AutoSat: Record Lists are created by AutoSat. Your Record Schedules are entered into AutoSat.
AutoSat tunes in your feeds, and schedules the events to record on the ADC Record List(s).
• Without AutoSat: Setting up for timed recordings is similar to preparing for event playout. You first
create a list of Record events, manually or through a traffic system, and save the list as a .LST file.
You will need to load or append this list into your Record List(s) on your ADC on a daily basis.
• For Invenio Ingest Server Scheduled Records, the ADC Record List must have the Record Sources
assigned ON the ADC Record List, as Switch Only Devices, with the appropriate Edit Input Router
Device, Source, and Destination configuration. It is a recommended that the Source Switches added
to the ADC Record List be similar, but unique by one character. (i.e. ADC Router Source Tab = FS2
ADC Record List Switch only = #FS2.) This difference makes it easier to choose the correct device in
the Invenio Scheduled Record Drop Down lists.
Normally, with no Invenio, for ADC Record Lists, the Sources only need to be populated in the
Source Tab of the ADC Router Device.
Key Elements
The following is an example of a Record List.
In your Record List, insert Primary events as needed with the following information:
• TIME: Enter the time of day you want to start the recording. (Most lists run off a 24hr. clock.) If
recording to Video Servers only, and two or more events start at the same time you need to insert
the additional record events on a second record list. (Record lists, like VTRs can only record one
event at a time.) To avoid clipping the beginning of a program adjust the start time to allow: 15 sec.
ADC™ Air Client
of pad. If you could have more than one record event start at the same time if you were using a VTR
and Video Disk or Multiple VTRs then these events may be inserted on the same record list.
• TYPE: Enter an R (Record) for the type of event. The Record event is a timed, hard start Event.
• ID:
 If Recording to Tape – Enter the ID number for the specific program. Use the same number that
the show will be prepped and play back as later. Operators can use unprepared tapes as
Barcode events and tapes with user bit ID’s prepared with Media Client.
Note: IDs should be No more than 8 characters in length.
 If Recording to Disk – A different ID number can be used than what the show will play back as.
This is to ensure that an un-prepped show may not accidentally air. The ID number can be
renamed at Media Client at prep time.
Note: Not all video disks support rename. If your facility is using the reject blank SOM option,
this may help ensure the incorrect show does not air.
• Title:
If the Record device receives input from a router/switcher, enter the name of the input source here.
Use the pre-configured source name on the Device Server. A User-friendly title can also be inserted
in the TITLE FIELD following the router command in the following manner; SAT3;Show Monday – the
routing command first, then a semi-colon, then your user title.
*If nothing is entered for the title, and the Record device is connected to a router, ADC uses the A/V
channel information to determine the input crosspoint.
The result of this being either recording black or the last source that was routed to this device.
• Dur: (Duration) Enter the duration of the Record event for the duration you want to record for.
Remember to take into account that you may need to start the next recording and that this
recording may have started early.
• SOM: Certain videodisks will require an SOM (Start Of Message) value.
Running the Record List

1. Load or Append the Record List file (.LST file) into a designated Record List window.
Note: If using AutoSat this will happen automatically.
2. ADC looks for the Record device that has the specific ID’d event. If using an external VTR, insert the
tape using a Wand, or a Barcode event. This is done to validate the event on the list. Remember to
rewind after a tape. If using a videodisk, the videodisk must be properly connected and running. A
videodisk must be properly configured. (In most cases this will be pre-configured.)
3. If devices are ready, and all Record events in the list are valid, recording begins at the designated
time for each event.
Note: So as not to clip recordings, make sure at least: 15sec of pad is provided for the start time and
the duration of the file.
Record List Tips/Troubleshooting

• DO NOT load/include more than 24-hrs worth of events on one Record List at one time. (Record lists
do NOT recognize dates, only a 24hr clock.)
• Make sure SOM fields contain a value (Applies to certain Video Disks only)
ADC™ Air Client
• You can only have one Disk port assigned to one list at one time, therefore disk recordings cannot be
simultaneous and may not overlap on one list.
Secondary Records
Recording of live shows for time delayed playout requires an optional ADC feature.
This Live Record option provides a Secondary Record event – to the standard ADC system. Unlike timed
recordings, live recordings designed for delayed playout use one list for both the recording, and
subsequent playback of the events. i.e. The On-Air Playlist.
Key Elements
The following is an example of a playlist with a Secondary Record event attached.
Inputting Secondary Record Events

A Secondary Record event can be inserted into a playlist two ways
• Manually - using the ribbon tab: Events > Insert Secondary > Secondary Record. Or Shift-Insert, then
select Secondary Record from the list.
• Traffic Log - events can be entered in advance by Traffic.
Secondary Record Entry Guidelines

• The ID and Segment Number on the Secondary Record Event should match the requested replay
event’s ID and Segment Number.
• The duration does not have to exactly match the Total Running Time (TRT) of the program, the
duration MUST be AT LEAST the Total Running Time of the program and the duration for each
secondary record event must match one another exactly.
The idea is that the duration scheduled for the Secondary Record event must match or exceed the
Total Running Time of the longest segment. This duration must be used for all the segments.
• Make sure the Time of Day field is blank (not zeros/no value)
• Make sure the record tape is put into a VTR before the live program is to be played and recorded.
Basic Functions of the Secondary Record

• A Secondary Record event records the Primary event that it is attached to.
• When the system starts to play the first segment of the live event, the Record event is started.
• When the operator comes out of an up counting live event [into break] using the PLAY button on the
list Control Panel, the Record event for that live event will be marked done.
ADC™ Air Client
At that time, the replay event down the list will be filled in with the SOM and Duration of the
recorded event – ready for replay. The Title field from the SECONDARY RECORD event is also copied
at the replay event line. The recording tape will not be stopped but will be moved down to the next
SECONDARY RECORD with the same ID [for subsequent segments], where the recording continues
until the show is completed.
• Once the Secondary Record is completed, the ID and Segment information could be saved to the
database (if configured)
Secondary Recording to Video Disk

• When inserting SECONDARY RECORD events, make sure that the Time of Day field is BLANK. DO
NOT put in zeros, only blanks. Set the SOM field of each SECONDARY RECORD event to 00:00:00.00.
• The videodisk port doing the recording must be properly configured or the recording will not be
made correctly. The following disk parameters must be set:
 Enable Recording of Record Event
 Enable Segment Play/Record with ID (Modify Segment IDs must equal zero)
 Back to Back Record must be disabled
 Make sure that the videodisk port is assigned to the list before the recording is to be done.
 Videodisks require the use of a unique ID for each individual event that is recorded. See your
videodisks documentation for system requirements.
Secondary Recording to Tape

• Tapes MUST BE pre-striped with Time Code when used for Secondary Records. It is best to use the
Media Client’s ‘Black Tapes’ feature, to stripe the tapes, so as to Record the tape’s ID and Userbits as
well. Putting userbits on the tape will allow the tape to be inserted into a VTR before use and
automatically be recognized by ADC as the Record tape.
• An SOM on the Record event is needed because an insert edit Record is used instead of a hard
Record. This ensures that the tape will be started using synchronized play to enable it to Record at
the specified first frame for frame accurate playback. Enter the SOM in all the Secondary Record
events using the same SOM value.
• Make sure that the Time of Day field is BLANK in the SECONDARY RECORD event.
DO NOT put in zeros, only blanks. This field is used to store additional information about the
recording while the recording is taking place.
• The commercial spaces between the live events are also being recorded on your tape, but because
there are no SECONDARY RECORD events attached to them, the information is not saved and
records black.
• When the last live event is finished, the last Record event will also be finished. At that time the
recording will also stop. If that tape is needed anywhere within the Lookahead, the tape will stay in
the deck and cue for playback. When it plays, it will play for the duration that was determined by
the SECONDARY RECORD event.
• When using this event to replay segments, remember that when the tape is finished recording, it
will have to be rewound for playback. If the replay program immediately follows the end of the live
program, then the tape may not cue in time. If this scenario exists, then two record tapes should be
used and IDs on both tapes should match exactly.
ADC™ Air Client
Database Logging
When a SECONDARY RECORD event is finished recording, all subsequent replay events on the list are
automatically filled in with the recorded duration and SOM. If any other lists on the same Automation
Server contain the same replay events, they will be filled in also.
Enable As Run/Update Database must be set up for your Secondary Record files to be stored
permanently in the Media Client Database. This is only necessary if you need to permanently store your
Secondary Record files for future replay – beyond the current log. You should only use this option if the
previous scenarios apply to your station. This must only be configured on one Air Client.
To Activate the Update Database option

WARNING: This option can only be enabled in one Air Client. Having multiple air clients will generate a
CURSOR SQL error.
1. From the ribbon tabs select Properties > AsRun Logs…
2. On the As Run configuration tab, select Update Database to allow secondary recorded Id’s to be
saved to the database with the timecode and segment information.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Barcode Event
Barcode Event
Introduction
A Barcode Event is the process of loading a VTR with a tape that will be needed for use by a specific ON-
AIR Transmission Playlist.
When would you need a Barcode Event?
There are three scenarios where a Barcode Event is useful:

• There is not enough time to record the media into the video server and it must air off of a VTR
machine.
• A Cart Machine or Video Server crash and a backup/contingency reel needs to air off of a VTR
machine.
• The ingested copy of the show has been purged from the Video Servers and is now not available to
the ON-AIR Playlist.
Will ADC run this Barcode Event automated?
Yes. The event on the playlist that will run out of a VTR machine will run in a similar manner to an event
that runs from a video server. The only difference is the VTR being used will switch to air when the ON-
AIR Playlist plays the event instead of the video server.
Will a Barcode Event appear on the playlist differently?
No. The event was the same event that was originally appended to the list. The device column will show
the correct device being used. In this case the specific VTR device name as it appears in the Device
Status window Device column.
How do I actually load a Barcode Event?
The following pages will show the correct procedures to load a Barcode Event as well as some of the
different scenarios related to barcode events.
Preparing the list for a Barcode Event if the ID exists on a Video Server?
If a show was ingested incorrectly or there is a bad copy on the Video Server the ID must be deleted or
changed on the playlist and then purged off both the Primary Video Server and the Protect Video Server
(if available). You would then re-insert the ID back into the playlist when it will need to play.
ADC™ Air Client
VTR Playlist Assignment

VTR as Assigned Device
When a VTR is assigned to a playlist that VTR will be available to that playlist when a tape is loaded and a
barcode event is executed.
A barcode event is an option in the automation to designate to the automation that media will play from
a specific VTR. The fact that the VTR is assigned to the playlist ensures the VTR is only used for the
specific playlist it is assigned to. Other playlists will not have access to this tape machine.
The following image shows VTR1 is currently assigned to a specific Playlist as shown in the Owner
column. (Image colors are set to enhance readability. Your view may appear different.)
VTR as a Floater Machine

A "Floater Machine" is a VTR that is unassigned to any of the playlists. This "Floater Machine" can be
used by any of the playlists on the Device Server it is controlled by as long as the Audio/Video
configurations are set up for the ON-AIR playlist that will use the VTR for ON-AIR playback.
The following image shows VTR1 is unassigned to any specific playlist. The owner column for this
machine is blank. When a barcode event is performed, the owner column will fill in with the correct list.
(Image colors are set to enhance readability. Your view may appear different.)
Note: If attempting to perform a barcode event and the owner column in the Device Status window
shows that the VTR is currently assigned to another list, call an engineer.
Barcode Event – Step by Step

1. Select the correct play list to load the tape as a barcode event.
ADC™ Air Client
2. Insert tape into a tape machine that is not assigned to the Media List. Place VTR in Local mode.
3. Set the Audio/Video levels.

4. Click the event on the transmission list that was loaded into the VTR, Right Click on transmission list,
select Barcode Event in the right click options menu.
5. Put VTR into REMOTE. The event on the playlist should turn blue, cue to the correct timecode in the
events SOM column, and then back up the tape to the preroll timecode.
6. The event will play from the VTR at the scheduled time.
 If the tape does not have timecode in the SOM column it will go to a STOP status and play when
it receives the Play command from the Playlist at current location on the tape.
 To control tape manually through the automation double click on the event that is loaded into
the VTR and a DEVICE CONTROL PANEL will open up. This will allow standard VTR control,
including play, rewind, forward, and CUE which could be used to QC and CUE prior to air. If
control of the VTR is initiated with this panel make sure to hit the CUE button prior to airtime
(Only if there is timecode).
Barcode Event Scenarios

The following pages discuss several different examples of inserting and playing a barcode event. A
barcode event is an option in the Playlist-Right Click Options Menu. This is one easy way to load a tape
and have the automation control it with the transmission list. Follow the steps to do a barcode event.
Before being able to do a barcode event the ID being used cannot be located in a Video Server or a Cart
Machine assigned to the playlist.
Scenario 1: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has an

automation database record
1. Select correct play list to load the tape as a barcode event.
2. Insert tape into a VTR (in local mode) that is either assigned to the ON-AIR Playlist or that is an
unassigned (floater) machine.
3. (Image colors are set to enhance readability. Your display may appear different.)
4. Set audio/video levels as appropriate
ADC™ Air Client
5. Click the event on the transmission list that corresponds to the tape that was loaded into the VTR,
then right click on this event, and from the popup menu select Barcode Event.
6. Place the VTR into REMOTE. The event on the play list should turn blue, cue to the correct timecode
in the events SOM column, and then back up the tape to the preroll timecode.
(Image colors are set to enhance readability. Your display may appear different.)
Scenario 2: Using Barcode Event for a tape that does not have
an automation database record (Manually entering SOM)
2. Manually revise event line using Alt+R to enter/change any information necessary (in this example
entering the SOM of the tape in the SOM field is needed to allow the tape to cue to its correct
position) Alt+R again to exit the revise mode.
3. (Image colors are set to enhance readability. Your display may appear different.)
Insert tape into a VTR (in local mode) that is either assigned to the ON-AIR Playlist or that is an
4. Set audio/video levels as appropriate.

then right click on this event and from the popup menu select Barcode Event.
6. Place the VTR into REMOTE. The event on the play list should turn blue, cue to the correct timecode
in the events SOM column, and then back up the tape to the preroll timecode.
Scenario 3: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has bad or no

timecode
ADC™ Air Client
2. Click <Alt+R> to set Revise mode. Then manually revise event line to enter/change any information
necessary (in this example the SOM field should be left blank <not zeros> to ensure that the
automation will not try to cue up to any TC location on the tape)
3. Insert tape into a VTR (in local mode) that is either assigned to the ON-AIR Playlist or that is an
4. Set audio/video levels as appropriate.
5. With machine still in local, cue the tape up to it’s in point and then back the tape up to its
appropriate pre-roll position
then right click on this event, and from the popup menu select Barcode Event.
7. Place the VTR into REMOTE. The event on the play list should turn blue, however, the VTR will
remain in STOP mode and will not shuttle to any TC location because the SOM field is blank.
 Automation will play event at the scheduled time.

 If the SOM is not entered on the playlist the VTR will stay in a STOP status and play when it
receives the Play command from the Playlist. Therefore, it is important to remember to
manually back the tape up to account for preroll.
 It is only when the SOM does exist on the Playlist (either from the database or manually
entered) that the automation will cue to the correct position on the tape (list preroll value).
 To control tape manually through the automation double click on the event that is loaded into
the VTR and a DEVICE CONTROL PANEL will open up.
Note: In order for the Device Control Panel to be accessed, you must double click on a VTR event that
has status in its status column. Clicking anywhere else will result in the opening of the Playlist Control
ADC™ Air Client
Panel which controls the ON-AIR Playlist!) This will allow standard VTR control, including play, rewind,
forward, and CUE which could be used to QC and CUE prior to air. If control of the VTR is initiated with
this panel make sure to hit the CUE button prior to airtime (Only if there is an SOM entered). You may
also access this Device Control Panel by right clicking on the VTR event.
WARNING: The event will need to be re-barcoded if there is no SOM and manual control is taken.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Logging
Logging
Error Logs
Errors that occur during the use of ADC automation are displayed in the error window at the bottom of
the playlist. An error log is created for each 24-hour day and covers the period from midnight to
23:59:59.
To Display an Error Log

1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open Text icon ( ). The Open File dialog is displayed.
2. Navigate to the location of the error logs. Error logs are typically located in the Lists\Errors directory
or in the Lists\AsRuns directory.
3. The directory of the Error logs is configured from the Properties ribbon tab and selecting the
Errors... icon ( ).
4. Under Files of type: Select Errors (*.err).
ADC™ Air Client
5. Highlight the file you wish to read, and then click Open. The selected file is displayed in a Text
Browser window.
AsRun Logs
Events that playback during the use of ADC automation are displayed in the AsRun Log. An AsRun Log is
created for each 24-hour day and covers the specified period as configured from the Properties ribbon
tab and selecting the AsRun Logs... icon ( ).
To Display AsRun Logs

1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open Text icon ( ). The Open File dialog is displayed.
2. Select the correct folder. AsRun logs are typically located in the Lists\Asruns directory. Each
transmission list may also be separated into different folders. (This may be different at you facility if
the AsRun logs are placed in a different location)
3. For Files of type: Select Text Files (*.txt).
ADC™ Air Client
4. Highlight the file you wish to read and then click Open. The selected file is displayed in a Text
Browser window.
5. The Log can be checked for time played, missed events, skipped events, reconcile codes, playout
device, etc.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation WinCmms
WinCmms
About Traffic Translator
The Traffic Translator is a stand alone application that can be run from any of the automation’s clients or
from any computer’s desk top. It is a custom created application tailored to the unique requirements of
each customer and is designed so that both primary and secondary events can be generated from the
traffic log.
In a typical automation environment the Traffic Translator supports a flat file interchange workflow
between the Traffic and Automation systems. In this workflow the Traffic System exports schedule files
and they are translated into automation playlist files using the Traffic Translator application. The
translated lists are then loaded into the automaton system for on-air playout.
Using the Translator Program

WinCmms is the traffic log translation program that will translate a log from traffic into a .LST file. This
.LST file will then be available for the operator to append the .LST into the transmission list. It will
explain how to build a new playlist.
1. Launch WinCmms shortcut on desktop.
2. On the Welcome screen, click Next…
3. (If the log is on a floppy disk, insert the disk into the floppy drive)
4. Select the A:\ drive if not already selected.
5. If the traffic log is not a txt file, select All Files to view the contents of the floppy.
6. Select the desired list to translate, and then select Next.
7. Select the destination for the translated playlist file, and then select Next.
8. Confirm the Input info and the Output info is correct.
9. Select Translate. When the translation is complete, select Finish.
WinCmms Setup
Follow directions on install readme file to copy the wincmms.exe file the WinCMMS directory on the
local PC.
To Put a Shortcut on the Desktop

1. Using Microsoft Windows Explorer, locate the WinCMMS directory.
2. Click the wincmms.exe file.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation WinCmms
3. On the File menu, click Create Shortcut.

4. Drag the shortcut icon onto the desktop.
Tips:
To change any settings for the shortcut, such as its name, what key combination is used to access it, use
your right mouse button to click the shortcut, and then click Properties.
To delete a shortcut, drag it to the Recycle Bin. The original item will still exist on the disk where it is
stored.
To Change the Default Directories and Options

1. Use your right mouse button to click the WinCMMS shortcut on the desktop, and then click
Properties.
2. On the Properties window. Click on the Shortcut tab.
3. Add the following parameters, separated by a space, to the Target text box:
<input_directory\[input_file]> or <input_directory\[default_extension]>
<output_directory>
[-axy]
[<done_directory>]
Where:
 <input_directory>: Points to the default input directory. Where the traffic logs are located.
Could be accompanied by a [input_file] name. This is useful when calling the translator from
another application. The translator closes itself after the file is converted.
OR
Could be accompanied by a [default_extension].
 <output_directory>: Points to the default output directory. Where the output playlist will be
saved.
 -a: Allows the translator to run in Automatic Mode. The Translator will run minimized converting
all the files located in the <input_directory>. After each log is translated is moved to the
<done_directory>. If there is no <done_directory> specified, will traffic log will be moved to the
<output_directory>. The Translator stays open until a new file(s) is (are)downloaded to the
<input_directory>.
 -x: Allows the translator to run in Batch Mode. The Translator will convert all the files located in
the <input_directory>. It closes itself after the last file is converted. Not to be used in
conjunction with the –a switch.
 -y: Allows the translator to run without prompt. Will overwrite the output file, if exists. Can be
used in conjunction with the –a or –x switch.
 Examples:
c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe a:\ e:\playlist
c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe e:\traffic\today.txt e:\playlist -y
c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe e:\traffic\*.scd e:\playlist -xy
c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe e:\traffic e:\playlist -ay e:\traffic\done
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Global Media Transfer (GMT)
Global Media Transfer (GMT)

About GMT
GMT or Global Media Transfer controlls the movement of media/material. This process can be used to
move material a few feet within a facility or thousands of miles between facilities. GMT is a part of the
On-Air automation system. Each transmission list may ask GMT to find media that cannot be found in
the devices assigned to the list. GMT will then find and move the media to a destination device, usually
a videodisk server, assigned to the transmission list. The transmission list can then air this media. GMT
can also be used in conjunction with the Media Client to send and retrieve material from an archive
device.
Purchase Note: GMT is a for-purchase option to ADC systems. Contact your Automation Sales
representative for details.
Reference Note: For more information reference the ADC GMT Configuration and Operations Guide
document.
The main tasks of GMT are:

• Find media/material needed by an on-air transmission list or find material requested by a Media
Client.
• Copy that media to its intended destination. This may be a videodisk server serving a transmission
list or an archive device.
• Monitor the movement of material.
• With AsRun logging, log the movement of material.
• Provide automatic media duplication on multiple videodisk servers for air protection.
GMT Transfer Modes

GMT supports four transfer modes or mechanisms for copying media: fibrechannel transfers, baseband
transfers, archive transfers and wide-area network FTP transfers.
• Fibrechannel transfers: Media may be copied among video servers linked by a fibrechannel
connection. Fibrechannel transfers are data transfers of compressed MPEG or JPEG files and occur
faster than real time. Fibrechannel transfers may occur between devices controlled by multiple
Device Servers.
• Archive transfers: Media may be copied to or from an archive device either by the normal
background GMT process, or manually through the Media Client application. Archive transfers are
data transfers of compressed MPEG or JPEG files and occur faster than real time. Archive transfers
may be "single-hop" or "double-hop" transfers. Single-hop transfers copy the media from the
archive directly to the requesting playout video server. Double-hop transfers copy the media from
the archive to an intermediate video server, and then execute a fibrechannel transfer from the
intermediate video server to the requesting playout video server. Archive transfers may occur
between devices controlled by multiple Device Servers.
ADC™ Air Client
• Baseband transfers: Media may be copied from a baseband source device, such as a cart machine,
VTR or a video server’s decoder port, to a video server’s encoder port. Baseband transfers are real-
time transfers. Audio and video are automatically routed from the source device to the destination
device according to the A/V routing tables configured for the GMT list. Baseband transfers may be
"single-hop" or "double-hop" transfers. Single-hop transfers copy the media from the source device
directly to the requesting playout video server. Double-hop transfers copy the media from the
source device to an intermediate video server, and then execute a fibrechannel transfer from the
intermediate video server to the requesting playout video server. Baseband transfers may only
occur between devices controlled by a single Device Server. Only the fibrechannel "hop" of double-
hop baseband transfers may occur between devices controlled by multiple Device Servers.
• WAN FTP transfers: Media may be copied among video servers using the video server’s native FTP
transfer mechanism. This may be accomplished on a local-area or wide-area network. FTP transfers
are data transfers of compressed MPEG or JPEG files and may occur faster than real time, depending
on the bandwidth available on the wide-area network. Only the local video server, designated as the
site manager, need be controlled by a Device Server.
GMT Components
GMT consists of three fundamental components: Requesters, Distributors and GMT lists.
• Requesters are virtual media devices assigned to a Transmission list and associated with destination
devices (playout video servers). Media that is not available in the Requester’s destination device is
requested from a Distributor (or Distributors) associated with source devices. Requests are made
when events enter the lookahead of a Transmission list and cannot be registered with any of the
physical media devices assigned to that list.
• Distributors are virtual media devices assigned to a GMT list and associated with source devices.
These source devices may be video server ports, cart machines, VTRs, archives or ProxyFTP devices.
Distributors create and run events on the GMT list to accomplish the transfer of media to the
requesting destination device. A single distributor can only support a single transfer mode,
depending on the type of its associated source device, but may be "pointed to" or linked with other
Distributors supporting other transfer modes. By "chaining" Distributors in this manner, search
paths may be created to pass requests through a number of Distributors of different types. The first
Distributor whose source device contains the requested media will execute a transfer - of that
Distributor’s type - to the Requester’s destination device.
• GMT Lists are modified Transmission lists used exclusively by GMT. Distributors assigned to the GMT
list will create events to execute transfers of one type or another. Non-real-time transfers
(fibrechannel, archive and WAN FTP) are executed by events registered and run by the Distributors.
Baseband transfers are created by Distributors but run by the physical media devices assigned to the
GMT list.
• (OPTION) Push Lists are simply Transmission Lists used for a specific purpose other than on-air
playout. Push Lists are used to "push" media from a source device to a destination device ahead of
time. Under normal circumstances, Requesters request missing media at roughly the same rate as
events enter the lookahead of the requesting Transmission List. GMT is driven by the Transmission
List and will fulfill requests for missing media as events undergo the registration process.
A Push List allows GMT to move ("push") media in advance of the Transmission List. The traffic
department may create a "push list" log consisting of spots needed for air tomorrow. The log file
may then be translated into a playlist file by the Traffic Translator and loaded into the Push List.
ADC™ Air Client
A Simple GMT System

The illustration below shows a simple fibrechannel GMT system.
• A Requester assigned to the Transmission List queries the destination device for availability of
media. If an ID on the Transmission List cannot be registered by the destination device (because the
ID does not exist in the destination device), the Requester passes a request to the Distributor.
• The Distributor is assigned to the GMT List and is in communication with a source device. If the
Distributor, after querying its source device, finds that the media is available, it will create an event
on the GMT List that will initiate a Fibrechannel transfer.
• The Distributor will run the event on the GMT List and the media will be copied from the source
device to the destination device. Once the copy process has begun, the source device will inform the
system that the media is now available for registration on the Transmission List and playout.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation ADC AirFlex
ADC AirFlex
About ADC AirFlex
A common requirement across the majority of the markets that ADC serves is to be able to break away
from scheduled programming to an alternate source or material when required and subsequently
continue the original schedule. Perhaps the most common example is a breaking news story, but there
are other scenarios such as a live event running beyond its scheduled period.
This enhancement implements the ADC AirFlex function through making use of ADC’s fundamental
method of operation- a play list of sequential events loaded into a Transmission List, with devices
assigned to the Transmission List - to provide an automated JIP process using a special Break-away
panel.
This feature allows an operator to address the following Join-In-Progress scenarios:

• Live news or other unscheduled events that require cutting away from normal programming, for a
known or unknown duration.
• Reoccurring events that do not conform to a specific or regular time, or event boundary.
• Live events such as sports, where delays, cancellations, and extensions must be accommodated.
ADC AirFlex provides the operator a variety of methods to return to the original schedule, such as:
 Rejoining at the point from which the sequence was departed,
 Joining at the point at which the schedule would be - had no departure been made (referred to
as Join in Progress or JIP), or
 Manually selecting an appropriate point for the rejoining of the schedule.
ADC AirFlex addresses these needs in a manner that provides efficient use of resources, a streamlined
operator interface, and maximum flexibility. As with many aspects of ADC, it is not intended or designed
to support a specific scenario or workflow. Rather, it provides a general set of flexible tools. These tools,
when used with procedures appropriate to each station’s unique operating requirements, provide the
ability to manage complex scenarios with minimal staff and device resources.
IMPORTANT: ADC AirFlex is provided as a standard feature of ADC and does not require purchase.
However, prior to its use the correct number of Breakaway lists and Breakaway objects must be set for
your implementation. If this is not done, the AirFlex functionality will not work. Contact Automation
Support to ensure AirFlex functionality is correctly enabled for your system.
Note: If AirFlex is not enabled, the Breakaway panel will appear grayed out on the ribbon bar and there
will be no operational impact on your system.
Note: Because of the interdependencies of this feature, it not recommended to mix Client and Device
Server versions.
ADC™ Air Client
An Overview of Components
The following entries provide an overview of the main components of the ADC AirFlex feature. For
details on ADC AirFlex overview, operations, and setup see the ADC AirFlex Reference Guide.
• Breakaway List: The ADC AirFlex function uses a breakaway list to manage the current schedule
during the breakaway process. Associated with a Transmission List, the breakaway list operates as a
background process for moving off the current scheduled programming while the breakaway
sequence is in progress and then moving back onto the current schedule when rejoined.
• The Breakaway Control Panel: The ADC AirFlex Breakaway Panel is intended to be used in
conjunction with other controls, including the software list control panel, the device control panel,
and the ADC FlexSync duplication control panel.
For the operator, the Breakaway Panel is the most visible manifestation of ADC AirFlex and is
integrated into the existing user interface of the Air Client. For each Transmission List, it can be
invoked from the context menu in the same manner as the list control panel.
 Break-away Panel Layout:

• Break-away: These buttons are used to select the manner in which ADC will break away
from the scheduled events. Selecting a breakaway type and a sequence or router shortcut to
which the breakaway will occur sets up a breakaway, with the timing of the breakaway
determined by the selected breakaway type.
• Return: These buttons select the manner in which ADC returns to the original schedule after
the end of the breakaway. The return type selected determines where in the original
schedule the first event following the breakaway is taken. The return type can be selected at
any time after the breakaway is initiated by the operator, even before the actual breakaway
occurs. On the other hand, in a dynamic situation the choice of the return type might not be
made until immediately before the end of the breakaway.
• Sequences: This is a list of predefined sequences of events, from which the breakaway can
be selected. Rather than having to manually insert the breakaway event by event, this
makes complex operations, including any combination of events, to be instantly available.
The sequences are ADC .LST playlist files and can be created and maintained using standard
processes. Breakaways can also be edited while executing in the same manner as any ADC
playlist.
• Router Shortcuts: In some cases, an operator is called on to manually switch various live
sources directly on air in real time. The router shortcuts allow named sources to be instantly
available and can be used during a breakaway, instead of or in combination with sequences.
ADC™ Air Client
• Router Shortcut Logging: This panel logs the time any routers shortcut is selected. This
provides the operator with a visible record of manual actions, in addition to events on the
list and the As Run.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation ADC FlexSync
ADC FlexSync
About the Air Client ADC FlexSync Option
ADC FlexSync™ is an enhancement to the ADC Air Client that provides a powerful, yet operationally
simple means of duplicating the events and actions of one Transmission List on another Transmission
List. While not an automatic process, ADC FlexSync provides tremendous operational flexibility, allowing
any combination of independent and duplicated operations. The user is provided with a dedicated
duplication control panel with status for both lists, including the last time a duplication was performed,
and if any edits have since been applied to either list. At any time, the user can duplicate a list’s events
(with an option to apply time synchronization) while allowing lists to operate independently and
avoiding the inadvertent replication of operational errors that may occur on either of the lists. ADC
FlexSync also provides action-by-action manual control of either or both of the lists.
ADC FlexSync is not limited to any particular utilization, deployment, or workflow. Rather, it is general
purpose functionality that can be used to support multiple operational requirements.
Purchase Note: ADC FlexSync is a for-purchase option to Air Client. Contact your Automation Sales
representative for more information.
For details reference the ADC FlexSync™ Reference document.
Implementation
In an ADC system, Transmission Lists operate within a Device Server. These lists control devices and
provide the actual execution of the playout. Once an Air Client is connected to the Device Server(s), the
Transmission Lists are accessible via its user interface. When ADC FlexSync is installed on an Air Client, a
relationship between any two lists can be defined in which one is designated as the Normal (source) list
and the other as the Duplicate (destination) list. These List Duplication Pairs are defined in advance and
have no effect on operation until utilized.
Normal
List Duplicate
List
List A List B
List List
Air Client
Transmission
List Transmission
List
List List
Device Server A Device Server B
Deployment and Workflows

The ability to duplicate lists as needed provides a solution for numerous operational models and
scenarios. The following are some of the many different operations the ADC FlexSync™ option can
support.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation ADC FlexSync
• Duplication of Lists Between ADC Systems: ADC FlexSync™ can provide List Duplication between
independent ADC systems. These systems may be located at the same or separate sites and the Air
Client on which ADC Flex Sync is installed can be located at any location where it can maintain a
network API connection to both systems.
• Maintaining a Backup Device Server: In a simple Main \ Backup Device Server pair scenario, ADC
FlexSync™ can easily maintain a list on the backup. In this case, devices would not be available on
the backup Device Server, so the lists would not execute on the backup system, unless the ‘Missing
Media Switch-Only’ were used. However, duplicating lists to reflect day of air changes, as well as the
progress of the schedule, provides significant operational advantages if a switch to the backup is
required- with no additional resource requirements.
• N to 1 Site or System Backup: In a single aggregated backup system scenario providing backup or
disaster recovery for multiple Normal systems, ADC FlexSync™ can provide arbitrary mapping
between any two lists.
• N + 1 Site or System Backup: With a single set of backup resources - both the Duplicate List and its
device resources - ADC FlexSync™ can be used to provide backup for multiple Normal Lists on an as-
needed basis. While this approach does not provide continuous redundancy, it can be used to
provide a significant measure of protection without excessive resource requirements.
• Peer-to-Peer Site or System Backup: Where multiple ADC systems exist, instead of providing an
additional ADC system and resources dedicated to backup, ADC FlexSync™ can be used to expand
the existing on-air systems to provide mutual redundancy.
• N + 1 List Backup: In supporting List Duplication between multiple lists on the same Device Server,
ADC FlexSync™ can be used to provide both redundancy and operational flexibility.
• Disaster Recovery: For disaster recovery site deployments ADC FlexSync™ allows simple and rapid
transfer of operation to an alternate location should circumstances require.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation LinkList
LinkList
About LinkList
Many broadcasters already are or soon will be faced with the need to originate multiple feeds from a
single location.
While some feeds might be similar, there may be a requirement to ‘breakaway’ from the primary feed
and insert region-specific spots or to provide dual feeds of standard and high definition material.
Air Client’s LinkList option is an automated solution to this challenge. It provides operators with an easy
means of creating different playlists for a number of feeds --- each playlist slightly different from the
other.
LinkList allows playlists to be linked together and controlled from a single master playlist. Once playlists
are linked, changes made to the master playlist in content or event order are "mirrored" by linked lists,
ensuring that all associated events are synchronized.
Link List also supports multiple master lists within the Link List configuration. This allows Link List to have
a wider operational scope and is beneficial for multi-station groups that want to utilize Link List to
provide for targeted commercial insertion.
Purchase Note: ADC LinkList is a for-purchase option to Air Client. Contact your Automation Sales
representative for more information.
Reference Note: For information on the operation and configuration of this feature see the ADC LinkList
Reference document.
Note: List Redundancy and LinkList can coexist on the same ADC system, but not use the same lists.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Air Client Installation
Air Client Installation

Client Notes
Air Client / Media Client for Device Server v11 and Device Server v12 have been merged into single Air
Client and Media Client streams. Starting from Device Server release v12.16, Air Client/Media Client
v4.16 are compatible with both the v11.59 and v12.16 –v12.20 of Device Server software.
For more details, please contact Automation Technical Support. Also reference the Media Client
Operations and Install Reference and the Air Client Operations and Install Reference.
About v11 Client Validation

Version 4.20 was the last release where the Air Client and Media Client applications were tested with
Device Server version 11. This means that the 4.21 clients were only validated with Device Server
version 12.21, Air Client 4.20.23, and Media Client 4.20.20 were tested with Device Server version
11.61.4.
Rev-Lock Condition with version 12.21/4.21 release

Implementation of enhancement 76797 (Redesign of the List locking mechanism) in Device Server
v21.21 has resulted in a rev-lock condition. This requires all software be updated to 12.21/4.21 or higher
release levels when upgrading or installing ADC system software.
• Third-party applications with lock mechanism based on zero Done Count can maintain this
mechanism as it is preserved in Device Server logic.
 Device Server v 12.21 supports list locking by zero done count (old mechanism, for 3rd party
apps) and by API commands ListLockList, ListUnlockList (new mechanism).
 Air Client v 4.21 uses only new API commands and doesn't use zero done count.
 For details see enhancement 76797 in Device Server v21.21.19 Release Notes.
Start up Switches
The–v12 switches are needed only on start up, for the first Device Server the client connects to. After
that, the operator can use MultiServer login to connect to any Device Server.
• - /v12 or -v12 is optional in shortcut for the Air Client /Media Client connecting to the Device Server
v12. This is the first Device Server it connects to.
MutiServer login Note: MultiServer login allows connection to Device Servers of different versions from
the same client at the same time. The operator must manually choose the type of server to be
connected and the name.
ADC™ Air Client
Network IP
Device Sever v12 uses IPv6. Ensure IPV6 is properly enabled on the Client PC. Its connection information
is obtained automatically
Upgrade Note
When upgrading from an ADC v11 to ADCv12 system or when implementing a new ADC v12 system, the
proper Database scripts must be used to create the database (if it is a new ADC v12 system) or to
expand the database fields (if upgrading from an existing ADC v11 system). Failure to do this will result
in the ADC database not working. Contact Automation Support for details.
To Install Air Client on a Workstation

This section describes how to install the Air Client on a client workstation using the Installation Wizard.
If installing a new version of Air Client over an existing version: Before installing, reboot the computer.
Do not run Air Client on this station after rebooting and before installing the new version. If this is not
done, the installation may not complete successfully, and may have to be restarted.
1. Run the Installation Wizard (AirClientInstall.exe).
2. Read the Welcome dialog. When ready to continue press Next.
3. On the License dialog the Read and accept the license, and then press Next.
4. On the Setup Type dialog select the setup type for traffic AsRun and schedule formats:
5. On the Server Name and Destination dialog specify the following:
 Options are:
• Enterprise (Default): This is the most typical selection.
• Sony
 When ready to continue press Next.
6. On the Installation Confirmation dialog, click Install. The application is installed.
 Installation Path: Accept the default or - if you like - press Browse to change the directory into
which the application program files will be installed.
 Client Name: This is the name of the client workstation the application is being installed on.
 Server Name: This is the name of the primary Device Server the application will first connect to.
 When ready to continue press Next.
7. On the Completion dialog, click Finish to complete the installation.
ADC™ Air Client
Managing the Desktop Shortcut for Air Client

The Air Client shortcut icon is used to launch the Air Client application from an icon on the desktop.
Before launching Air Client, create a shortcut and specify parameters in the shortcut target, such as the
file path to the application, the client name, and the Device Server name.
Other parameters that can be specified include:
 the backup Device Server name.
 the maximum length of a material’s name.
 the maximum length of a material’s title.
 the platform the Device Server is running on.
Format: <Path> <Client Name> <Device Server name> <Backup Device Server name> <Max ID
Length> <Max Title Length> <DS Platform>
Example: The following is provided to illustrate the basic path and parameter structure. (Your paths
and file names may appear different.)
Limitations:
 Ensure the MAIN and BACKUP Device Servers are configured identically in terms of devices and
assignments. It is expected a Main/Backup configuration is to be used with a serial transfer
switch to move devices from the MAIN Device Server to the BACKUP Device Server.
 Do not configure both main/backup Device Servers in the shortcut and the multiserver login at
the same time (on a per client basis) as it can cause issues with prep form displays during
ADC™ Air Client
 Configuring main/backup Device Servers in the client shortcut is not dependent on Multiserver
login feature.
To Manage the shortcut on the Desktop

1. Open My Computer on desktop.
2. Open Local Disk (C:).
3. Open Air Client folder.
4. Right mouse click and hold on the Air Client .exe file and drag to the desktop.
5. Select Create Shortcut(s) here.
6. Define the shortcut properties by right clicking on the icon and selecting Properties.
7. Click the Shortcut tab. The Target: field should contain a path following this format:
[file path] [client name] [server name] [backup name] {material ID length} {material title length}
{platform}
Modify the entries as required:
Note: Remember to include a "space" between the entries.
IMPORTANT: All clients connecting to the same Database and Device Server's in a facility should be
configured the same: IDLEN=32 TITLELEN=32.
 [file path]: The file path of the Air Client application is the path the shortcut follows to launch Air
Client. This is defined for you when you create a shortcut.
 [client name]: Specify the name of the client, using no more than eight characters. Each client
must have a unique name on the network. For example: ACLIENT1.
The client name should be the same as the PC’s name just without the – hyphen. For example:
"PC windows login = ACLIENT-1, session login for Client Application = ACLIENT1
 [server name]: Specify the name of the server to connect to when launching. For example:
MAIN_DS.
Air Client Stand Alone Mode: To run the standard Air Client as a stand alone Air Client remove
the Device Server switch in the short cut’s command line.
 [backup name]: Specify a backup server to connect to in the event the main server fails. For
example: BACKUP_DS
IMPORTANT Multi-Server Logon Note: With multiple server login the backup server name is not
needed on the shortcut command line.
 {material ID length}: Use the idlen parameter to specify the maximum number of characters (up
to 32) the ID can contain. For example, Idlen=32.
 {material title length}: Use the titlelen parameter to specify the maximum number of characters
(up to 32) for the material title. For example: Titlelen=32.
ADC™ Air Client
{platform}: If the server you are connecting to runs Microsoft Windows NT, enter /nt or \nt.
• Enter /nt to enable long device and playlist names.
• Air Client's 'List Names' functionality requires absence of '/nt' in the command line
parameters on the application’s desktop shortcut.
Without /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Air Client.
With /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Device Server.
 –v12 switches are needed only on start up for the first Device Server the client connects to.
After that, the operator can use MultiServer login to connect to any Device Server.
• /v12 or -v12 is optional in shortcut for the Air Client /Media Client connecting to the Device
Server v12. This is the first Device Server it connects to.
ODBC Connections and Networking

For information on configuring automation Client Computers for ODBC connectivity to SQL Server 2012,
see ADC_SQL_Server_2012_Installation_Guide.
For information on system networking, see ADC_Networking_Best_Practices.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Configuring System Components
Configuring System Components

Configuring Multiple Device Server
Connections
Air Client can be configured to connect to up to eight device servers on the network. See Getting
Started: Managing Server Connections (see "Managing Server / MultiServer Connections" on page 44)
for setup details.
Note: Multiple server login (multiserver login) is only available to customers who have purchased it.
Clients supporting this feature will have a Servers option on the Air Client desktop.
Limitations:
• Ensure the MAIN and BACKUP Device Servers are configured identically in terms of devices and
assignments. It is expected a Main/Backup configuration is to be used with a serial transfer switch to
move devices from the MAIN Device Server to the BACKUP Device Server.
• Do not configure both main/backup Device Servers in the shortcut and the multiserver login at the
same time (on a per client basis) as it can cause issues with prep form displays during
• Configuring main/backup Device Servers in the client shortcut is not dependent on Multiserver login
feature.
Configuring List Options

1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the View List Icon ( ). The Choose List dialog is displayed
ADC™ Air Client
2. Choose the desired List, and then click OK. A playlist window is opened.
3. Right click on the playlist window and from the pop-up menu select Options…. The Play Options
4. Select the Counts tab. Use this tab to specify the lookahead value for a transmission list and the
display of done events in a playlist.
Configure the following parameters as required:

 About Minimum Difference between Values: The minimum Look Ahead value is 11 and the
minimum difference between the Look Ahead and Done Count values must be more than 1.
 Look Ahead: Enter the number of events in the lookahead field to define a playlist’s lookahead
range. The lookahead is the number of events whose media Air Client will verify the availability
of in a playlist. Events within the lookahead range will display in blue if they are primary events
and are located on the specified device. Events out of range display in black. If an event is within
the lookahead range, but is missing media, it will display in red. Setting the lookahead for the
entire list uses more system resources.
This value is configured as per the customer’s request. If a duration based look ahead is
configured (Done in NTConfig only) than this field is not used. *Typically between 50-250 events.
If GMT is used this value may be lower.
 Done Count: Determine the number of done events that display in a playlist. The Done count
should not exceed the Lookahead value. This value is configured as per the customer’s request.
Default should be 4. Maximum is 20.
Note on List Lock: If a list is experiencing a List Lock, the List Lock is not cleared, and it has been
ensured that no other client or process is modifying the list, then the Done Count can be set to a
value of 2 or greater in this list's Options > Counts configuration tab.
ADC™ Air Client
5. Select the Times tab. Use this tab to specify parameters for start times for certain kinds of events.

 Timed List: Check to enable. When enabled, this parameter allows Hard Start events to run at
predetermined time in the Time field. This must be enabled when using Hard Timed events.
 Update On-Air Time: Check to enable. When Auto Ripple is turned on the actual start time of an
event will update the Time field so the AsRun log reflects the accurate time. Auto Ripple allows
this feature to work correctly.
 Auto Ripple Times: Check to enable. When you change the duration of an event, the projected
start time for the events that follow are automatically changed based on the durations for each
event. Auto Ripple will ripple the times down from the On-Air event down to the next Hard Start
or to the end of the list.
• Deleting or adding events to a playlist will cause the playlist start times to be recalculated.
• Auto rippling will stop at a hard start event.
• Hard start events will interrupt any preceding events whose times overlap its time.
6. Select the Threading tab. Use this tab to control threading behavior.
ADC™ Air Client
 Thread After Break: Check to enable threading events immediately following a secondary Break
line. You will not have to manually thread events after the Break line if this is selected. Breaks
are only used when the automation is playing spots and not program material.
 Keep List Threaded: Check to enable keeping as many devices as possible threaded in the
lookahead. If an event is inserted into a playlist, the event is cued and subsequent events are
unthreaded, as necessary.
Note: When unchecked, events in the range specified in the Thread Time: field are cued.
 Thread Time: (Default: 00:02:00:00) Keep List Thread time determines which events within the
specified time get threaded and cued. * This applies when Keep List Threaded option is not
selected.
Entering a value of two minutes in the Thread Time: field, for example, will cue events that will
play within two minutes of the current time.
7. Select the Tensioning tab. Use this tab to control tensioning.

 Release Tension When Cued: Check to enable. After a VTR event is cued, the tape is tension
released. The tape is tensioned when the event reaches the Standby On Time.
 Tension After Up Counter: Check to enable keeping the following VTR event ready to play when
playing out of the Live event.
About Tension Events:
• Tension events following an upcount event assume a fixed duration for the upcount event,
instead of an indefinite duration. All events within the Standby On time that follow the
upcount event are tensioned on. This is used for live broadcasts when the duration is
known.
• Otherwise, the events are tension released and the next event must be tensioned on
manually by clicking the Ready button on the control panel.
ADC™ Air Client
8. Select the Skip Control tab. Use this tab to determine how certain events are skipped.

 Skip Bad Events: Check to enable to skip missing events. The list will skip missing (red) events in
the list and, no matter what setting is specified for ‘Switch to Black’ or ‘Station ID on Skip’, it will
NOT switch to another source during the transition.
• If one primary event or two consecutive primary events are missing in the list, the list skips
them and continues running.
• If there are 3 consecutive primary events missing in the list, the list will stop.
 Station ID On Skip: When enabled, the pre-defined input (switcher configuration) is shown
ONLY when a GOOD event that is running is skipped using the hardware control panel or the
software control panel and that input will be switched only during the preroll of the next event.
This setting will override the ‘Switch to Black’ option.
9. Select the Misc. tab. Use this tab to configure miscellaneous options which apply to playlist behavior
in a transmission list window.

 Switch To Black: Check to enable. Allows automation to automatically switch to the pre-defined
input (switcher configuration) ONLY when the list stops.
ADC™ Air Client
If the customer is to use ‘Station ID on Skip’, do not select this option.

 Play Hard Hits: Check to enable. This allows the operator to manually play a Hard Start event at
a time other than its pre-designated time.
If this is not set, the operator cannot play an event that has a hard start if the playlist has
stopped running.
 Contact Start: Check to enable. To trigger an event on the Playlist with a General Purpose
Interface (GPI) contact, click the Contact Start button. Pressing a contact is equivalent to clicking
the Play button on the control panel.
Note: This parameter is usually not turned on unless customer is using GPI’s to trigger events on
the Playlist.
 Auto A-B Routing: Check to enable alternate primary event’s switcher routing between the A
and B input channels. When enabled, you can use the wipe, mix and mixed transition effects on
two consecutive primary events. Otherwise attempting to do so would cause the transmission of
black when the switch occurs.
Note: This parameter is typically disabled (unchecked).
 Play ID Time Mismatches: Check to enable. When enabled and a Playlist is appended, any
events that mismatch the record in an LMS database environment will play as per what the
original traffic log dictated.
 ID Title mismatch checks ID title pairs from the transmission list against the database and
cassette in a cart machine. Normally, the ID and titles on the transmission list match the
database and cassette and no errors are generated by the system when a list is loaded.
Note: This feature is only supported for customers using the Sony LMS database environment
and requires the use of a tape preparation database product, such as Media Client.
10. Select the Security tab. Use this tab to configure security and list confirmations for any modification
of a Play List.

 Link to Recycle Bin: Check to enable. When the Air Client software user deletes one or several
events from the "Transmission list", if the "Link to Recycle Bin" option of the "Transmission list"
is checked, those events are written into the "RECYCLE.lst" file.
ADC™ Air Client
 Confirm event edition (Revise): Enable the Confirmations for the edition done with Revise
(Revise, Insert Primary / Secondary in the corresponding List. Disables the possibility to insert
while in Revise mode.
When this option is enabled (checked), each time and operator toggles Revise-off for any event
(i.e. leaves edit mode), a confirmation message is displayed.
The operator can choose to:
• Click Apply to apply the event modifications.
• Click Find Next to locate the next event.
• Click Cancel to abort the operation.
 Confirm list modification (del/cut. Insert, update, move): Enable the Confirmations for the
edition done without Revise in the corresponding List. When this option is enabled (checked),
each time and operator modifies a list (i.e. inserts / cuts / deletes / modifies / moves an event),
a message similar to the following is displayed.
• Click Apply to apply the event modifications.
• Click Find Next to locate the next event.
• Click Cancel to abort the operation.
 "Fast Find and Apply" function: When enabled (checked), this option allows the operator to find
the occurrences of the concerned Primary event, and easily apply the modification to them (2
key presses), and allows a very fast check of the modification for each occurrence of the
corresponding Primary event.
If not enabled (unchecked), the Cancel/Close button is always pre-selected after the use of Find
Next Prim or Apply buttons.
• Click Apply (or press the Return or Space key on the keyboard) to apply the event
modifications. (Find Next Primary button is pre-selected for next action.)
• Click Find Next Prim to locate the next primary event. (Apply button is pre-selected for next
action.)
• Click Cancel/Close to abort the operation.
Fast Find Active / Inactive Windows:
• The Fast Find mechanism applies for the confirmation windows:
Modify Primary …
Del/Cut Primary …
Insert before Primary …
Del/Cut Secondary … of Primary …
Insert Secondary … under Primary …
• The Fast Find mechanism does not apply for the following confirmation windows. For these
windows the Cancel/Close button is pre-selected and the Find Next button is grayed out.
Modify Secondary … of Primary …
Del/Cut events (bloc) … to …
Move events (bloc) … to … before Primary …
Update Event … against Database,
Update List against Database,
ADC™ Air Client
Ripple Time from event …,

Clear Done Events n°… to n°…,
Replace event … with … .
 Delay from Air warning: Check to enable a delay from air warning of an event or list
modification. Once enabled, specify Delay Value and Polling Value.
• If the event or list modification focused in the confirmation window is at less than a
configurable delay from Air (list in Play), a red warning mentions: "In Forbidden Area!".
• This warning is dynamic: If the confirmation window is opened out of the Forbidden Area,
and still opened when entering in it, then the Warning appears. This notification does not
have to be "frame accurate".
• The verification of the delay from Air can be done each 5 seconds (to be sure to be warned
at 30 seconds from air the delay value must be configured to 35 seconds).
 Delay Value: Active when Delay from Air warning is selected. Specify the delay period in
hh:mm:ss from Air to trigger the Warning. (Minimum: 1 second, Default: 00:05:00)
 Polling Value: Active when Delay from Air warning is selected. Specify the polling period in
seconds of the frequency checking if in "Forbidden Area" when a Confirmation window is
opened. (Minimum: 1 second, Default: 5)
 Log List Edition: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) logging of any edition in the List.
This option works in conjunction with Operation Log functionality. To make this parameter
active on the corresponding List, enable Edition on the Properties > Operation Log configuration
window.
 Log List Control: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) logging of any Control action in the List.
This option works in conjunction with Operation Log functionality. To make this parameter
active on the corresponding List, enable List Control on the Properties > Operation Log
configuration window.
 Albrecht VPS Options: The following options are only displayed when the VPS.bin file is present
in the Air Client installation directory.
• Use Albrecht VPS Title Editor: Check to use a customized editor for the title of events for
the Albrecht VPS device. This editor provides selection of values, validates inputs, and
formats the title in the required fashion for this driver.
• Allow non-title field edits: Check to allow non-title fields of events to be edited. Leave
unchecked to prevent changes being made to these fields.
• Allow non-VPS field edits: Check to allow the user to edit fields of events other than those
for the Albrecht VPS device. Leave unchecked to prevent changes being made to events for
devices other than the Albrecht VPS.
VPS Note: A VPS.BIN file is required to enable this functionality. Those customers who have
purchased the Albrecht functionality, please contact Automation Support for the VPN.BIN file.
Ensure the VPS.BIN file is placed in the Air Client installation directory (i.e. the same directory as
the aclnt32.exe file).
ADC™ Air Client
Configuring Window Column Settings

1. Open a playlist window (View, New, etc.), or a Database window.
2. Right click on the window and from the pop-up menu select Columns…. The Column setting… dialog
is displayed.
3. Assign columns: Use arrow keys to move options from Available pane to Displayed pane. Use the
move keys to select (>, >>) and deselect (<, <<) entries.
• >: Move a single entry from Available pane to Displayed pane
• >>: Move all entries from Available pane to Displayed pane
• <: Move a single entry from Displayed pane back to Available pane
• <<: Move all entries from Displayed pane back to Available pane
1. To set or reset a column width:
 Ensure the column is listed in the Displayed columns pane. Column width can only be edited
when a column is in this pane.
 Select the entry in the Displayed columns pane, and then enter a new value in the Width field.
You can also use the spin arrows to increment or decrement the entry. (Recommended: Accept
the default settings.)
2. To order columns, select an entry in the Displayed columns pane, and then
 Click the Up button to move the entry up in the list
 Click the Down button to move the entry down in the list
3. (Option) To Edit Column Settings
ADC™ Air Client
 Ensure the column is listed in the Available columns pane. Column settings can only be edited
when a column is in this pane.
 Click Edit. The Column setting dialog for that column is displayed.
 Use the down arrow to select from a list of alternate parameter settings, and the click OK. (The
list of available parameters settings is different for each column.)
4. (Option) To Add a Column:
 Click Add
 Enter a name in the Column Name… dialog and then press OK. The new column name appears in
the Available columns pane.
 You can now:

• Set column width. See step 5.
• Specify column settings for the new column. See Step 7.
• Rename the column. Click Rename and in the name dialog specify a different name. This
action is only available for a newly added column.
5. (Option) To Remove a Column
 Ensure the column is listed in the Available columns pane. Column entries can only be removed
when the column is in this pane.
 Click Remove.
 The system prompts for confirmation of the action. Click OK. The Column is removed.
ADC™ Air Client
6. (Option) To save and reuse the new column organization/entries as a template, see Managing
Column Templates (on page 227) for details.
Managing Column Templates

Operators can create a customer-specifiable default columns template that can be recalled as required,
thus making configuration of the Air Client easier and quicker. For customers upgrading multiple Air
Clients this approach is especially useful as they are able to create a template based on one list and
optionally apply that template to all lists on all Air Clients.
To Save a Column Template

1. Configure the Windows Columns settings as required. (For details see Configuring Window Column
Settings (on page 225).
2. Once window column organization/entries are configured on the dialog, the operator can choose
how to save and work with the settings as a template.
3. To save the current configuration as a template:

 Click Export. The Export Column template screen is displayed.
 Browse to the desired location, specify a file name, and then click OK. The file is saved to the
specified location.
ADC™ Air Client
4. To import a previously saved column configuration template:

 Click Import. The Import Column template screen is displayed.
 Browse to the location of the desired template file, select the file, and then click OK.
5. To reset all settings of the current list to default settings:
 Click Reset to Factory Defaults.
 A Confirmation message is displayed. Click OK to accept.
6. To apply the current configuration /specified template to all existing configurations for all lists (i.e.
overwrite all configurations):
 Click Apply to All.
To Apply a Column Template or Reset to Default Settings

1. Launch Air Client.
2. Select Properties->Environment-> Default List Columns.
3. Choose the parameters to use as required

 Import Template- Apply template to all Transmission Lists: Browse to a previously saved
column configuration template file. Select a template and click OK. The designated template is
applied to all existing List configurations.
 Factory Defaults- Apply template to all Transmission Lists: Click this option to reset all settings
of all transmission lists to default settings.
Configuring Window Font Settings

1. Open a playlist window (View, New, etc.), or a Database window.
ADC™ Air Client
2. Right click on the window and from the pop-up menu select Fonts…. The Font setting… dialog is
displayed.
3. Configure the following parameters as required: Font style, Size, and Color.
Configuring Event and Window Parameter

Colors
Use this procedure Air Client set color displayed for events, cells, and rows. It provides the ability to:
• Add more event color options that reflect the status of the primary event color differences for -
media / no metadata, metadata / no media, metadata / media but not QC'ed, media / yesterday's
metadata
• Verify other elements needed for correct on-air playout (IE Captioning Files)
• Color code primaries based on type (IE Commercial, Promo, Movie, etc)
The ability to assign colors supports operational situations where the user needs to be able to quickly
ascertain the type of content that a primary event represents. This capability can be used to distinguish
different types of program content (IE movie, sport, drama, news) or different types of interstitial
content (IE commercial, promo, PSA, political).
The primary reason of this more granular methodology to event identification is to:
• Allow users to differentiate between paid advertisements, promotional content and political
content so that, inadvertently, paid commercial content is not removed from the schedule.
• Allow the events that comprise the playlist to be more easily identified as transitions from
programming to interstitial elements will be more clearly visible.
Enhanced Color Codes

With Air Client v4.18 and higher this capability has been expanded to add more event color options that
reflect the status of the primary event color differences for - media / no metadata, metadata / no
media, metadata / media but not QC'ed, media / yesterday's metadata, etc.. This enhanced functionality
ADC™ Air Client
requires using the Content Menu configuration functionality added to Media Client v4.18 and higher,
and implementation of a new script (ASDB_Add_Column.sql) for the Automation Database.
• Single Spot Support: Air Client v4.18 and higher expanded the color states that can be displayed in
Air Client for single spot events.
• Multi-segment Support: Air Client v4.19 and higher expands this function to support multi-
segments. All segments in a multi-seg record will have the same content attribute as it is not
possible to set the content attribute for each segment individually.
These descriptors are visible on the playlist and serve as markers for the enhanced color codes. The
enhanced color codes override the existing color values as a program (event with segments) that
also carries the movie marker would have a different color from a program with no category marker.
Note: Multi-Spot is not supported.
To specify Event Colors

Use the following procedure to configure event, cell, and row colors.
1. Open a playlist window (View, New, etc.).
2. Right click on the playlist window and from the pop-up menu select Colors…. The Select Colors
setting… dialog is displayed. This dialog allows a user to specify display colors for specific content in
a playlist.
3. Select the Event Colors tab to change the event’s colors.

 From the Event Type list pane choose an event type
 Change the following colors for the selected event type as required:
• Foreground: Set foreground color
• Background: Set background color
• Set Default: Set colors to default
 When specifying an event foreground or background color, select a new color from the color
palette.
ADC™ Air Client
• Select the down arrow ( ) to choose from a list of colors.
• Select the "…" ( ) button beside each dropdown arrow to select from a standard color
pallet selection. (Option: Click "Define Custom Colors >>" to display an expanded standard
Color palette.)
ADC™ Air Client
4. Select the Select Colors tab to change the default selection colors.

 From the Selection Type list pane choose a selection type.
 Change the following colors for the selected event type as required:
• Background: Set background color
• Set Default: Set colors to default
 When specifying a background color, select a new color from the color palette.
• Select the down arrow ( ) to choose from a list of colors.
ADC™ Air Client
• Select the "…" ( ) button beside each dropdown arrow to select from a standard color
pallet selection. (Option: Click "Define Custom Colors >>" to display an expanded standard
Color palette.)
Managing Color Templates

Operators can create a customer-specifiable default color template that can be recalled as required,
thus making configuration of the Air Client easier and quicker. For customers upgrading multiple Air
Clients this approach is especially useful as they are able to create a template based on one list and
optionally apply that template to all lists on all Air Clients.
To Save a Color Template

1. Configure the Windows Parameter Colors settings as required. (For details see Configuring Window
Parameter Colors (see "Configuring Event and Window Parameter Colors" on page 229).
ADC™ Air Client
2. Once window parameter colors (Event Colors tab and Select Colors tab) are configured on the Select
Colors dialog, the operator can choose how to save and work with the settings as a template.
3. To save the current configuration as a template:

 Click Export. The Export Column template screen is displayed.
 Browse to the desired location, specify a file name, and then click OK. The file is saved to the
specified location.
4. To import a previously saved column configuration template:
 Click Import. The Import Color template screen is displayed.
 Browse to the location of the desired template file, select the file, and then click OK.
5. To set all settings of the current list to factory default settings:
 Click Factory Defaults.
6. To reset all settings of the current list to default settings:
 Click Reset to Defaults.
ADC™ Air Client
7. To save the new color organization as the Default template for use with the current configuration
and as a template for all lists not configured yet:
 Click Use as Default.
 The system warns the action will overwrite the existing template. Click OK to accept.
To Manage Colors and Apply Across all Transmission Lists

1. Launch Air Client.
2. Select Properties->Environment-> Default Event Colors.

 Edit Default Color Setting: Click to launch the Default Grid Colors settings dialog. Use this dialog
to set event and cell colors. For details see To specify Event Colors (on page 230).
 Apply Default to All: When selected the application discards all custom settings are reapplies
default settings to all lists.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Configuring System Properties
Configuring System Properties

Environment Properties
Use this procedure to configure the following environment properties: List Options, System Directory
Paths, List Directory Paths, Device Status Colors, Device Storage Colors, and Cell Colors.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Environment… icon ( ). This opens the Environment
Options dialog.
2. Select the List Directories tab. Use this tab to specify directory paths for: Playlist, Compile List, and
Sectional List.
 Click the down arrows to select an entry from dropdown lists, OR Click the browse button (…) to
search for available paths.
 On a typical installation, the file paths are set as follows:
• Play List: E:\PLAYLIST
• Compile List: E:\COMPLIST
• Sectional List: E:\SECLIST
3. Select the System Directories tab. Use this tab to specify system directory paths for: Database, Text
Files, Traffic Log, and Mismatched Files.
 Click the down arrows to select an entry from dropdown lists, OR Click the browse button (…) to
search for appropriate file paths.
 On a typical installation, the file paths are set as follows:
• Database: D:\
• Text Files: E:\ASRUN\
ADC™ Air Client
• Traffic Log: E:\TRAFFIC\

• Mismatched Files: E:\MISMATCH\
• File Server Path: E:\SERVER\
4. Select the List Options tab. Use this tab to configure how a playlist processes field information when
an ID is entered or a list is loaded or validated. This is where Automatic Event Validation can be set
up.
Configure / select the following options as required:

 Adjust Durations When SOM Changes. This option adjusts the duration of an event according to
changes made to an event’s SOM. If the SOM is increased, the duration is decreased by an equal
amount, for example. Or, if the SOM is decreased, the duration is increased by an equal amount.
This ensures that the event will not play beyond its EOM time.
ADC™ Air Client
IMPORTANT: For this parameter to work correctly, ensure Device Server Clocking parameter:
Round DF is set to off: (Configuration Tool-> Configured Devices-> File menu in Configured
Devices-> Clock-> Set Source-PC: PC Clock; Round DF: OFF.)
 Update Events with Valid SOMs. This option changes all events’ SOMs according to their
records in the database when they are entered into a playlist. It will overwrite any events’
specified SOMs that differ from their database records. Optionally, events without specified
SOMs can be assigned SOMs according to their records in the database by clicking Verify List
Against DB on the Events ribbon tab. To verify one event, or a range of events, select the event
and click Verify Event Against DB on the Events ribbon tab.
 Check IDs Against Valid ID List. When checked, an ID entered into a playlist not located in the
database will be checked against the Valid IDs list. Otherwise, an error dialog box opens when
an ID is entered but not found in the Valid ID list if the Notify When ID Not Found option is
enabled.
 Use List Durations. When this option is enabled (checked), Air Client uses the durations of
events in the playlist, not the database. When this option is disabled (unchecked), durations
specified in the database are used.
Normally when a list is loaded, appended, or inserted, each event’s ID is checked against the
database and if it is found, the event metadata is updated. However, with "Use List Durations"
enabled, any non-null durations present in the playlist are retained; they are not updated from
the database as some of these events could intentionally have durations that (may) differ from
the database duration of their ID.
Note: The "Verify copy against DB" option and the "Use List Durations" options are mutually
exclusive. (i.e. They cannot both be enabled; it’s either on or the other.) Normally when a list is
loaded, appended, or inserted, if Use List Durations is enabled, each event’s ID is checked
against the database and if it is found, the event metadata is updated. In this case Verify Copy
Against Database will be disabled so any copied/pasted event will keep the "List Duration".
 Title Mismatch. Title mismatch occurs if the value of an event’s title field does not match the
event’s record in the database. If Title Mismatch option is enabled, a title mismatch file will be
created anytime list is loaded or appended to Transmission List and title mismatch occurs. A title
mismatch file is a list of IDs whose titles in the playlist differ from those in the database.
 Duration Mismatch. When checked, the system will create a Duration Mismatch file listing
events that have a duration that does not match the ID’s duration in the database within the
specified number of frames as specified in the Max. Frame Difference field. The Max. Frame
Difference field is displayed when the Duration Mismatch option is checked.
 Allow Secondary Event Hiding. This allows the user to use the option of Secondary Event Hiding
in the right click Playlist Options menu.
 Use GMT Pull List. The GMT Pull List option allows to list in the Pull List only the clips missing in
the devices assigned to the List and not in a GMT source device usable for this List.
 Maximum Frame Difference. (This option is displayed when Duration Mismatch is checked.) If
the difference between an event’s Dur time and its record’s Dur time exceeds the frame value
specified in the Max. frame difference: field, the event will be logged in the mismatch file.
 Clear Reconciliation Keys on Edit. When this option is checked, editing events will remove the
reconciliation key, if any, from those that have been edited to change the ID.
 Clear Reconciliation Keys on Copy. When this option is checked, copying events will remove the
reconciliation key, if any, from those that have been copied.
ADC™ Air Client
 Clear Fields When ID Not Found. Select this option to clear the title and SOM fields when an ID
is entered but not found in either the database. The duration will default to 30 seconds. This
prevents events from containing the wrong SOMs and DURs when an event’s ID is edited and is
not found in the database. Otherwise, when an ID is changed and does not match an ID in the
database, the fields do not clear.
 Notify When Database Fails. When an ID cannot be verified in the database because of a
database failure, use this option so Air Client will notify you.
 Notify When ID Not Found. When checked, a dialog box will alert you when an event ID entered
into a playlist is not found in the database or the Valid IDs list.
 Use List Titles. This option uses the titles of events from a traffic list instead of the database
when loaded into a playlist. If this option is not checked, titles listed in the database are used.
 Warn On Edit of Playing Event. If this option is checked, editing an event that is playing results
in a dialog box notifying you that the event is playing.
 Retain Segment Numbers. When a single spot event is inserted in a playlist with a specified
segment number, the segment number is removed. To disable this, select this option to retain
the segment number.
 Auto Focus Event Centered. During on air play back the user can jump back to the on air event if
the list is scrolled down further on the playlist. It will also allow the on air event to be centered
in the list with the done events above in the window.
 Verify copy against DB. When this option is enabled (checked), an event that is copied and
pasted to another location in the playlist or into another playlist will be verified for accuracy
against the database. If they differ, the event metadata is updated to match the database.
Normally when a list is loaded, appended, or inserted, each event’s ID is checked against the
database and if it is found, the event metadata is updated.
Note: The "Verify copy against DB" option and the "Use List Durations" options are mutually
exclusive. (i.e. They cannot both be enabled; it’s either on or the other.) Normally when a list is
loaded, appended, or inserted, if Verify Copy Against Database is enabled, each event’s ID is
checked against the database and if it is found, the event metadata is updated. In this case Use
List Durations will be disabled so any copied/pasted event will automatically validate its
metadata against the Database.
 Clear Reconciliation Keys on Cut. When this option is checked, cutting events will remove the
reconciliation key, if any, from those that have been cut.
 Verify Single Event against DB: When a single event is added to a playlist, it will be verified for
accuracy against the database.
When Verify Single Event Against DB is enabled and a Verify Event Against DB is performed, only
the highlighted Event is verified against the Database, and nothing is done to any other
instances of that Event on the List.
When Verify Single Event Against DB is not enabled and a Verify Event Against DB is performed,
the Air Client verifies all instances of that Event on the List against the Database.
 Audible Time To Next: Enable (check) this option to allow Air Client to emit the Audible Cues
through the sound card of the Air Client computer. This configuration saved to / load from the
Air Client’s .ini file.
With this option enabled an operator can specify event type Q (Audible Time to Next) in the
playlist ‘Type’ column. Audible Time to Next provides an audible countdown starting 30 seconds
from a commercial break into the next live event. To minimize its effect on existing functionality
‘N’ (Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an operator when letter ‘Q’ is entered.
ADC™ Air Client

5. Select the Status Colors tab.
 Select a device status (e.g. Normal, OnAir, Error).

 Select a color from the dropdown list or that selection.
ADC™ Air Client
6. Select the Storage Options tab.

 Display Free Disk Space: Check to enable the display of available free space.
 Allow Delete IDs from Storage Window: Check to enable delete of IDs.
 Enhanced title search: Enable (check) /Disable (uncheck) the enhanced title search option.
• When Disabled (unchecked) the title is verified in the database using the original search
process. (Default)
• When Enabled (checked) searching by title uses the enhanced process to improve search
speed.
CAUTION: In certain cases depending on the state of the database, there may be issues in
locating multi-file multi-segment titles.
IMPORTANT: The Enhanced Title Search is designed specifically for systems where video servers
assigned to transmission lists contain many IDs that are not in the Automation Database. (An
example of this is where the Production Server shares the same storage SAN as the Transmission
server. The Production server may have 80% of the IDs in the SAN, but these IDs are not in the
ADC Database. In this case, checking the Enhanced Title Search will improve search speeds
significantly.)
 To modify Storage Colors:
• Select a Storage status (e.g. Normal, InUse, Title Mismatch).
• Select a color from the dropdown list for that selection.
ADC™ Air Client
• When finished click OK.

7. Select the Cell Colors tab.
 To modify Cell Colors:

• Select a Cell status (e.g. Current Column, Selected Row, Default Background)
• Select a color from the dropdown list for that selection..
• When finished click OK.

8. Select the Mix/Wipe tab. This tab contains configuration options for mix and wipe support for
master control switchers. Events that include a mix or wipe transition are required to roll several
frames early to allow the events to overlap.
ADC™ Air Client
Note: A Wipe effect requires a Wipe number. Each brand of Master Control Switcher may have it
own set of Wipes. Each event can have its own wipe number. These are displayed and edited in
Effect Number # field in the playlist editors of the windows client. When the event is played the
Wipe number in the event is passed to the switcher when the Wipe transition is started. The Wipe
number is solely dependent on the Master Control Switcher being used and is not interpreted by the
automation as anything but a number.
Configure the following options as required:

 Enable Mix/Wipe Support.
Play Mixes/Wipes Early: (Default: disabled) Check to enable the system to roll overlapping
events early. It causes the list to pull back any events with the effect type of Mix, Wipe, or Mixed
Transition.
Note: Using this option will cause a playlist to end earlier than previously defined because
events will overlap. It is the client operator’s responsibility to reconcile this issue.
 Effect durations in frames: Set the frame values for slow, medium, and fast effect durations.
Effect durations are the amount of overlap time between the end of one spot and the beginning
of the next spot.
• Slow: Valid numbers are 0 to 999 frames. Default is 60 frames.
• Medium: Valid numbers are 0 to 999 frames. Default is 30 frames.
• Fast: Valid numbers are 0 to 999 frames. Default is 15 frames.
IMPORTANT: These parameters must match the effects durations configured in your master
control switcher. Failure to do so will result in mistimed effects.
ADC™ Air Client
9. Select the Secondary Events tab. This tab provides the ability to delete secondary events together
with their associated primary event.
Configure the following options as required:

 Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) the secondary events to delete when a primary event is
deleted. When all check-boxes are selected (checked), all secondary events associated with a
primary are deleted together with the associated primary.
 For Example: BREAK is disabled and others are enabled – all secondary events except BREAK
secondary event are deleted when associated primary is deleted from list.
For descriptions of all listed Secondary Events see, Appendix B: Secondary Events (see "Secondary
Events" on page 287).
ADC™ Air Client
10. Select Default Event Colors tab.

 Edit Default Color Setting: Click to launch the Default Grid Colors settings dialog. Use this dialog
to set event and cell colors. For details see Configuring Event and Window Parameter Colors (on
page 229).
 Apply Default to All: When selected the application discards all custom settings are reapplies
default settings to all lists.
11. Select Default List Columns tab.
Choose the parameters to use as required:
ADC™ Air Client
 Import Template- Apply template to all Transmission Lists: Browse to a previously saved
column configuration template file. Select a template and click OK. The designated template is
applied to all existing List configurations.
 Factory Defaults- Apply template to all Transmission Lists: Click this option to reset all settings
of all transmission lists to default settings.
AsRun log Properties

An AsRun log file stores event and status information, such as errors and reconciliation keys as a
transmission list window runs a playlist. Use this procedure to configure the AsRun log.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the AsRun logs... icon ( ). The Asruns dialog is displayed.
2. Click a transmission list for which you want to create and configure AsRun log reporting.
If there are no transmission lists available, click Add… to add a Playlist file. The Choose list dialog is
displayed listing all available lists.
ADC™ Air Client
Note: The Choose Server dialog box appears if your Air Client workstation supports multiple server
login.
3. On the Choose List dialog select a list and then click OK. The AsRun setup dialog is displayed.
4. Configure the following parameters as required. Check to enable the required Logging Option
parameters from the list of available options.
 Enable AsRun. To enable AsRun logging for a transmission list, click the Enable AsRun checkbox.
 Enable Printing: Check to enable. Allows you to print event and status information for each
event as it finishes play.
 Unique List Number. This option allows the list number at the start of the AsRun log file name to
be configured.
This field allows entry of up to a 3 digit list number.
The current 2 digit list number ("01" to "99") suffice for systems with up to 6 x Device Servers.
ADC™ Air Client
For larger installation of over 6 x Device Severs, a 3 digit list number ("100 to 999") can be
entered.
To ensure reverse system compatibility, the list number that appears in the dialog box defaults
to the list number for that AsRun log.
This number is saved in the INI-file.
 Text File. Use this option to save an AsRun log as ASCII text file format.
 Binary File. Use this option to generate an external reconciliation file. The format of this binary
file is determined by a system generated .DLL file. The two types of .DLL files are the Sony and
the Enterprise, both named AsRun.dll or AsRun32.dll.
 Use AsRun Date. An event’s scheduled start time is logged in an AsRun log file saved in binary
file format instead of the system time.
 No Header. No header information is displayed in an AsRun log file saved in text file format
 Include Secondary Events: This option allows the inclusion of secondary events in the SONY
Binary AsRun file. If this option is enabled, make sure your traffic system is prepared to read
secondary events. This might require contacting your traffic system vendor.
 Include Reconcile Key. This option includes all event’s reconciliation keys in an AsRun log
created in text file format only. Reconciliation keys are added to an event generated by the
traffic department and identify a specific ID run at a specific time.
This option controls the presence or not of reconcile key for the text AsRun file.
Note: For binary file the recon key is always included.
 Update Database: Select to allow secondary recorded Id’s to be saved to the database with the
timecode and segment information.
For Air Client AutoRecord.
• When a SECONDARY RECORD event is finished recording, all subsequent replay events on
the list are automatically filled in with the recorded duration and SOM. If any other lists on
the same Automation Server contain the same replay events, they will be filled in also.
• Enable As Run/Update Database must be set up for your Secondary Record files to be stored
permanently in the Media Client Database. This is only necessary if you need to
permanently store your Secondary Record files for future replay – beyond the current log.
You should only use this option if the previous scenarios apply to your station. This must
only be configured on one Air Client.
 Log Tally: If this option is activated on the Air Client, and for the AsRun log configuration of a
given transmission list, the AsRun log text file indicates on a specific line each change in the
OnAir/OnLine status (Tally information associated with a specific transmission list).
• If the Log Tally parameter is enabled, the Tally status at the creation of the daily log file, and
its later changes, are logged in the AsRun log file.
• If the Log Tally parameter is disabled, the Tally status at the creation of the daily log file, and
its later changes, are not logged.
• If there no Tally is configured for a given List, the Log Tally parameter in the corresponding
AsRun log is not active.
• If a Tally is configured for a given List, the Log Tally parameter in the corresponding AsRun
log configuration window is active.
5. Configure the following "Other’ parameters:
ADC™ Air Client
 Start of Day: Enter a time value in the Start of Day: field to specify when the AsRun log feature
should start a new log. This is used when a playlist is ran continuously.
 Short Clip: Enter a time value to specify how much time a spot may be played short without
generating an error in the AsRun log. This is used primarily with Enterprise AsRun log
reconciliation.
 Printer Port: Specify a printer port on the Printer Port: button in the Other Options area.
 Need page Feed: Check to enable advance to a new sheet of paper after printing a full page of
as run events. Only enable this if the printer does not support automatic page feeds, such as
when sending the AsRun logs to a laser printer.
 AsRun Directory: Click the Browse button (...) to specify which directory to store AsRun logs.
The default is the root directory of the Air Client application. AsRun logs are named the same, no
matter which server they are written by. Use this feature to specify separate directories for each
server so AsRun log files are not overwritten when using multiple servers. Use the Browse
button (…) to locate a directory.
 Custom Header File: Manually enter a file path name, or use list arrow to select from a list of
available files. To browse for a file click …. . An Open dialog is displayed allowing the operator to
browse for and select the desired file.
 Days To Keep: Specify the number of days to keep AsRun logs before they are deleted.
6. To Change As Run Format(v), click Change As Run Format(v). The AsRun Log Format Configuration
 Use > and < buttons to move column entries.

• Select an entry in the Available column and then click > to move the entry to the As Run
Column. The column will be displayed in the AsRun file.
ADC™ Air Client
• Select an entry in the As Run column and then click > to move the entry to the Available
Column. The column is removed and will not be displayed in the AsRun file.
 Use up and Down buttons to arrange the sequence of columns
 Specify a column and then specify its length, width and gutter size.
 Click Preview to preview the log format as it is being specified.
 (Option) Click Default to specify default settings.
 When finished click OK
7. (Option) To Edit an existing AsRun list:
 Select a list from the Asruns dialog’s Configured Lists pane, and then click Edit.
 The AsRun setup dialog is displayed populated with the selected list’s settings.
 Make any required changes, and then click OK. Returns to the AsRun’s dialog.
8. (Option) To Remove a existing AsRun list, select a list from the AsRun’s dialog’s Configured Lists
pane, and then click Remove.
Setting Hardware Control Panel Properties

Use this procedure to configure parameters for the Operator Control Panel used with Air Client. Once
these parameters have been set, they should not need to be changed.
Note: Contact your Tech Support Representative for assistance before changing any of the settings.
To Configure the Operator Control Panel (OCP)

The Operator Control Panel (OCP) is configured through the ADC Air Client software.
• Air Client supports up to two Operator Control panels and allows you to configure the functionality
of control and list buttons.
• Up to 10 banks of 6 list buttons can be configured. The Bank selection buttons allows an operator to
select each bank of list buttons.
 List buttons are used to open a transmission list quickly during Air Client operation. List buttons
are arranged in banks of 6 button assignments each (Bank 1, Bank 2, Bank 3,…Bank 10). Pressing
a different Bank button on the panel switches the top row of 6 LED buttons on the panel to that
bank of 6 assigned List buttons.
• A button from the bank can be assigned to a single list or to several lists.
• Once assigned, when button is pressed for that bank, control is shifted to that list.
• When ADC shifts control to that list, the panel will stay in sync and also shift control to the
same list.
 Control buttons allow the operator to perform control actions on the currently active List or
Lists.
• The labels are editable in the User Interface.
• If a button's label is blank (no spaces or other characters) the button's backlight is
extinguished.
ADC™ Air Client
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Hardware Control Panel icon ( ). The Hardware
Control Panel selection dialog is displayed.
2. Select which COM port the control panel is connect to, and then click on Edit. The Hardware Control
Panel configuration dialog is displayed.
3. Select the OCP tab.

4. From the Panel Type dropdown select OCP.
5. From the I/O Port dropdown select the desired Port. The following port options are available:
 No Port
 COM 1
 COM 2
 COM 3
 COM 4
6. (Recommended) Click Set Defaults. This ensures a standard base against which to configure panel
functionality.
 An I/O Port must be selected before the Defaults can be set.
ADC™ Air Client
 In a multi Device Server environment, the Choose Server dialog is displayed. Select the server
the device is connected to and then press OK.
7. To Configure the List Group. List groups are used to open a transmission list quickly during Air Client
operation.
 In the Lists pane, double left click on a specific numbered button (left panel) which corresponds
to a physical button on the OCP top row of 6 buttons. (Notice the buttons are already in groups
of six.). The List Assignment dialog appears.
The Device Server(s) provides information of the Lists that are available.
 Select which Transmission List will open when the button is pressed on the OCP. Use the move
keys to select (>, >>) and deselect (<, <<) entries.
• >: Move a single entry from Available pane to Assigned pane
• >>: Move all entries from Available pane to Assigned pane
ADC™ Air Client
• <: Move a single entry from Assigned pane back to Available pane
• <<: Move all entries from Assigned pane back to Available pane
Note: Gang play can be implemented by selecting multiple lists on a single list button.
 When finished, click OK.
8. (Option) To Rename a List group:
 Right click on a List entry in the left pane, and then from the popup menu select Rename. The
List group rename dialog appears.
 Rename the entry and then click OK.

9. To Set a Button Action for OCP Buttons 7 – 24. Action buttons are used to carry out numerous On Air
actions during Air Client operation.
 In the Buttons pane, double left click on a specific Buttons Action (e.g. Hold) which corresponds
to a physical button on the OCP (buttons 7 – 24).
 From the Actions dropdown select an action from the list, and then click OK.
Assignable actions: The following is a description of each action you can assign to the action
buttons on the hardware control panel:
• -1: Subtracts one second to the duration of the playing event.
• +1: Adds one second to the duration of the playing event.
• Cut Next: Deletes the event following the playing event.
Note: Events deleted with this action are not recoverable from the clipboard.
• Freeze: Freezes the current frame of the video of a playing event.
• Hold: Holds the current event’s duration, allowing the event to continue to play beyond its
specified duration.
ADC™ Air Client
• Let Roll: Rolls an event without switching.

• Play: Plays the playlist.
• PrgRun: Prepares a playlist for play by threading the devices in a playlist.
• Protect: Switches between air and protect devices.
• Ready: Ready the media for the Play command.
• Recue: Recues the playing event.
• RollNow: Identical to the Roll button on the software control panel. Roll bypasses normal
preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the equipment will allow. If the current
event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it and plays the next event using normal
preroll values unless configured to use instant preroll values. If the current event is frozen,
this button will play the next event. If the current event is being held, clicking this button
plays the event.
• Second: The Second action allows you to roll a secondary audio/video event without
specifying a starting offset for the event. This allows you to start a primary event and roll the
secondary event at any time by pressing the Second button. To identify which secondary
audio/video event is affected by this action, you must remove any data in the TOD field of
the event.
When the Second button is pressed, the next secondary audio/video event with a blank TOD
is rolled. If the Second button is pressed again, the next such event, if available, rolls. The
Second button will not roll any other type of secondary event and will not roll to any
secondary audio/video event if its TOD field is not blank.
Also, a secondary audio/video event rolls the next secondary audio/video event with TOD
field information if the secondary audio/video event does not have a Rejoin qualifier. This
allows you to run a list of secondary audio/video events attached to the current primary
event. If the Rejoin qualifier is attached to an event, then it will not roll any other secondary
audio/video events.
Note: You cannot roll consecutive secondary audio/video events with the same ID for
devices that play program material. Some devices, such as still stores and audio carts, use
the event ID to match to the event ID name of the device. If this is the case, the ID can be
the same for consecutive secondaries.
• Skip: Skips the playing event and proceeds to the next event.
• SyncSkip: Provides synchronous payout of commercials across multiple lists. The SyncSkip
command concept is that the next event with a designated sequential Seg # becomes equal
to the remaining part of the current event. Since each of these events represent the entire
program, the SOM of the next event is shifted to the EOM point of the current event and the
DUR of the next event is made equal to the remaining DUR of the current event.
• Ten Rel: Tension releases the VTR for the next VTR event.
• Unthread: Unthreads lists assigned to a list button and stops on-air playout.
10. (Optional) To Rename a Button Action:
ADC™ Air Client
 Right click on a listed action entry and then from the popup menu select Rename. The Action
button rename dialog appears.
 Rename the entry and then click OK.

11. When all buttons are properly configured click on OK the Hardware Control Panel configuration
dialog. The dialog closes.
12. Click on OK in the panel select t On the Completion dialog, click Finish to complete the installation
ab. The Hardware Control Panel selection dialog closes.
Cabling
The OCP uses a straight through DB9 RS-232 connection. To complete connection with Common
Hardware Platform equipment ensure the cable terminates are female (i.e. one end of the cable with
need a male to female adapter.)
For more information regarding cabling requirements and pinouts reference document, ADC Cabling
Standards.
Setting Software Control Panel Properties

Use this procedure to configure the software control panel within the Air Client application.
ADC™ Air Client
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Software Control Panel icon ( ). The Software
Control Panels Configuration dialog is displayed.
2. Click Edit. The Edit Available Lists dialog is displayed.
3. To Add a List.
 Click Add…. The Add List dialog is displayed.
 Specify a List Index Number. Click down arrow to select from a dropdown list of available
entries.
 Enter a List Name
ADC™ Air Client
 When finished click OK. Returns to the Edit Available Lists dialog.
4. To Edit a List.
 Select a list in the List pane and then click Edit…. The Edit List dialog is displayed populated with
the settings for the selected list.
 Make any necessary changes and then click OK. Returns to the Edit Available Lists dialog.
5. To Remove a List, select a list in the List pane and then click Remove. The list is removed.
 When finished editing click OK on the Edit Available Lists dialog. Returns to the Software Control
Panels Configuration dialog.
6. To enable buttons for a list:
 Select a list in the Available List pane
 Under Control Panel in the Enable Buttons pane, check the buttons you want enabled for the
list. To disable, uncheck an entry. [Default: all entries enabled (checked)]
7. To set background color for a button:
 Select an enabled entry in the Enable Buttons pane.
 Ensure the "Use Skin Color" option is disabled (unchecked).
 In the Background Color pane click Change Color. The Color setting dialog is displayed
 Select the desired color and then click OK. Returns to the Software Control Panels Configuration
dialog.
ADC™ Air Client
8. When finished click Apply, and then click OK.
Valid IDs
Use this procedure to create a list of IDs that are not in the database that are commonly used for air.
This, in general, would include switch only events (i.e. Network, Newsroom, Studio, Black etc.)
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Valid IDs icon ( ). The Valid IDs dialog is displayed.
2. To Add an ID.
 Click Add…. The add ID box is displayed.
 Enter and ID and then click OK.

3. To Edit an ID.
 Select an ID from the IDs list pane and then click Edit…. The edit ID box is displayed populated
with the ID of the selected ID.
 Make any necessary changes and then click OK.
ADC™ Air Client
4. To Remove and ID select an ID from the IDs list pane and then click Remove. The ID is removed.
List Names
Use this procedure to configure (add, remove, or customize) names of transmission lists that will appear
in ‘View List’ [under Resources]. The default is to display only a number for the separate transmission
lists at your facility (i.e. play list 1, play list 2) and secondary lists such as Record Lists, Media Lists, and
Compile Lists.
IMPORTANT: Air Client's 'List Names' functionality requires absence of '/nt' in command line parameters
on the application’s desktop shortcut.
Without /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Air Client.
With /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Device Server.
For more information see, Create a Desktop Shortcut for Air Client (see "Managing the Desktop Shortcut
for Air Client" on page 214).
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the List Names icon ( ). The List Names dialog is displayed.
2. To Add a Configured List:
ADC™ Air Client
 Click Add… The Choose List dialog is displayed.
 Select a list from the Available Lists pane and then click OK. The List Name box is displayed.
 Enter a name for the list and then click OK. The list is added to the Configured Lists pane.
3. To Edit a Configured List:
 Select a list from the Configured Lists pane and then click Edit…. The List Name box is displayed
populated with the name of the selected list.
 Make any necessary changes and then click OK. The list name is changed on the Configured Lists
pane.
4. To Remove a Configured list select an ID from the Configured List pane and then click Remove. The
list is removed.
Auto List Save

To enable Auto List Save add the applicable lists using this configuration option.
ADC™ Air Client
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Auto List Save icon ( ). The Auto List Save dialog is
displayed.
2. To Add an Enabled List:

 Click Add… The Choose List dialog is displayed.
ADC™ Air Client
 Select a list from the Available Lists pane and then click OK. The Save Options dialog displayed.
 Configure the following parameters as required:

• Save Lookahead: (Default: enabled) Check to enable save of the list lookahead only.
RECOMMENDATION: NEVER USE THIS, always choose SAVE FULL to prevent on-air problems
later.
• Save Full: Check to enable save of the full list
• Save Frequency: (Default: 10) Specify the number of changes required before a list save is
initiated. This is the value of how many events go by NOT how many "edits" are performed.
• Save Directory: Specify the save directory for the saved list. (Click ‘…’ to browse for location.
RECOMMENDATION: It is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that subfolders be created within the
normal default Playlist folders for each Transmission List’s Recovery List to be stored. This
way, Operators, if they want to Load from this file, can find it more easily.
 Click OK. The list is added to the Enabled Lists pane.
3. To Edit a Configured List:
 Select a list from the Configured Lists pane and then click Edit…. The List Save Options dialog is
displayed populated with the settings for the selected list.
ADC™ Air Client
 Make any necessary changes and then click OK. The list save parameters are updated.
4. To Remove an Enabled list select a list from the Enabled List pane and then click Remove. The list is
removed.
Auto Bin Save

Use this procedure to configure the save of bin storage map of a cart machine based on user specified
intervals.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Auto Bin Save icon ( ). The Auto Bin Save dialog is
displayed.

 Enable Auto Bin Saving: Check to enable save.
 Hold Time: Specify the hold time in seconds. (Default: 30)
 Save Directory: Specify the save directory for the Auto Bin. (Click ‘…’ to browse for location.
Error Reporting Properties

You can configure the way errors are reported in the error window. Use this procedure to configure
how/where error messages are displayed and whether they will sound out when they occur.
1. Choose a transmission list from the server from the Choose Server dialog box and click OK.
Note: Error log files are named the same, regardless of which server originated the file. If you are
using multiple servers, you need to specify different directories for each server so that the error logs
do not overwrite each other.
ADC™ Air Client
2. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Errors… icon ( ). The Error Configuration dialog is
displayed.
3. Configure Log and Display:

 Log Errors to Disk: When enabled (checked), all errors will be written to a file in a directory
specified by the Error Log Directory: field.
 Pop Up User Notifications: Check to enable. When running certain types of cart machines in
manual mode, you may be prompted for manual interaction.
 Sound Errors: Check to enable. Plays an alert sound, or exclamation, when errors occur. It
repeats until the error is acknowledged using F4. The exclamation sound plays every one
second, so a sound with a duration greater than one second will be clipped.
About Map .WAV sounds: Use the Windows Sounds control panel to map .WAV files to specific
occurrences in Air Client.
4. Configure List Errors:
 Open Lists: When selected, shows list errors only when a transmission list is open.
 All Lists: When selected, displays all list errors even if no transmission lists are open.
5. Configure Device Errors:
 Owned Devices: When selected, shows device errors only when the transmission list that
controls the device is open.
 All Devices: When selected, displays all device errors even if the transmission list that controls
the device is not open.
6. Configure Timezone: (Default: none) Specify the timezone for the list and error. Click the down
arrow to select from a list of available timezones.
7. Configure System Errors:
 Notify: When enabled (checked), system errors display alert dialog boxes. System errors include
the loss of reference video or timecode on the server.
8. Configure Error Log Directory: Click the Browse button (...) to specify the directory the error logs
will be written to.
ADC™ Air Client
9. Configure Font and Colors for the message displayed at the bottom of the window of the Air Client
software when an error message is active and inactive.
 In the "Active group", the user defines how the error message is displayed when it is just
generated.
• When the "Bold" option is checked, the error message uses a bold font.
• When the "Blink" is checked, the error message blinks, the colors of the foreground and
background invert. This makes the error message
Example: New Generated Error Message
When the error message is generated, it is displayed as it was previously configured in the
"Active group" of the "Error Configuration" dialog box; typically as bolded text.
(For this example the display colors were modified to enhance readability. Your display will
appear different.)
 In the "Inactive group", the user defines how the error message is displayed when it is
acknowledged.
• When the "Bold" option is checked, the error message uses a bold font.
Example: Acknowledged Error Message
When an Air Client software user clicks on "F4" button or presses the key F4 to acknowledge
the error message, it is displayed as it was previously configured in the "Inactive group" of
the "Error Configuration" dialog box; typically as unbolded regular text.
(For this example the display colors were modified to enhance readability. Your display will
appear different.)
About Errors in Multi-Login Mode

In multi-login mode, it is possible to configure different directories for the errors coming from each
Device Server.
Desktop Display Properties

Use this procedure to adjust the desktop background color and wallpaper within the Air Client program.
ADC™ Air Client
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Desktop... icon ( ). The Desktop Properties dialog is
displayed.
2. In the Background area of the Desktop Properties dialog box, click the Color: button and choose a
new background color from the palette.
3. (Optional) Use the Windows standard Wallpaper area to apply wallpaper to the background.
 Select from the list of available wallpapers or Browse to locate.
 Select to Tile or Center the wallpaper.
4. When finished click Apply, then OK.
Saving the Desktop
To save a Window configuration From the Properties ribbon tab select the Save Desktop icon ( ).
Using this option ensures window configuration appears exactly as saved every time Air Client is
launched.
LinkList
LinkList allows playlists to be linked together and controlled from a single master playlist. Once playlists
are linked, changes made to the master playlist in content or event order are "mirrored" by linked lists,
ensuring that all associated events are synchronized.
ADC™ Air Client
When the functionality has been purchased, you can custom configure Linked Lists. For details on the
Linked List feature see section: LinkList (on page 211) presented earlier in this document.
Reference Note: For information on the operation and configuration of this feature see the ADC LinkList
Reference document.
More Info
When the functionality has been purchased, you can custom configure a More Info column using an
ODBC database. Using the More Info feature is a two-step process. The customer uses station-defined
procedures to configure the functionality on this display.
1. Add the ﬁeld(s) to be displayed in the More Info Window to a table in the automation database,
which is done using the SQL Server Management Studio, a server based application. However, to
add fields, administrator access to the PC on which the Microsoft SQL Server software is installed is
required.
2. Create the corresponding ﬁeld(s) in the More Info Window.
Information on displaying the More Info Window (see "More Info Window" on page 174) is presented
earlier in this document.
Reference Note: MoreInfo is an option to Air Client and Media Client. For details on installing and
configuring this feature, please reference the ADC MoreInfo Feature Reference. For more information
contact your Automation Sales representative.
Hide Secondary Event Keys

In the List, there is a distinct display filtering setting for the Secondary events of the OnAir/OnLine
Primary event, and for the Secondary events of the other Primary events (not playing).
Note: This does not apply for preview played events
• The display filtering setting for the Secondary events of non-playing Primary events can be
configured for Playlist also.
• The activation of these 2 secondary events display filterings is configurable per List (in multi-login
mode also).
About Managing Secondary Event Hiding:
For both cases, it is possible to configure the Secondary events to hide:

 Per "Sec" criteria (sAV, sGPI, ****, …), new sAXP events to manage
 Per ID criteria (Extended Ids managed),
 And per Type criteria (P, T, S, A, R,…).
It is possible to combine these criteria. For instance:

 Hide any Comment with blank type, but show any Comment with R or P type.
ADC™ Air Client
 Hide any sAV (whatever the ID and Type is).

 Hide any sAV with ID "LOGO", and show all other sAV.
 Show any sKEY or sTRANSKEY .
Manual hiding/showing of secondary events is still available for hidden secondary events, per event
(icon in event number column), or for the whole list.
IMPORTANT: When secondary events are hidden, if an event or block of events are highlighted and then
deleted, the hidden events within the selection are also deleted.
Configuration of the Hide Secondary Event keys

Use this procedure to define the Hide Secondary Event keys that will be used in the Lists / Playlist
properties to define the secondary event to hide.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Hide Secondary Event Keys icon ( ). The Hide
Secondary Event Keys dialog is displayed.
2. To Add a Key:
 Click Add…. The Hide Secondary Event Key setup dialog is displayed.
ADC™ Air Client
 Specify the following parameters:

• Key: Use spin arrows to set key number
• Key name: Enter a name for the key
• Sec (Event Type): Three fields.
Field 1: A combo box similar to the one of Secondary event edition tool, listing all the
supported secondary event types, allows user to choose the Secondary event type
condition.
Field 2: A combo box allows setting the field if the condition is complemented
("Complement" is displayed in the field) or not (the field is blank).
Field 3: A combo box allows setting the field if the condition is enabled ("Enabled" is
displayed in the field) or disabled ("Disabled" displayed in the field).
• Type (Event Control): Three fields.
Field 1: This field is directly editable to write the event type (P, T, S, PT, A, R, blank,…). If the
field is blank and the condition is enabled, this is a valid criteria.
Field 2: A combo box allows to set if the condition is complemented ("Complement" is
displayed in the field) or not (the field is blank).
Field 3: A combo box allows setting the field the condition is enabled ("Enabled" is displayed
in the field) or disabled ("Disabled" displayed in the field).
• ID: Three fields.
Field 1: This field is directly editable to write the secondary event ID. Extended are managed.
If the field is blank and the condition is enabled, this is a valid criteria.
Field 2: A combo box allows setting the field if the condition is complemented
("Complement" is displayed in the field) or not (the field is blank).
Field 3: A combo box allows setting the field if the condition is enabled ("Enabled" is
displayed in the field) or disabled ("Disabled" displayed in the field).
 When finished click OK. The Key is added to the list pane.
3. To Edit a Key:
 Select a key from the list pane and then click Edit. The Hide Secondary Event Key setup dialog is
displayed and populated for the selected key.
 Make changes are required then click OK.

Note: If a key used in the Hiding Secondary configuration of a List or the Playlist is modified,
there will be no specific indication of this in the Hiding Secondary configuration GUI of this List
or the Playlist.
ADC™ Air Client
4. To Remove a Key, select a key from the list pane and then click Remove.
Note: If a key used in the Hiding Secondary configuration of a List or the Playlist is deleted, this key
will be displayed in a specific color in the Hiding Secondary configuration GUI of this List or the
Playlist.
Toolbar Builder
The Toolbar Builder allows an Air Client software user to define shortcuts for tool bar group operations
on the Quick Access Ribbon tab: Standard, List Tools, Global Tools.
A configurable Toolbar allows an operator to call functions by a simple click on a button.

• A specific configuration allows building the different Toolbar Groups, by associating a function with
a bitmap for each button
• Access to the "Toolbar Builder" resource, which is used to administrate the toolbars available for the
users, is granted to the administrator login only. Therefore, the "Toolbar Builder…" command from
the Properties Group on the Properties Ribbon tab is enabled or grayed depending of the current
login of the user.
To configure the Quick Access Ribbon Toolbar on the desktop

1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Toolbar Builder icon ( ). The Toolbar Builder dialog is
displayed.
The "Toolbar Builder" dialog box displays the toolbars that have already been created and allows to
define and modify the content of a selected toolbar.
ADC™ Air Client
Dialog components:
 The "Toolbar group" displays the list of the toolbars what have already been created.
 The "Add button" allows to create a new toolbar (this is the first step in the toolbar creation). It
opens the following dialog box to enter the toolbar name that will be used to identify the
toolbar. If the user enters the name of a toolbar that is already existing, an error message is
displayed.
 The "Delete button" is used to delete the selected toolbar. The user is prompted to confirm
before deleting the toolbar.
 The "Rename button" is used to rename the selected toolbar and it opens the Toolbar name
dialog box. If the user enters the name of a toolbar that is already existing, an error message are
displayed and the rename action is cancelled.
 The "Move up and Move down buttons" modify the order of the toolbars in the list. The name
of the toolbars are displayed in the Ribbon toolbars according to this order.
 The "Edit button" is used to opens the "Shortcuts Setting" dialog box that is used to define the
toolbar shortcuts.
2. To Add a toolbar:
 Click Add. The Toolbar name box is displayed.
 Enter name for the toolbar in the name box and then click OK. The new toolbar is added to the
toolbar group.
Note: If required, the application allows a blank name for a toolbar group.
ADC™ Air Client
 Edit the toolbar parameters

3. To Edit a toolbar:
 Select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Edit. The Shortcuts Settings dialog is
displayed.
The "Shortcuts Setting" dialog box displays the shortcuts associated with a toolbar, and allows
to add, edit, remove and organize these shortcuts into the toolbar.
 Show Button Names Check to enable or uncheck to disable the display of button names.
 System Configuration rights to change View: Check to enable or uncheck to disable. When
checked, this toolbar is grayed in the ribbon toolbars for non-administrator logins, so only the
administrator logins are granted to add or remove that toolbar into the Air Client GUI.
 Toolbar Buttons: This list displays the images chosen to represent the toolbar shortcuts and the
order to display them in the toolbar.
• To add buttons click Add. A browse window opens for locating a bitmap file that will be
represented a toolbar shortcut.
• To delete buttons, select a button and then click Delete. The user is prompted to confirm
before deleting the image.
• To modify the order of buttons on the toolbar, select a button from the Toolbar Buttons
pane and then click Move Left (to move the entry left on the toolbar), Move Right (to move
the entry right on the toolbar).
 Button Properties: This group displays information about the selected shortcut. To select a
shortcut, the user selects the bitmap, in the "Toolbar buttons" that will be represented by it.
• Select a button graphic in the Toolbar Buttons pane. The user can choose or modify the
associated function by selecting one in the list of functions and by clicking on "Select
button". The bitmap is displayed.
ADC™ Air Client
• Function: The function name is transcribed in "Function edit". Highlight a function in the
Available functions pane and then click < to select.
• Name: Specify the name of the button.
Hint: Specify a tooltip popup for the function. The user can modify the hint to be displayed for
that shortcut in the "Hint edit". By default, "Hint" is equal to the function name.
4. To position a toolbar in the list and for display select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and
then click Move Up (to move the entry up in the list), Move Down (to move the entry down in the
list). The position in the list determines the display sequence (right to left) of the toolbars on the
main screen.
5. To Rename a toolbar:
 Select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Rename. The Toolbar name box is
displayed.
 Enter new name in the name box and then click OK.
6. To Delete a toolbar, select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Delete.
7. When finished click OK
Configuring Time Zone Offsets

Use this procedure to configure a unique time zone offset for each play list that is offset from the house
clock. This means it is possible to define Time Zones with offsets compared to the Time Code reference
used by the Device Servers, and to set a Time Zone to a given List.
• The Time Zone set to a List will be displayed in the title bar of it List window, and of its Zoom
window.
• The time zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the List.
ADC™ Air Client
To setup TimeZone Offsets

1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Time Zone icon ( ). The Timezones dialog is displayed.
2. To add a Timezone and Offset.

 Click Zone List tab
 Click Add. A Time Zone dialog is displayed.
 In the Time Zone dialog specify a name for the timezone and an offset (+ or – hh:mm:ss:ff) down
to frame level.
 When finished Click OK
 (Option) Use Edit button to edit a currently defined Timezone and Offset.
 (Option) Use Remove button to remove a currently defined Timezone and Offset
Note: A pop-up warning appears when an operator attempts to Edit or Remove an existing time
zone offset. The warning will say "This change will alter the event times of all associated lists. Do
you want to continue?" OK or Cancel.
Changing the offset time will dynamically modify the event times of all associated playlists.
ADC™ Air Client
Example dialog with added values:
3. To Set Event Movement.

 Click Event Movement tab
 Select the desired Event movement behavior

• Always ask if offset should be applied (Default)
• Always apply offsets on move
• Never apply offsets on move
4. To set a Timezone to a playlist.
ADC™ Air Client
 Click Playlists tab
 Click Add. A Time Zone dialog is displayed.
 The system warns "This change will alter event times in the playlist. Do you want to Continue.
Click OK.
 In the timezone dialog specify the following:
• Device Server: Specify a Device Server. Use the dropdown arrow to view a list of available
Device Servers.
• List: Specify a list. Use the dropdown arrow to view a list of available playlists.
• Time Zone: A name for the timezone. Specify a Timezone. Use the dropdown arrow to view
a list of currently defined timezones.
 Click OK
• The Time Zone set to a List is displayed in the title bar of its List window, and its Zoom
window.
• The time zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the List.
 (Option) Use the Edit button to edit a currently defined Timezone.
ADC™ Air Client
 (Option) Use the Remove button to remove a currently defined Timezone.

5. When finished click OK
Operation Log
Use this procedure to create a log to track operation activity within the Air Client application.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Operation Log icon ( ). The Operation Log dialog is
displayed.
2. Enable operation log: Check to enable logging

3. Action Categories: Use arrow keys to select the action categories to be logged. Move options from
‘Action Categories’ pane to ‘Action Categories logged’ pane. Use the move keys to select (>, >>) and
deselect (<, <<) entries.
 >: Move a single entry from ‘Action Categories’ pane to ‘Action Categories logged’ pane
 >>: Move all entries from ‘Action Categories’ pane to ‘Action Categories logged’ pane
 <: Move a single entry from ‘Action Categories logged’ pane back to ‘Action Categories’ pane
 <<: Move all entries from ‘Action Categories logged’ pane back to ‘Action Categories’ pane
4. Other Options:
 Start of Day: Specify the start of day hh:mm:ss
 Operation log Directory: Specify the directory. Click the Browse button (…) to locate.
 Days to Keep: Specify the number of days to keep the log before deleting.
ADC™ Air Client
5. Time: Select the time to use: Station or Device Server.

Set Tally
Use this procedure to configure Air client to use the Tally information of a given List to display an "On
Air" / "On Line" status and color for the playing event(s) of the corresponding transmission list(s) and
zoom window(s) status column.
When a Tally is configured for a given List,

• If it is seen as "On Air" according to the Tally configuration, then the "On Air" color and ON AIR
status are used in the List and its Zoom window,
• If it is seen as "On Line" according to the Tally configuration, the "On Line" color and ON LINE status
are used in the List and its Zoom window.
SeaLevel Drivers to Support ADC "Tally" Function

To support ADC tally functions the GPI Card installed in the Air Client (our standard Device Server GPI
card = SeaLevel 8011 card) requires installation of the SeaLevel drivers:
http://www.sealevel.com/store/i-o/digital-i-o/pci/8011-pci-8-form-c-relay-output-8-isolated-input-
digital-interface.html (http://www.sealevel.com/store/i-o/digital-i-o/pci/8011-pci-8-form-c-relay-
output-8-isolated-input-digital-interface.html)
Note: SeaLevel is a 3rd party company that produces GPI/RS422 cards.
To Set a Tally
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Set Tally icon ( ). The Set tally dialog is displayed. A
Scroll bar appears on the left of the list if all the Tally configured cannot be displayed at the same
time in the GUI.
ADC™ Air Client
Note: If user is not logged in with System Configuration permission, the corresponding configuration
window is opened with the Add, Remove, Edit, OK and Apply buttons grayed, and only the Cancel
and Help buttons active.
2. To Add a Tally:
 Click Add. The Add Tally Configuration dialog is displayed. Use this dialog to set which input of
which GPI board is corresponding to which List of which Device Server (multi-login
management).
 Specify the parameters listed for the tally:

• Device Server: Allows to choose between the Device Server name of the "Available Device
Servers list" in Multi-Login, or for the current Device Server Name if not in Multi-Login.
Initial value (when Add used) : None (displayed <Server Name>)
• List n*: Allows to set the concerned List number of the Device Server selected. The Lists of
the Configured Device Server which have already a Tally configured on this Air Client are not
displayed or accessible in the combo box.
Values in combo box: 1 to 16, and 0. 0 value means "None" and is displayed blank. Initial
value (when Add used): 0.
• GPI board number & Input number: Allow to set which Input of which GPI board receives
the Tally signal of the List configured with Device Server & List parameters. It is active
immediately.
GPI board no. allows to select one the GPI boards installed on the station (detected by the
driver).
Values in combo box: 1 to 4, and 0. 0 value means "None" and is displayed blank.
Initial value (when Add used) : 0.
ADC™ Air Client
• Input number: Set the concerned GPI input number of the GPI board selected.
Values from 1 to 8, and 0. 0 value means "None" and is displayed blank.
The min and max values displayed in the combo box (except 0 value) could be retrieved
automatically from the dll interfacing the Air Client with the GPI board (if this solution is
used).
• OnAir/OnLine Status&Color: Values: YES or NO.
If set to YES, the On Air / On Line status and related configured colors in the corresponding
List and Zoom Window are activated.
If set to NO, the On Air/On Line status and related configured colors in the corresponding
List and Zoom Window not activated (Standard PLAY status and color).
Initial value (when Add used) : NO
• On Air value: Values: 0 or 1.
Allows to determine which GPI logical value (0 or 1) is corresponding to the OnAir status of
the selected List.
Initial value (when Add used) : 0
• Current value: This is not a parameter. It shows the value currently applied to the
configured GPI input. The field is blanked until a Server/List and GPI board/GP Input are
configured.
 When finished click OK. Closes the Tally Configuration window, and applies the settings to the
Tally table of the Set Tally window.
Note: A line added, and not configured is not added to the Tally table.
3. To Edit a configured Tally:
 Select an entry on the Tally configured pane and then click Edit. The Configuration dialog is
displayed and populated with the parameters for the selected tally.
• It is possible to select one Tally line only in the Tally table.
• Use this dialog to set which input of which GPI board is corresponding to which List of which
Device Server (multi-login management).
 Edit the parameters listed for the tally:
• Device Server: Allows to choose between the Device Server name of the "Available Device
Servers list" in Multi-Login, or for the current Device Server Name if not in Multi-Login.
Initial value (when Add used) : None (displayed <Server Name>)
• List n*: Allows to set the concerned List number of the Device Server selected. The Lists of
the Configured Device Server which have already a Tally configured on this Air Client are not
displayed or accessible in the combo box.
ADC™ Air Client
Values in combo box: 1 to 16, and 0. 0 value means "None" and is displayed blank. Initial
value (when Add used): 0.
• GPI board number & Input number: Allow to set which Input of which GPI board receives
the Tally signal of the List configured with Device Server & List parameters. It is active
immediately.
GPI board no. allows to select one the GPI boards installed on the station (detected by the
driver).
Values in combo box: 1 to 4, and 0. 0 value means "None" and is displayed blank.
• Input number: Set the concerned GPI input number of the GPI board selected.
Values from 1 to 8, and 0. 0 value means "None" and is displayed blank.
The min and max values displayed in the combo box (except 0 value) could be retrieved
automatically from the dll interfacing the Air Client with the GPI board (if this solution is
used).
• OnAir/OnLine Status&Color: Values: YES or NO.
If set to YES, the On Air / On Line status and related configured colors in the corresponding
List and Zoom Window are activated.
If set to NO, the On Air/On Line status and related configured colors in the corresponding
List and Zoom Window not activated (Standard PLAY status and color).
Initial value (when Add used) : NO
• On Air value: Values: 0 or 1.
Allows to determine which GPI logical value (0 or 1) is corresponding to the OnAir status of
the selected List.
Initial value (when Add used) : 0
• Current value: This is not a parameter. It shows the value currently applied to the
configured GPI input. The field is blanked until a Server/List and GPI board/GP Input are
configured.
 When finished click OK. Closes the Tally Configuration window, and applies the settings to the
Tally table of the Set Tally window.
4. To Remove a tally.
 Select an entry on the Tally configured pane and then click Remove.
 A warning dialog appears requesting confirmation.
• Select OK to remove the selected Tally from the table.
• Select Cancel to keep the selected Tally and not remove it from the table.
5. When finished click Apply and then click OK.
MI Additional Fields
As broadcast operational methodologies shift additional metadata related to DTV operations is required.
This includes, but is not limited to, AFD, PSIP data, format, bitrates, etc. This data is becoming increasing
critical as it dictates how and sometime where content can play.
ADC™ Air Client
The ADC database and playlists structure has been extended so that this class of metadata can be
preserved and displayed. And more importantly that it can be passed to other devices so that the data
can be acted upon for the correct playout of content.
New Metadata fields

This information is present in the updated database schema.
Note: These fields are available for display in the More Info Window.
• AFD: Active Format Description is a standard set of codes that can be sent in the MPEG video stream
or in the baseband SDI video signal that carries information about their aspect ratio and active
picture characteristics. For more information see Appendix F: About AFD Codes (see "About AFD
Codes" on page 321).
• Rating: Currently assigned program rating for the show.
• Show name: Name of the show.
• Show description: Brief description of the show.
• Dialnorm: This is the meta-data parameter that controls decoder gain within the audio compression
system.
• Closed caption: specifies if closed captioning is enabled or disabled.
• BarData: This parameter is implemented as an option in MoreInfo Builder. Bar data defines the
extent of the image within the coded frame.
To add new MI Fields

1. From the Properties ribbon tab select MI Additional Fields ( ). The Additional Fields Configuration
2. Click Add…
3. In the More Info Field dialog use the dropdown lists to select the following:
 The Database in which the Table and Field reside. (e.g. ASDB)
 The Table in which the Field resides. (e.g. ASEXT)
 The Field. (e.g. BarData) A field with the specified name must exist in the Database.
ADC™ Air Client
4. (Optional) To edit a field:

 Select a field in one of the panes.
 Click Edit.
 In the More Info Field dialog modify the Database, Table, and Field parameters as required, and
then click OK.
5. (Optional) To remove a field, select a field in one of the panes and click Remove.
6. From the Configured fields pane select a field or fields that have been added, and then click > to
move the selection to the Used fields pane.
 >: Move selected field(s) to the Used fields pane.
 >>: Move all fields to the Used fields pane.
 <: Move selected field(s) to the Configured fields pane.
 <<: Move all fields to the Configured fields pane.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Appendix A
Appendix A
Event Type Field Values
There are several event types you can use to indicate how an event is played. For example, if you just
want an event to play without switching or threading, you would choose Play (P) as the primary event
type. The event type letter can be typed into the event type column of a play list or transmission list.
The primary event types are:
Play (P). An event will play without switching or threading.
Switch (S). An event will switch without threading or playing.
Thread (T). An event will thread without switching or playing.
A = Auto. An event will switch, play and thread. Auto is the default setting for most primary events.
Alternatively, a PT (play and thread) can be used to play and thread, but not switch. The A will be
required for certain event types to ensure the event executes correctly.
R = Record. A record event initiates recording on a device at the time specified in the event’s time field.
See Recording
O = Timed. Denotes that the event is a hard start event which automatically threads and plays at the
time specified in the event’s Time field. This event type will need to be added to an A event type to
execute correctly (AO).
U = Up-counting. Use an up-count event for an event of unknown duration, such as a sporting event or
any other live broadcast. During playout, the event’s duration will count down to 00:00:00.00 and then
will count back up. This repeats until terminated by either pressing Play or Skip on the control panel or a
contact start is reached. The next event will play normally. Up counters only work on events played from
Switch Only devices. This event type will need to be added to an A event type to execute correctly (AU).
AUO = Up-counting with hardstart. Is used when an up-count event is required to run at a
predesignated hard start or absolute time. Once this event type plays it acts as an up-count event as
described above.
Manual Start (AM). Use a manual start event to provide the equivalent of a break event during the
transmission of a play list. When playing, a list will stop when it reaches a manual start event. Click Play
on the control panel.
AUM = Manual Start with Up-count. This event type combination is a manual start as described above
but with an up-count event type added to allow the event to be run as an up-count event once it starts
playing.
X = Exception. This is a customized primary event in configurations that have a primary program channel
and regional feeds to play different commercials to different regions. Exception events are different on a
regional feed from those played on the primary program channel. X is only used on a compile tape.
ADC™ Air Client
N = Time to Next. Enter a letter N in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide a countdown to the
event’s start time. This is used primarily on live events so an operator can give an accurate countback
from a break back into a live event, such as a newscast.
Q = Audible Time to Next. Enter a letter Q in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide an audible
countdown starting 30 seconds from a commercial break into the next live event. To minimize its effect
on existing functionality ‘N’ (Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an operator when letter
‘Q’ is entered.
Note: The Q event type option requires the "Audible Time To Next" option be enabled (checked) on the
Environment->List Options tab.
Note: After the "Audible Time To Next" checkbox option is enabled in the List Options, it is necessary to
close and re-open the list windows in the client for the feature to work. (Re-loading the lists is not
necessary.)
• For example, if the duration of the break is 3 minutes, then...

 At 30 seconds Air Client announces: "30 seconds to go."
 At 20 seconds, Air Client announces: "20 seconds, standby."
 At 10 seconds, Air Client starts counting down each second: "10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1."
• Other example conditions:
 If the commercial break is 30 seconds long, then the countdown starts immediately with "30
seconds to go".
 If the commercial break is less than 30 seconds long, but greater than 20 seconds, then the
coundown starts at 20 seconds with "20 seconds, standby".
 If the commercial break is less than 20 seconds long, but greater than 10 seconds, then the
countdown starts at 10 seconds, with the 10,9,8 .......
AUN = Time to Next with Up-count. This combination will allow a countdown to the live (up-count)
event it is attached to.
AUQ = Audible Time to Next with Up-count. This combination will allow an audible countdown to the
live (up-count) event it is attached to.
D = Deadroll. A deadroll event hard starts at a specific time while the list plays. The deadroll event plays,
but does not switch, for its duration and then stops. Be advised this event type requires that the letter
D be added to an AO for it to play correctly. The operator will need to manually switch to this event type
for it to be switched On Air. If the deadroll event is switched On Air then the first event following the
deadroll will need to be a hard start event type to get the automation back on time and in full
automation.
Audio/Video Breakaway (AV, AI, AVJ, AIJ). A primary event or a secondary audio/video event can be
run and cause the switcher to perform an audio/video breakaway. AV is an event type that performs a
ADC™ Air Client
video breakaway. AI performs audio breakaways. To rejoin the secondary audio/video breakaway to the
primary audio/video input when it finishes playing, edit the event type to AVJ or AIJ. A breakaway event
can occur at the beginning, within and the end of its associated primary event. When used at the
beginning or end, the primary event type is set to A; the secondary event type is set to AV or AI. If the
duration of the secondary event is less than the primary event, add a J to supply the audio and video
from the primary event. When used within a primary event, the secondary event type is set to AVJ or
AIJ.
Note: Only one breakaway can be assigned to a primary event to avoid an overlap in time. You cannot
breakaway audio and then breakaway video until the video is rejoined. Also, you cannot breakaway
video and then breakaway audio until the audio is rejoined.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Appendix B
Appendix B
Secondary Events
Secondary events are associated with the primary event above it in the play list. Multiple secondary
events can be assigned to a primary event and are played concurrently. A secondary event’s time is used
as an offset in relation to the primary event’s time. You can edit the configuration parameters of some
secondary events. When inserting an editable secondary event, a dialog box allows you to configure its
attributes and settings.
Editable secondary events include:
GPI Contact, Back Timed GPI, Keyer On/Off, Transition Key, Audio Over On/Off, Transition Audio Over,
External and Data Event with Data.
To access an editable secondary event already in a play

To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary event already in a play list,
1. Click on the event’s number.
2. From the ribbon tabs select Events > Edit Secondary.
Secondary Switching Parameter (sSP)

The secondary switching parameter contains values depending on the event type. For primary and
secondary Audio/Video events, the value is the audio modes, mono and stereo. By default, the audio
mode is stereo. The value is initially set in a media prep product, such as Media Client, for the Audio
Format database field. It can be modified in Air Client by clicking an event and entering S or M in the sSP
field in Revise mode (ALT + R).
• For secondary key and secondary audio over events, the value ranges from 1 to 9. The number
corresponds to a keyer or mixer channel number on the master control switcher.
ADC™ Air Client
• If the Audio Mode selection for an existing ADC DB record is modified by the Media Client Operator,
then this update is sent to the event if it exists within an active playlist.
Secondary Audio/Video (sAV)

The secondary Audio/Video Audio Over event is used to add another A/V audio source over the primary
audio/video source. The A/V audio over source may replace the primary A/V audio source or be mixed
with it.
A secondary Audio/Video Audio Over event plays material, in addition to the primary event on air, for
use in effects such as keys, audio overs and mixes.
When inserting a new secondary audio/video event in a play list, play (P) and thread (T), but not auto
(A), are entered into the Type field. Switching is not used for this event. The event can be used to
produce the audio/video over for a key/audio over input to a master control switcher or as an
audio/video breakaway.
To switch the switcher

An A/V event may be run to switch the switcher. To do this, enter an A, instead of a P or T, in the Type
field. The secondary event will begin with an audio-follow video transition.
Back Timed Secondary Audio/Video (bAV)

The Back Timed A/V (backtimed secondary audio/video) event is the same as a Secondary Audio/Video,
except the secondary’s on-air time is the amount of time before the primary event will begin. (i.e. The
offset is measured backwards in time from the start of the associated primary event.)
In the event Type field, these events are inserted with types P and T (but not A). No switching is done on
these events, unless this is changed. These events can be used as a key/audio over inputs to a master
control switcher. It is possible to associate a switching event with a back timed event. To do this, change
the Type field to A. This event starts with an audio-follow-video transition.
Note: Backtimed events cannot be run after up-counting events.
GPI Contact (sGPI)

A GPI contact closure secondary event controls the contact closure on a GPI card. The Device Server
must have the optional GPI card.
ADC™ Air Client
For each event, an on time (offset) and duration value must be entered.
• An offset indicates how long after the start of the primary event the contact closure should occur.
• The duration value sets the duration of the pulse or length of closure of the contact.
The offset is entered in the event’s on-air field and duration in the DUR field. The GPI closure may be
longer than the associated primary event.
Note: The GPI Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless of
value of "Time". The event will display as played at the primary event time, although the actual GPI
contact will close at the exact time.
GPI Contact dialog

In following parameter configuration dialog is on the Air Client:
Back Timed GPI (bGPI)

A Backtimed GPI is similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured backwards in time
from the start of the associated primary event. For example, a backtimed GPI event with an offset of 5
seconds fires the GPI contact 5 seconds before the start of the associated primary event.
A backtimed GPI event cannot be attached to an event following a primary upcount event. In this case,
the system would not be able to calculate when to begin the GPI event.
ADC™ Air Client
Back Timed GPI dialog

Keyer On/Off (sKEY)

A Keyer On/Off event allows events to have an offset from the beginning of the event to be specified.
Define a secondary Keyer event in which a hole is cut in the associated primary event’s video output and
is filled with the output of the Keyer source.
The task performed by the key depends on the capabilities of the device you are using. This function will
only be performed if the primary event’s A/V Switching data is configured to use a Master Control
Switcher.
Key Event dialog

In this window, the following parameters can be set:
ADC™ Air Client
Modifier. This parameter specifies how the key source is outlined. The options are normal, shadow,
drop shadow and border.
Source. The key fill’s source. When self is selected, the fill input both cuts and fills the hole. When
external is selected, the key input cuts the hole and fill input fills it in. When chroma is selected, the key
is determined by the colors of the background video.
Matte. When selected, fill input is replaced by a matte source. The matte source color is determined by
the mixer controls.
Key Hold. When selected, this option will keep the keyer on through subsequent primary transitions.
On Time. This will determine the start time of the keyer event. This option determines how long after
the start of the primary event the key is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5 seconds or the key
will arrive late.
Note: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition Keyer
secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00:00.00.
Duration. Determines the length of time the key is overlaid. Do not specify a keyer event to turn off
during the next event’s preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions concurrently. In
order to have the key last as long as the primary event, make the duration field blank.
• The duration of the keyer event can either be blank, or specified as equal or greater than to:
 the duration of the primary minus the secondary's (normal) offset
ADC™ Air Client
 the duration of the primary plus the secondary's back timed offset
 the duration of the secondary's end-timed offset
• The keyer can be removed by the End Key Hold function.
Speed and Effect. The speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also set
which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located above the time fields. Effect
options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut.
Key. Specifies which key source to use. Do not specify a keyer event to turn off during the next event’s
preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions concurrently. Also, it is not possible to have
two transitions overlapping in time; however, you can associate two keys with the same event as long as
you set their on time and duration so they do not overlap.
A/V Keyer On/Off

The secondary Audio/Video Keyer event is used to add an A/V Keyer source over the primary
audio/video source. The A/V Keyer source may replace the primary audio/video source or be mixed with
it.
Transition Keyer (sTKY)

A transition keyer secondary event is similar to Keyer On/Off, except that the keyer is brought up at the
start of its associated primary event with the same transition type as that of the primary. This type of
secondary event has a configuration dialog box similar to Keyer On/Off; however, for the transition key,
the value of the offset cannot be set. It is possible to define a transition key event so it lasts as long as
the primary event. To do this, make the duration field blank. If the key hold option is on, the key is held
over the transition in the same way as an ordinary secondary keyer event.
Transition Keyer dialog

The following parameter configuration dialog is on the Air Client:
ADC™ Air Client
• To define a transition key event to last as long as the primary event make the duration field blank.
If the key hold option is on, the key is held over the transition in the same way as an ordinary
secondary keyer event.
Audio Over On/Off (sAOV)

The Audio Over secondary event is used to add another audio source over the primary audio/video
source. The audio over source may replace the primary audio source or be mixed with it.
• To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the duration
field blank.
ADC™ Air Client
Audio Over dialog

The following parameter configuration dialog is on the Air Client:
Audio Over. The number of the audio input line on the mixer.
Ratio. The ratio of over audio source to primary source audio, ranging from 0 (all primary sources) to 99
(all audio over source).
Speed and Effect. The Speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also set
which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located next to the time fields.
Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut.
On Time. This determines the start position of the event and how long after the start of the primary
event the audio is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5 seconds or the event arrives late;
however, you may use the Transition Audio Over to restart the audio when the primary event beings.
Note: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition Keyer
secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00:00.00.
Duration. Determines the length of time the event is overlaid. The event is only performed if the
primary event’s A/V Data is configured to use a Master Control Switcher.
Transition Audio Over (sTAO)

The secondary Transition Audio Over allows you to specify a secondary audio event to coincide with the
primary event in the same manner as a transition keyer event, as described in Keyer On/Off.
This event has a set of options that are identical to the audio over on/off secondary event, except that
the ontime option is missing (the ontime for a transition audio over event is set to 0).
ADC™ Air Client
• To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the duration
field blank.
Transition Audio Over dialog

Break
A break may be inserted at a point on the list where you would like the list to stop running. Events will
play out normally up to this event.
The first event after the Break event cues up as usual, but does not play and the program switches to
black. To restart a list after a break, click Play on the control panel. This list may also begin if a GPI
contact input is used or if preroll is initiated on a hard start event that is next on the list.
Comment (****)
Use this secondary event to enter notes into the play list. Comments are ignored during transmission.
Any text may be inserted into the title field of a comment.
ADC™ Air Client
Compile ID (cmID)
This type of event is used to label a compilation list with an ID. The tape ID of the compile tape should
be entered into the ID field.
Data Event (sDAT)

This type of secondary event is associated with a device but does not generate any video output.
Instead, the action specified by the event is performed at the time the event would be put on air, had
the event been associated with a video device.
For video disk servers, a data event is used to control and automate the deletion of spots from the
server. The use of this event with video disk servers requires an accurate scheduler or traffic program. If
the events are not used carefully, spots may be accidentally deleted in the video disk server. Secondary
data events are Secondary Events used to command serial devices requiring a simple command that
does not need to run a countdown on the time of an event.
This type of secondary event attaches to a primary event that plays at the time the command is sent to
the device to execute the data event command. The primary event can be any primary event for any
device.
• The command is sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID. As an example, the
commands for the video disk server are entered in the secondary event’s title.
• The command, Delete From Disk, is entered as DEL:XXXXXXXX:YY. X’s represent the spot ID and Y’s
represent the optional port value.
• The command, Get From Archive, is entered as GFA:XXXXXXXX:YY.
• The command, Delete From Archive, is entered as DFA:XXXXXXXX:YY.
Note: This secondary event may work differently based on the device being used.
IMPORTANT: The Secondary Data Event command is sent out in preroll. For example, in order to send
the command like a sAV or any other type of secondary event when the primary starts, an offset of 3
seconds must be added.
Barter Spot (sBAR)

Barter spot events are associated with a primary event and are logged to the AsRun log when the
primary event runs to completion and is logged. Barter spot events are treated as comments by the
automation system and are not played.
ADC™ Air Client
Barter spot is used for reconciliation with traffic systems. A barter spot is a source of audio/video that is
part of another audio/video source. It is not played as separate audio/video, but is treated as a
comment that is passed to the AsRun log and to the reconciliation process.
This event is attached to the primary event. When the primary event finishes running it is logged to the
AsRun log.
These events appear in the text AsRun log as Barter in the status field. In the enterprise traffic log for
example, they appear as BTR in the program type field. The appearance of the spots in the logs does not
positively indicate the spots have run. If the primary event runs, the spots are logged; however, the
spots may not have actually been on the primary material.
Record Switcher (sRSW)

Record switcher is a secondary event that performs extra switching for inputs. During a recording, this
switches to the secondary event’s source.
The name of the source to switch to is entered in the title field. This name must also be in the source
name table for the switcher that is supplying the video to the record device.
The event is only performed if the primary event’s device has the A/V data parameters configured to
specify the switcher number that has the matching name in its source name table.
Switcher Crosspoint (sXP)

This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for outputs. While an event plays, this function
switches to the secondary event’s source:destination. This type of secondary event allows the control of
multiple crosspoints during one primary event.
The name of the new source:destination is entered in the title field. Use the format SRC,DEST where SRC
is the name of the source and DEST, the destination. You may enter a maximum of 16 characters for the
title and the name you enter must also be defined in the switcher’s device parameter field for Source
Name and/or Destination Name for the switcher that is controlling the output for the primary event.
This type of event requires that the primary device have the specified switcher device configured for its
switching information. If the secondary event does not specify the source (title =, DEST), the input
crosspoint must be specified in the primary event’s device for the secondary event to default the
destination.
ADC™ Air Client
To control a Router other than the configured default: If the user wants to switch a router other than
to the one assigned in the primary AV table, then the router name must be entered in the ID field of the
sXP event.
Switcher Audio Crosspoint (AUD-XPT)

This is a secondary event – similar to a switcher crosspoint event - that performs extra switching for
audio outputs. While an event plays, this function switches to the secondary event’s audio
source:destination. This type of secondary event allows the control of multiple audio crosspoints during
one primary event.
• When selected for logging, the logging is done at zero crossing of the primary event.
• When "Switcher Audio Crosspoint" is selected in the configuration, and the "Control Audio Mode"
option is selected in the configuration:
 The Secondary Switching Parameter (sSP) field is neglected.
 A new secondary event "Switcher Audio Crosspoint" is used for the audio routing (shuffling).
 If a "Switcher Audio Crosspoint" secondary event is not attached to the primary, default values
are applied for routing as per the configuration.
Format of Title field:

 x1 x2 x3 x4
 x1 to x4 are input values for output 1 to 4
 X1 to x4 = 1 to 4.
• If any of the input (x1 to x4) is not valid, it is replaced by its default (Configuration) value.
• If 2 or more "Switcher Audio Crosspoint" secondary events are found (resulting from an
editing mistake), only the first one is taken into consideration.
Note: Audio routing is done on the device specified in the ID field, if valid. If ID field is not valid then
audio routing is done on the primary event to which the secondary Switcher Audio Crosspoint is
attached.
When the next event is preset, its corresponding cross point is normalized to the default as specified in
the configuration, provided the next event audio crosspoint is not the same as the current event.
Secondary Record (sREC)

This type of secondary event allows for the automatic recording and segmenting of live program
material for immediate playback to air. Unlike most record events, this event is used in a list that
combines record and playback activities. A secondary record event is attached to each primary event
that is being recorded.
ADC™ Air Client
Break Sync (sSYN)

Break sync contains an estimated time of day a pod will run, a deviation time and a time for a window of
opportunity for the operator to react to the event.
This event is normally be used on a list that contains only pods/breaks of commercials. The pods are:
 Separated by either an upcount event or by this Break sync event.
 Triggered to run by an external contact closure (GPI) or by clicking Play on the control panel.
In normal operation, a contact closure/play button is detected and the next pod on the list is played. The
break sync event is marked DONE immediately. The pod plays out until either an upcount event, break
sync event or the end of the list is encountered.
• If the next pod has not played by the time of day specified on its break sync event, plus its deviation,
the automation sends out a user notification to all automation clients. The event then waits for the
opportunity time for a client to respond to the notification.
• If no response is received at the end of this time, the automation marks each event in the pod and
the break sync event as being missed. It stops marking events as missed when it encounters an
upcounting event or break sync event.
• If the list was running an upcount event, that event is skipped and the next upcount event runs.
During the time the automation is waiting when the break sync occurs, the user notification is sent
to all clients. One or more clients are enabled to detect the user notification.
The enabled clients display a dialog box prompting the operator to click OK to Delete Pod and Keep
Pod. The dialog box is displayed only during the waiting time and will automatically close if the
operator does not respond. This is the equivalent to clicking OK to Delete Pod since the list on the
server will time out and mark the pod missed.
 If the operator clicks Keep Pod, a message is sent back to the server causing the server to mark
the break sync event as done, but leaves the pod intact waiting for the contact closure/play
button. There is no other user notification for this pod.
 If the contact closure/play button does not occur, the time of day for the break sync event for
the next pod may occur. To eliminate a potential problem, the next break sync event is used to
mark the previous pod missed. This occurs automatically at the time of day of the next break
sync event minus its deviation time. When this occurs, all events before this event are marked
missed.
 If the automation had been running an upcount event, then this upcounter and the next up-
counter before this break sync event are terminated before this event runs.
ADC™ Air Client
Secondary System (sSYS)

This event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignment during the execution of a
transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a primary event.
When this event type is run, it is able to move un-assigned device heads to the list that is running this
event or release device heads in order to make them available to another list. It is up to the traffic
department to schedule the assignment and release of heads so that two lists will not conflict in their
usage of these heads. This event is programmed by filling in the time, ID and title fields of the event with
control information. The time field controls the time when the event will run offset from the primary
event.
Event IDs
The following event IDs act as commands to the list:
Assign. Will assign the device and head(s) specified in the title field to the transmission list the event is
located in. The title format is: DEVICENAME,X,Y
• Where DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device, X is the head
number assigned to the list and ,Y is the number of other heads to be assigned.
Release. Will remove the device and head(s) specified in the event title field from the transmission list
the event is located in and return it back to the system as an unowned device head. The title format is
identical to the above described.
Protect. Performs a protect assignment on the device and head(s) to the device specified in the type
field.
• The title format is: PROTECTNAME, DEVICENAME,X,Y
• Where PROTECTNAME is the name of the device that is to be protected. DEVICENAME is the device
name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device, X is the head number assigned to the list, and Y is
the number of other heads to be assigned. You must first have assigned the primary device heads to
the list before assigning the protect heads. A space character may be substituted for the comma in
any of the title field commands.
Backtimed System (bSYS)

This secondary event works in the same manner as secondary system except that this event type runs
prior to the primary event by the time specified in the Time field.
ADC™ Air Client
System Event
This secondary event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignments during the
execution of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a primary
event. When this event type is run, it is able to move unowned device heads to the list running this
event or release device heads in order to make them available to another list. It is up to the traffic
department to schedule the assignment and release of heads so that two lists will not conflict in their
usage of these heads.
External (vDT)
Use an External secondary event to send commands or other information to a device through a device
server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending commands or other
information to a specific device on the device server.
To Insert an External secondary event

When you insert this secondary event, a dialog box opens that prompts you for the data you want to
send to a device. Normally, the dialog box is a text editor window, but if there is a special .dll file for the
device, this may vary.
1. Enter the data you want to send to a device on the network in the text editor.
2. After clicking OK, Air Client inserts a line in the play list or transmission window and enters into
Revise mode.
3. Enter the device ID name in the Id field. vDT is inserted in the Sec field.
ADC™ Air Client
4. Exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode, press <ALT+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select the
Cancel icon ( ).
Data Event with Data (sDAT)

Use this event to send commands and other information to a specific device on the device server.
To Insert a Data Event with Data

When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor, to enter the commands. The commands are
sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID.
1. Enter the data you want to send in the text editor.

2. After clicking OK, Air Client inserts a line in the play list or transmission window and enters into
Revise mode. sDT is inserted in the Sec field.
3. Exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode, press <ALT+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select the
Cancel icon ( ).
 The time in the time field is the offset from the preroll of the associated primary event.
 The commands are sent to the device at the offset time.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Appendix C
Appendix C
Device Error Messages
This section lists many of the Errors that can be generated by the ADC Device Server. Please note that
the Time of Day the error occurred, the list name, as well as the Device Name precede errors. The
quickest method to find your error in this document is to do a Find using only the text of the specific
error message less the Time of Day, list name and if displayed, Device Name.
• AIR COPY REMOVED FROM EVENT - The primary copy of the media was removed or ejected, and the
backup (Protect) copy became the primary copy. The media was not on-air.
• ANNOTATION CAUSED SHORT PROGRAM
• ANNOTATION MEDIA WAS EJECTED - The secondary record event was deleted. No record.
• ARM NOT INDEXED - The arm of the TCS90 cart. Machine is not properly indexed (not initialized or
problem).
• ARM OFF LINE: <Error Code> - One or more cassette handler component not indexed.
• AUDIO DATA ERROR LEVEL NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR
protocol returned back an Audio Data error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where on the
tape the error occurred.
• AUDIO READ AFTER WRITE NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR
protocol returned back an Audio Raw Verify error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where on
the tape the error occurred.
• Audio-over number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio Over.
• Audio-over number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio Over.
• AXIS OFF LINE - The arm cannot move in the axis (not initialized or problem).
• BAD BARCODE READ ON BIN: <Bin Number> - The barcode reader in the cart machine has detected
a label on the tape, but cannot properly read it.
• BARCODE READ LOST - An unknown error occurred in a cart machine when trying to read the
barcode label on a tape.
• BARCODE READER ERROR - An error occurred with the barcode reader.
• BIN: <Bin Number> IN USE BY VTR <Error Code> - BIN assigned to multiple tape.
• CACHING FAILURE-CHECK EVENT:<ID> List <Error Code> - Impossible to make a cache request. The
ID of the media seems bad.
• CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> COMMAND FORMAT ERROR - Bad format of the
command sent to the cart machine.
• CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> ILLEGAL COMMAND ID - Unknown command ID.
• CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> MARC BUFFER FULL - Cart machine buffer is full.
Impossible to run the command.
• CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> MARC BUSY - The cart machine is busy, the
command will not run.
ADC™ Air Client
• CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> MARC BUSY - The cart machine is busy.
• CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - INVALID PARAMETER - Cart command contained invalid
parameters.
• CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - INVALID PARAMETER <ErrorCode> - Bad command parameters
sent to the cart machine.
• CART ERROR ON BARCODE READER COMMAND - Problem with a barcode reader command.
• CART ERROR ON MISCELLANEOUS COMMAND - Message for every kind of errors (MISCELLANEOUS).
• CART ERROR ON ROBOT COMMAND - Problem with a robot command.
• CART ERROR ON VTR COMMAND - Problem with a VTR command.
• CART JARRED - Attempted a movement command while the emergence stop switch is activated.
• CART MALFUNCTION - <IDC_Format_OdeticCart> - General problem in the odetics carts.
• CART OTHER MALFUNCTION - M<ErrorCode> NO TIMECODE - There is no timecode reference in the
cart machine.
• CART OTHER MALFUNCTION - M<ErrorCode> TIMECODE ERROR - Timecode error with the cart
machine.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - BAD BARCODE READ ON BIN: <ErrorCode> - The barcode reader in
the cart machine has detected a label on the tape, but cannot properly read it.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> Abnormal End - The command wan abnormally
finished.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> Abnormal End - The command was abnormally
finished.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - Device connected but offline.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DEVICE RETURNED NAK, MINOR ERROR - The robot
responded with a NAK, instead of an ACK.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DOOR IS OPEN - The door of the robot is open.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> EJECT TIMEOUT - Eject command didn't run on time in
a robot.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> EJECT TIMEOUT - Eject command didn't run on time in
a robot.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> UNINITIALIZED - Robot not initialized.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> UNINITIALIZED - Robot not initialized.
• CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> Unknown Robot Error - The robot returned an
unknown problem.
ADC™ Air Client
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> CAN NOT CANCEL - Impossible to cancel the VTR
command.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMAND CANCEL - Cancel of a VTR command.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMAND CANCEL - Cancel of a VTR command.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMAND CANCEL - VTR command was cancelled.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMUNICATION ERROR - Communication error
between the VTR and the Device server.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMUNICATION ERROR - Communication error from a
VTR in the cart machine.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - Device connected but offline.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - VTR connected but offline.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - VTR from a VTR in the cart machine is
off line.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE WENT INTO LOCAL - The remote control from the
VTR in the cart machine is not able.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> HARDWARE ERROR - Hardware error for a VTR in the cart
machine.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> HARDWARE ERROR - Hardware error for the cart machine.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> MARC BUSY - The cart machine is busy, the VTR command
is not running.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> MARC SOFTWARE ERROR - VTR Cart machine software
problem.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> MARC SOFTWARE ERROR - VTR Cart machine software
problem.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> NO RESPONSE - No answer from a VTR in the cart
machine.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> NO VTR - There is no VTR connected.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> REC INHIBIT - Recording impossible with a VTR in the cart
machine.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> SERVO TROUBLE - Servo problem.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> TAPE TROUBLE - Problem with a tape in a VTR.
• CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> UNDEFINED COMMAND - Undefined command sent to a
• CASSETTE STUCK IN ELEVATOR - POSSIBLE VTR PROBLEM - The door on the cart machine is open.
• CHC SLIDER NOT RETRACTED - Attempted a load port command before previous stall condition
cleared.
• COMMAND TIMED OUT, RECEIVED NO REPLY - Command got no reply.
• COMMUNICATIONS LOST WITH CART - A Cart Machine stopped communicating over the RS422
connection.
ADC™ Air Client
• COMMUNICATIONS LOST WITH DEVICE - The communication between the device server and the
video server is lost.
• COMMUNICATIONS LOST WITH DEVICE <Error Code> - A device stopped communicating over the
RS422 connection.
• COMMUNICATIONS RESTORED WITH DEVICE - The communication between the device server and
the video server is restored.
• COMPILE MEDIA NOT IN POSITION TO PLAY - Rollover between compile reels failed.
• Device Error <Device Name> - INTERNAL ERROR - RESULT BUFFER OVERRUN - The buffer of the
video server is full. The command won't be run.
• Device Error <Device Name> SWITCHPRESET - VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD
CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - From SwitchPreset.
• DEVICE - DIAGNOSTIC CODE:<Error Code> ID: <ID> - Error code return for a media in the video disk.
• DEVICE - DIAGNOSTIC CODE:<Error Code> ID: <ID> - Specific error from the odetics cart. The errors
have to be checked in the protocol of the device.
• DEVICE - DIAGNOSTIC CODE:<Error Code> ID: <ID> - Used by video disk , do not use in diagnostic.
The errors have to been checked in the protocol of the device.
• DEVICE DELETED SPOT: <ID> - Spot deleted from the device. Impossible to play it.
• DEVICE ERROR - PORT NOT VALID - Problem with a port of the video disk.
• DEVICE ERROR - REPORTED FROM DEVICE: <Error Code> - Error code return for the video disk.
• DEVICE ERROR - REPORTED FROM DEVICE: <ErrorCode> - Used by video disk , do not use in
diagnostic. The errors have to been checked in the protocol of the device.
• DEVICE NAME NOT VALID - The major device specified by the system resource event could not be
found.
• DEVICE NOT CUED IN TIME, HOLDING TIME:<ID> List <Error Code> - Media not cued in time in the
video disk.
• DEVICE NOT CUED IN TIME, HOLDING TIME:<ID> List <Error Code> - Media not cued in time.
• DEVICE NOT IN EDIT ON - After a command to go into edit on mode, the device indicates that it is
not in edit on mode.
• DEVICE PLAY/RECORD STATUS LATE: <ID> - Problem with the time delay of the device.
• DEVICE RECORDED SPOT: <ID> - Spot recorded in the device. Can be played.
• DEVICE RETURNED ACK - Received unexpected ack.
• DEVICE RETURNED NAK, MINOR ERROR <Error Code> - A device returned either a NAK through the
protocol or a problem with communications existed.
• DEVICE RETURNED UNEXPECTED NAK, MINOR ERROR <Error Code> - Received unexpected nak.
• DEVICE SENT CUE CMD: <ID> - ID in copy queue is not in spot collection.
• DEVICE SENT PROTECT CMD: <ID> - Record media, spot marked for cache.
• DEVICE SERVER LOST BACKGROUND: <Error Code> - Event pointer nil when unregistered.
• DEVICE SERVER REFERENCE VIDEO LOST - Reference Video missing. Shifting to PC Clock for clocking
input. (Timecode also missing)
• DEVICE SERVER TIMECODE LOST - Reference Timecode missing. Shifting from timecode to reference
video for clocking input
• DEVICE TIMEOUT -RETRYING COMMAND: <Error Code> - A timeout occurred when waiting for the
response of a device.
ADC™ Air Client
• DEVICE WENT INTO LOCAL - The device is no longer under automation control. Communications
exist, but the device will not respond to commands.
• DIAGNOSTIC STATUS ERROR <Error Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned the
diagnostic status bit set in the extended status. The minor error code has the actual error code as
defined by the Sony VTR Protocol.
• DISK ERROR - AUDIO OVERLOAD - Problem with the configuration of the audio in the video server.
• DISK ERROR - COMMAND NOT SUPPORTED - The video file server received a command not yet
implemented.
• DISK ERROR - COMMAND WHILE BUSY - The video server had an error while is busy.
• DISK ERROR - CUE NOT DONE - The media was not cued on the right timecode.
• DISK ERROR - DISK IS FULL, RECORD FAILED - The video disk server is full. No recording.
• DISK ERROR - ID ALREADY EXISTS: <ID> - ID already exist in the video server. Message for a record.
• DISK ERROR - ID DELETE PROTECTED: <ID> - ID protected, do not delete from the video server.
• DISK ERROR - ID NOT FOUND: <ID> - The media in the video server is not in the device storage.
• DISK ERROR - ID STILL PLAYING: <ID> - Impossible to stop the media during a play.
• DISK ERROR - ID STILL RECORDING: <ID> - Impossible to stop the media during a record.
• DISK ERROR - ID TRANSFERRED: <ID> - Impossible to play an ID from the video server it was already
transferred.
• DISK ERROR - ILLEGAL VALUE - Bad value sent to the video server in a command.
• DISK ERROR - INVALID ID: <ID> - The format of the ID is not correct.
• DISK ERROR - INVALID PORT - Configuration conflict with port.
• DISK ERROR - NO AUDIO INPUT - There's no input audio flow in the video server.
• DISK ERROR - NO REFERENCE INPUT - The video file server has had the reference video removed.
• DISK ERROR - NO VIDEO INPUT - No video input in the video disk.
• DISK ERROR - NO VIDEO PORT OPEN - There's no port configured for the playout.
• DISK ERROR - NOT IN CUED STATE - The state of the media in the device server is not already cued.
• DISK ERROR - PORT NOT ACTIVE - The port of the video server is not active. The command won't be
run.
• DISK ERROR - PORT NOT IDLE - The port of the video server is not well reinitialized.
• DISK ERROR - PORT PLAYING OR ACTIVE - The port is already used for a command. Impossible to use
it for a new one.
• DISK ERROR - SYSTEM ERROR - General problem in the video server.
• DISK ERROR - VIDEO PORT DOWN - The playout port is down.
• DISK ERROR - WRONG PORT TYPE - Wrong port assignment in the video server.
• DISK ERROR-CUE OR OPERATION FAILED: <ID> - Impossible to cue an event in the video server. This
message is used for another command.
• DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS CHECKSUM ERROR - Time out between the device server and the
video server. Problem with the checksum of the video server answer.
• DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS FRAMING ERROR - Time out between the device server and the
video server. Problem with the format of the video server answer.
• DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS OVER FLOW - Time out between the device server and the video
server. Problem with the format of the video server answer.
ADC™ Air Client
• DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS PARITY ERROR - Time out between the device server and the video
server. Problem with the parity bit of the video server answer.
• DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS TIME OUT - Time out between the device server and the video
server. No response from the video server.
• DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS UNDEFINED ERROR - Undefined error from the video server.
• DOOR OPEN TIMEOUT - The door stayed open too long.
• DUPLICATE TAPE: <ID> In BIN: <Bin Number> - There at least two identical ID in the bins of the cart
Machine.
• ELEVATOR OFF LINE - The robotic elevator is in an offline state.
• ELEVATOR REPLY TIMEOUT - The elevator of the cart machine didn't move on time.
• EMERGENCY STOP ACTIVE - Manual intervention has removed the device from service.
• ERROR - DEVICE ACCESS ERROR - Access denied in the device.
• ERROR - DEVICE OUT OF MEMORY - The memory of the device is full.
• ERROR - DISK CACHE RECORDER FAILED ID: <ID> - Problem with the recording during the cache.
• ERROR - DISK FAILED PLAY ID: <ID> - Problem to play a media from the video server.
• ERROR - DISK FAILED RECORD ID: <ID> - Problem to record a media to the video server.
• ERROR - LOST DISK REPLY(S) - Problem with the disk of the video server.
• ERROR - RESENT LAST COMMAND - A command have not been executed and lost from the memory
of the video server.
• ERROR - UNKNOWN RESPONSE - The answer from the video server is wrong.
• EVENT NOT PLAYED - INVALID OFFSET ON SECONDARY - A secondary GPI event that was to be run
twice on the same primary event had an overlapping start time on the subsequent GPI event.
• EVENT NOT PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND - The event was unable to play because the ID
was not found in any device
• EVENT NOT PLAYED - MEDIA NOT THREADED - The event was unable to play because the media was
not threaded into a device.
• EVENT NOT PLAYED - NOT CUED IN TIME - The event was unable to play because it was unable to
cue.
• EVENT NOT PLAYED - SKIP ISSUED - The event began to play, but the operator intervened by
invoking the skip command.
• EVENT NOT PLAYED - SECONDARY MEDIA MISSING - GMT Error. A GMT transfer failed because the
secondary events were not valid, such as in a baseband transfer.
• EVENT SKIPPED - ABNORMAL END - An event encountered an end of media condition such as end of
tape or end of recorded clip. The media stopped playing and the next event was run. (If a Protect
copy exists this message is not generated)
• EVENT UNABLE TO CUE - NO SOM - The Start of Message in the event is invalid for the material.
Cannot cue the material to the specified location
• EVENT UNABLE TO RECORD, REC INHIBIT ON - The device has recording disabled. Typically, a VTR
with the rec inhibit tab set
• FETCH OR INSERT TO EMPTY OR FULL LOCATION - Try to insert in full bin or try to take a tape from
an empty bin.
• GMT Media Transfer Failed, Time = - A failure was reported back to the list for a media transfer by a
requester. The media was not transferred.
ADC™ Air Client
• GMT-Abort event due to archive or Disk time out - Abort event due to the archive manager or the
video file server timeout.
• GMT-Baseband device I/O failure - A problem occurred during the baseband transfer.
• GMT-Event aborted during running state - The running GMT event aborted during execution.
• GMT-Event ID not found in source device - Event ID not found in the source device.
• GMT-Found Buffer full during Global Delete - A buffer overflow error occurred during a global
delete.
• GMT-Found unknown/unimplemented disk command - Found unknown / unimplemented VDCP
command during transfer.
• GMT-ID already existed in destination device - The media already exists in the device storage of the
destination device.
• GMT-List event cut or Ran Short - An event on the GMT list was cut.
• GMT-Listed ID not found in Distributor collection - The media wasn't found by the distributor.
• GMT-Missing Disk Handle while needed - There is no disk handle parameter available for the
activity.
• GMT-No Fiber Distributor to do the MOV after BB transfer - No fibre distributor available to do the
move after the baseband transfer has occurred.
• GMT-No Fiber Distributor to do the MOV after CFA - There is no fibre distributor to do a copy after
the move from archive has occurred.
• GMT-No Global delete targets configured - No global delete targets are configured in the distributor.
• GMT-Request success - The request succeeded.
• GMT-Requestor lost communication with Distributor - The requester lost communications with the
distributor
• GMT-Transfer Success - Distributor transfer media in Fiber/Archive/WAN routing mode is successful.
• GMT-VACP ERR COMM FAIL - VACP response from archive manager. Problem of communication.
• GMT-VACP ERR ID EXISTS - VACP response from archive manager. The ID is already existing.
• GMT-VACP ERR ID NOT FOUND - VACP response from archive manager. The ID was not in a device
storage. The archive manager cannot find the specified ID.
• GMT-VACP ERR INIT - VACP response from archive manager. Problem at the initialization.
• GMT-VACP ERR INSUFF MEMORY - VACP response from archive manager. Problem of memory.
• GMT-VACP ERR INSUFF SVCS - Insufficient services.
• GMT-VACP ERR MACRO FAIL - The Archive manager reports (CFA/CTA) macro command is failed.
• GMT-VACP ERR OP COMPLETED - Inverse of Incomplete Operation.
• GMT-VACP ERR OPERATION ABORTED - VACP response from archive manager. The command was
aborted because of an unspecified error.
• GMT-VACP ERR PARM INVALID - VACP response from archive manager. Bad parameters in the
command.
• GMT-VACP ERR PARTITION SMALL - The partition is too small to hold the material.
• GMT-VACP ERR PORT_BUSY - VACP response from archive manager. The port is busy. Impossible to
run the command.
• GMT-VACP ERR RW FAILURE - VACP response from archive manager. Problem on read write mode.
• GMT-VACP ERR SETUSERID - VACP Client is using wrong user ID to do the login.
ADC™ Air Client
• GMT-VACP ERR TAPE UNAVAIL - VACP response from archive manager. No available tape to perform
the operation.
• GMT-VACP ERR TIMEOUT - VACP response from archive manager. Time out on a command.
• GMT-VACP ERR UNKNOWN Command Received - VACP response from archive manager. The
command is not a valid one.
• GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_CHECKSUM - VACP response from archive manager. The checksum indicates
an error in transmission.
• GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_FRAMING - VACP response from archive manager. A framing error was
detected in the message.
• GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_ID_CONFLICT - VACP response from archive manager. The ID being sent to the
archive already exists.
• GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_ILLEGAL_VALUE - VACP response from archive manager. The response is a
NAK, as a result of an illegal value being sent.
• GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_OVERRUN - VACP response from archive manager. An over run condition was
detected in the message.
• GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_PARITY - VACP response from archive manager. A parity error was detected in
the message.
• GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_UNDEFINED - VACP response from archive manager. The response is a NAK, of
undefined error type.
• GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_UNSUPPORTED - VACP response from archive manager. The command is not
supported by the archive manager.
• GMT-VACP SUCCESS - VACP response from archive manager. Clip moved successfully.
• GMT-VDCP Archive disk handle not configured - VDCP archive disk handle not configured.
• GMT-VDCP_SUCCESS - VDCP response from archive manager. The command ran with success.
• HARD ERROR - A Sony Protocol VTR returned back the Hard Error bit enabled indicating some
physical problem with the VTR or Tape.
• HARDWARE TROUBLE BUZZER ALARM - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned the buzzer
bit set in the extended status.
• HEAD STILL IN PLAY - The system resource event attempted to assign a device that was in play. The
assignment did not take place.
• HUB OFF LINE - Attempted a load port command with no load port installed. Attempted a transfer
command with no transfer mechanism installed.
• ID DOES NOT MATCH, MACRO LSB <Error Code> - ID doesn't match.
• INCORRECT SIZE AT LOCATION - Insert command attempted to an incorrect size location.
• INTERNAL ERROR - BAD COMMAND GENERATED - The format of the command is wrong.
• INVALID EVENT COMMAND - The system resource event was not valid and could not be decoded by
the list.
• INVALID HEAD NUMBER - The minor device head specified by the system resource event was not a
valid head number.
• Keyer number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Keyer.
• Keyer number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Keyer.
• List will stop on next event - Manual intervention occurred, List will stop on next event, id field is
empty.
ADC™ Air Client
• LOAD PORT FULL - CANNOT UNLOAD VTR - Load port is full in the procart.
• LOAD PORT INDEX, OPEN, CLOSED ARM IN FRONT ?? - Load port problem, it can be a bad
reinitialization, or the load port is open or the arm is blocked just in front.
• LOAD PORT NOT INDEXED - Bad load port initialization.
• LOAD PORT STALL NOT CLEARED - Tape were not put out of the load port.
• MACRO BUSY ERROR - A Sony Cart machine returned back a status of Macro Busy on a macro
command. This error condition should never occur in a Sony Cart Machine.
• MACRO DISTURBED - A Sony Cart machine returned back via the protocol that a Marco Command
was either terminated or disturbed.
• MACRO NOT FOUND, MACRO LSB <Error Code> - Couldn't find macro.
• MAIN ROBOT - General robot problem.
• MAIN ROBOT, CLAW 1 - Problem with the gripper 1 of the robot.
• MAIN ROBOT, CLAW 2 - Problem with the gripper 2 of the robot.
• MAIN ROBOT, X AXIS - Problem with the X Axis arm robot.
• MAIN ROBOT, Y AXIS - Problem with the Y Axis arm robot.
• Manual Intervention of System - Indicates Manual Intervention on the switcher.
• MASTER MEDIA FAILURE - DURING PREROLL - A failure of the primary media occurred during pre-roll
of the media. No switching to a protect copy could occur at this time.
• MASTER MEDIA FAILURE - PROTECT COPY NOT PLAYING - A failure of the primary media occurred
but the backup media was unable to be switched into the on-air video stream.
• MASTER MEDIA FAILURE - PROTECT COPY SWITCHED - A failure of the primary media caused the
backup media (Protect) to be switched into the on-air video stream.
• MECHANICAL INTERFERENCE - Mechanical interference.
• MEDIA DEVICE NOT PROPERLY INITIALIZED - The media wasn't initialized properly.
• MEDIA UNABLE TO CUE - ID: <ID> - Device is unable to cue.
• MODE SET TO DISABLE MOVEMENT WHEN DOOR OPEN - In the Procart cart machine you can enable
or not a sound indicating that the door in the Procart cart machine is open and that you have to
close it.
• MOVE WITH LIGHT CURTAIN ACTIVE - While moving the robotics, an interruption of the light curtain
was detected.
• MULTIPLE GRIPPER ERRORS
• MULTIPLE GRIPPER ERRORS, ARM <Error Code> PLACED OUT OF SERVICE - Gripper is out of service.
• NAK RETURNED FROM SWITCHER - The switcher responded with a NAK, instead of an ACK.
• NO ANNOTATION EVENTS TO RECORD - The secondary record event was not inserted. No record.
• NO CASSETTE IN GRIPPER - Procart cart machine. No tape in the gripper.
• NO MORE BINS TO STORE MEDIA - The bins in the cart machine are all full. There is no more room
for tapes in the cart machine.
• NO VTR AT LOCATION - There is no VTR installed at the physical location.
• ON AIR EVENT PACKED - LIST WILL STOP - The on-air event was playing, and the packing of the list
forced the deletion of the event.
• ON AIR EVENT WAS CUT - The on-air event was playing, and it was deleted from the playlist
• ON AIR EVENT WAS EJECTED - Media was ejected during playout
ADC™ Air Client
• ON AIR EVENT WAS RECUED - The event began to play, but the operator intervened by invoking the
recue command.
• OUTPORT IS FULL - PLEASE EMPTY IT - The I/O port of the cart machine is full. It must be emptied so
that the current ejection process continues.
• PGM crosspoint number Audio switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio
crosspoint number.
• PGM crosspoint number Audio switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio
crosspoint number.
• PGM crosspoint number Video switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on video
crosspoint number.
• PGM crosspoint number Video switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on video
crosspoint number.
• PLAY ISSUED - MEDIA IN LOCAL - The device received the play command, but the returned status
indicates that it did not go into play mode.
• PLAYOUT TIMES OVERLAP - Events overlapped in the transmission list.
• PRESETEFFECT BEGIN VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> -
Beginning of PresetEffect.
• PRESETEFFECT END VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - End of
PresetEffect.
• PROGRAM/INTERFACE ERROR - SYSTEM ALARM - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned
the system alarm bit set in the extended status.
• PROTECT COPY NOT USABLE – REMOVED - The protect copy of the media was removed or ejected,
but the primary copy was not. The media was not on-air.
• PROTECT MEDIA NOT PLAYED - NOT CUED - The secondary event was unable to play because the
media was not cued in time.
• PROTECT NAME NOT VALID - The major device to be used as a protect device, specified by the
system resource event could not be found.
• PUT TAPE FROM VTR: <Error Code> INTO BIN: <Bin Number> - Problem with an unthread tape for a
VTR to a bin in the odetics cart.
• PUT TAPE: <ID> FROM BIN: <Bin Number> INTO VTR: <Error Code> - Problem with a threading tape
in a VTR of an odetics cart.
• RECORD ENDED PREMATURELY - The event for a record operation terminated abnormally.
• RECORD EVENT WAS CUT - The record event was recording, and it was deleted from the record list.
• RECORD NOT STARTED - Event failed to start.
• REFERENCE VIDEO MISSING - The VTR has lost the reference video signal.
• REMOVE TAPE FROM VTR, INSERT VIA I/O PORT - Somebody put a tape manually into a VTR instead
of the load port.
• REMOVE TAPES FROM VTRS, INSERT VIA I/O PORT - Somebody put tapes manually into a VTR
instead of the load port.
• RESEAT CASSETTE IN BIN: <Bin Number> AND INIT ROBOT - Put the tape in its bin and reinitialize the
robot.
• Return to Automated Control of System - Indicates the switcher is back to the list control.
ADC™ Air Client
• ROBOT WARNING number V<ErrorCode> VTR number <ID> - Problem with a VTR from the MARC
cart machine.
• SERIAL CONTROL WENT INTO AUTOMATION - The device is now under automation control. This is
the reverse of AUTO_ENABLE_OFF.
• SERIAL CONTROL WENT INTO LOCAL - The device is no longer under automation control.
Communications exist, but the device will not respond to commands.
• SETKEYON END VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - End of
DoSetKeyOn.
• SETMIXON END VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - End of
DoSetMixOn.
• STANDBYON ISSUED - MEDIA IN LOCAL - The device received the standby command, but the
returned status indicates that it did not go into standby mode
• SWITCHER COMMAND QUEUE FULL <Error Number> - From PutQueue, when queue is full.
• SWITCHER DID NOT RESPOND TO REQUEST - The switcher is no longer communicating.
• SYSTEM ERROR: NO DATAGRAM NCBS - DOS Server network error, obsolete error
• TAKE WAS SENT VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - From
Background, just after sending take.
• TAPE TROUBLE - A Sony Protocol VTR returned back the Tape Trouble bit enabled indicating some
problem with the tape.
• TARGETING OR DOOR OPEN - Procart cart machine. The door is either open or the tape could be put
in the VTR.
• THREAD FAILURE - DOOR OPEN OR SYSTEM DOWN - <Error Code> - The threading of a tape into the
cart VTR has failed. The elevator may have become jammed or the VTR jammed.
• TRANSITION - INPUT CROSSPOINT: <CrosspointInput> <-> OUTPUT CROSSPOINT:
<CrosspointOutput> - From transition or/and control panel.
• TRANSPORT MECHANISM MUST BE EMPTIED MANUALLY - Gripper has to be emptied manually.
• TROUBLE IN DEVICE SERVO - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned the servo alarm bit set
in the extended status.
• TROUBLE WITH OUTPORT - PLEASE CHECK - On those cart machines that have an I/O port,
attempting to put a tape into the I/O port failed because of a hardware problem with the I/O port.
• UNABLE TO ASSIGN HEAD - Using the system resource assignment event, the device that was to be
assigned to the list could not be assigned.
• UNABLE TO RELEASE HEAD - Using the system resource assignment event, the device that was to be
released from the list could not be released.
• UNKNOWN MARC ERROR - Unknown MARC cart machine problem.
• UNKNOWN RESPONSE FROM CART <Error Code> - Undefined problem from the LMS cart machine.
• UNKNOWN THREAD ERROR - <Error Code> - A Sony Cart returned an unknown Macro completion
code when the threading of a tape into a VTR failed.
• USERBITS NOT VALID, DEVICE NOT SET TO EJECT - A VTR was set to keep the tape even if an eject
was issued, but the userbit associated with the tape was not valid.
• VENUS NOT LOCKED TO TIMECODE - Venus doesn't get any timecode.
ADC™ Air Client
• VIDEO DATA ERROR LEVEL NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR
protocol returned back an Video Data error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where on the
tape the error occurred.
• VIDEO READ AFTER WRITE NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR
protocol returned back an Video Raw Verify error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where on
the tape the error occurred.
• VTR COMMAND TIMEOUT - The VTR command wasn't made on time.
• VTR EJECT FAILURE - CHECK FOR JAM - <Error Code> - The VTR did not eject the tape when
requested.
• VTR ERROR number<Bin Number> - Problem with a tape between the VTR and the bin of the cart.
• VTR PROBLEM - CHECK FOR JAM - <Error Code> - A VTR in a cart machine had a failure and is off-
line.
• VTR STATUS : <Bin Number> - <Bin Number> - Status of the VTR returned to the device server.
• WARNING-SPOT SHORTER THAN SCHEDULED: <ID> - The spot in the video server is too short to play
well the next event.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Appendix D
Appendix D
System Timing
The purpose of this section is to provide a step-by-step guide to system timing to ensure frame accurate
operation of the ADC system.
If a customer says that his Video Server is playing out several frames late and needs to adjust the
"number of frames to send play early" parameter, the cause is likely to be the frame inaccuracy of the
source VTR or the latency of the router. The following process will ensure the frame accuracy of the
source VTR, the router and the Video Server.
Requirements
For all tests, a record capable VTR not under automation control is required. This VTR should be fed with
time-of-day timecode from the same source as the Device Server. The VTR should be set to external
timecode generation. This ensures that any recording made with this VTR will have time-of-day
timecode embedded in the recording.
The video input to the record VTR should be an output of the router. Temporarily configure the A/V
routing tables so that the switch-only device (see below) and the playback VTR are both switched to the
same destination on the router - the input to the record VTR.
Verify the source VTR and router's accuracy

Steps 1 and 2 may be done simultaneously.
1. Set the list pre-roll for 5 seconds. This ensures that the VTR is frame accurate. All Media Lists and
GMT Lists that use VTRs or cart machines as sources should have their pre-roll set to 5 seconds to
allow VTRs to get up to speed.
2. Prepare a test playlist similar to the one below (Fig. 1). The essential elements are a VTR event
sandwiched between two switch-only events. The VTR’s timecode window superimposed output
must be sent to the router input for this VTR. The SOM of the tape should be to the nearest 10
seconds, as should the hard start time. In an NTSC drop frame environment, avoid a start time at
zero seconds, zero frames.
3. Start the recording VTR. Roll the test playlist and allow the three events to play out.
Validating Frame Accuracy

Once the recording has completed, two things may be checked.
1. First, check that the VTR was playing frame-accurately. Rewind the recording to any section of the
VTR event. The seconds and frames in the timecode window on the monitor should be the same as
the seconds and frames displayed on the VTR which has performed the recording.
ADC™ Air Client
If they are not, then adjust the playback VTR's Edit Compensation: "Sync Adjust" parameter.
2. Next, the frame accuracy of the router may be checked. The first frame of video from the VTR event
should end in x0:00 and the last frame should be x9:24 (for PAL) or x9:29 (for NTSC). If these values
are incorrect, the latency of the router needs to be adjusted. For example, if the first frame is x0:02
and the last frame is x0:01 the router is switching two frames late.
Latency > Switcher Latency: Adjust the router's latency to –2 frames and repeat the test.
Verify the Video Servers' accuracy

Now that the source VTR and router have been verified to be frame accurate, the Video Server's record
and playout ports can be checked.
ADC™ Air Client
1. Using either GMT or the Media Client, configure the playback VTR used above as the source device.
Again, use a list pre-roll of 5 seconds to ensure that the source device behaves consistently. Ideally,
the same 10-second clip should be used along with the superimposed output of the source VTR as
before.
2. Autocopy (using the Media Client) or allow GMT to record the clip to the Video Server being tested.
3. Once the clip has been recorded, a playlist similar to the list created earlier should be prepared, but
with the playback VTR replaced with the playback Video Server port. Make a recording of the three
playout events as before.
Again, the playback of the recorded sequence will determine two things – the frame accuracy of the
recording and of the playback.
4. That the seconds and frames of the timecode of both the timecode window and VTR timecode
display are synchronized does not necessarily mean that all is well. This could mean that the
recording is a frame late and the playback is a frame early. Shuttle to the start of the Video Server
clip.
5. Is the first frame the correct frame with a timecode of x0:00? Shuttle to the end of the Video Server
clip. Is the last frame x9:24 (for PAL) or x9:29 (for NTSC)? If the answer to both is yes then the
system is correctly timed. If the answer to either is no or the seconds and frames are not
synchronized, then a timing adjustment needs to be made.
6. Ensure that the recording will be frame accurate by playing back the clip from the Video Server with
no events before or after it. In addition, switch the Video Server output to the recording VTR before
this event is run to ensure that no crosspoint switching is occurring. This does not need to be a hard
start event but does need to be recorded on the VTR.
7. Is the first frame x0:00 and the last x0:24 or x0:29? If not, the recording is not frame accurate and
the "number of frames to send record early" parameter should be adjusted accordingly on the Video
Server's record port.
8. Once this timing is correct, repeat the test with two switch-only events either side of the Video
Server event.
9. Any error in this test will therefore be in the playback. This may be remedied by adjusting the
number of "Frames to Send Play Early" parameter on the playout port of the Video Server.
ADC™ Air Client
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Appendix E
Appendix E
Tips and Good Habits
Following these guidelines will help ensure more trouble-free operation in your daily use in your day-to-
day use of the system. It is imperative that good habits be established from the start with your new
automation system. The two most important of these "Good Habit" tips are explained below.
1. Fix Before You Append.
 Make sure you ALWAYS fix any errors on the playlist BEFORE the list file is appended. The
workflow needs to be adjusted (if it isn’t already) to accommodate someone taking 10 – 20
minutes (eventually it will be this fast!, or even faster) to open, check, fix and SAVE the playlist
file, the night before, right before the append step.
 Why is this so important? There are critical errors that may appear on a playlist that may stop
the list or (in very rare cases) cause for list corruption so these checked for/corrected BEFORE a
list is appended. When a list is appended, the list file is added to the active RAM of the device
server. If the Traffic system, or translator somehow had a glitch or other problem when creating
the playlist file, the file may contain corruption. If this corruption is added to the active
transmission list your playlist may hang or stop, or even worse, your device server may crash
taking all your active transmission lists off the air, and stopping your Record Lists as well.
 When a new list comes in from Traffic, it should ALWAYS be opened in the Playlist Editor
(File/Open Playlist) FIRST and should be checked for any common housekeeping type errors,
then SAVED. Recurring errors should not happen very often. Going forward it is important that
Master Control work with Traffic and with Automation Support to get these "repeat offender"
type recurring errors to stop appearing on the logs. Remember, once Traffic has something in
their formats correctly, and the Translator is tweaked accordingly, repeat errors will end up a
thing of the past, and a rarity. And, at this point the editing/fixing of tomorrow’s playlist will go
from taking over an hour to fix, to taking only a mere 5-15 minutes to check, fix and save.
 A pre-fixed list is also important so that if you have a problem and need to reload the
transmission list, then your changes will have been saved.
 Active transmission list editing should be reserved for last-minute write in log changes or other
routine day-of-air adjustments. A "race against the clock" type model for fixing playlist errors
should be avoided as this will significantly increase the likelihood of causing list corruption, and
not to mention risk incorrect content airing and increase the chances of critical problems being
missed outright and air being compromised as a result.
Note: ANY LAST-MINUTE or write-in type changes that need to be done on the active list should
always be done at a point where the list is not transitioning through spots. In other words, avoid
REVISE mode on an active list while transitioning (in a break, etc) when possible.
2. Avoid Recycling Numbers/Stay On Top Of Purging Content.
Avoid recycling numbers, or stay on top of purging the database records and content associated
with recycled numbers. It is recommended that the reuse of numbers is avoided if at all possible. If
this is not possible (Traffic limitation) then there are a few steps below that should be taken to avoid
major on-air problems…
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Appendix E
 Get in the habit of always incorporating the intended air date in the title field of all recurring
shows; example – "Judge Judy" as "Judge Judy FR8/24" and use this logic for episodic/topical
promos as well – "MON 11p topical" as MON 8/27 Topical"
 The second, equally important step is to have a few people stay on top of purging this old
content at least once or twice a week. If old content is not purged from the system then the
feed for the next episode of the same number will stay red and will not record. If content is not
purged completely (from both database and server) then old content may accidentally re-air, or
new content may attempt to air with the timecode values and durations from last week’s show.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Appendix F
Appendix F
About AFD Codes
The following information is provided for background reference. AFD codes are valid in baseband SDI
and DVB/ATSC transport streams.
• SP is ‘shoot and protect’. It protects the centre 14:9 region in a 4:3 original. These are ADF codes 13
to 16.
• TA is’ Top Aligned’ and is AFD code 2 and 3. These are not recommended for ASI transport streams
used in the American ATSC standard. (This is the US equivalent of Freeview)
Code Description
0 ETSI: reserved; ATSC: undefined
1 reserved
2 ETSI: 16:9 active picture (top aligned); ATSC: "not recommended"
3 ETSI: 14:9 active picture (top aligned); ATSC: "not recommended"
4 ETSI: box > 16:9 (center): wider than 16:9 active picture. The aspect ratio of the source
area is not given, and the size of the top/bottom bars is not indicated.
ATSC: bar data (indicating the extent of top, bottom, left, and right bars) should be
transmitted when using this code.
5–7 reserved
8 Full Frame image, same as the frame (4:3 or 16:9).
9 4:3 Image: Full Frame in 4:3 frame, Pillarbox in 16:9 frame.
10 16:9 Image: Letterbox in 4:3 frame, Full Frame in 16:9 frame.
11 14:9 Pillarbox/Letterbox image.
12 unused
13 4:3 with shoot and protect 14:9 centre. The term "shoot and protect" is not explained in
the standard, but means that the areas above and below the central 14:9 region of the
4:3 active picture can be trimmed without losing important detail.
14 16:9 with shoot and protect 14:9 centre. Here, the areas to the right and left of the
central 14:9 region of the 16:9 active picture can be trimmed without losing important
detail.
15 16:9 with shoot and protect 4:3 centre. Here, the areas to the right and left of the
central 4:3 region of the 16:9 active picture can be trimmed without losing important
detail.
ADC™ Air Client
Operations and Installation Appendix F
Mapping Abbreviations to AFD code values

The following image illustrates mapping abbreviations to AFD code values.

Adc Air Client v4.25.11 Ops Install Ref 20151202 2

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Adc Air Client v4.25.11 Ops Install Ref 20151202 2

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Operations and Installation

ADC™ Air Client

Support Contact Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 2

Event Data Fields ................................................................................................................................ 39

Getting Started .................................................................................................... 42

On-Air Playback Operations ................................................................................. 60

To View an ON AIR List / Transmission List ............................................................................................ 61

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 5

Manage the Operation Log..................................................................................................................... 87

Playlist Editing Operations ................................................................................. 117

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 7

Show/Hide Columns in a Pull List ..................................................................................................... 151

Managing Resource Windows ............................................................................ 156

Managing Compile Lists ..................................................................................... 176

Error Management ............................................................................................ 180

Emergency Operations....................................................................................... 183

Automated Recording ........................................................................................ 187

Barcode Event .................................................................................................... 192

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 9

Logging .............................................................................................................. 198

WinCmms .......................................................................................................... 201

Global Media Transfer (GMT) ............................................................................ 203

ADC AirFlex ........................................................................................................ 206

ADC FlexSync ..................................................................................................... 209

LinkList ............................................................................................................... 211

Air Client Installation ......................................................................................... 212

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 10

Upgrade Note ................................................................................................................................... 213

Configuring System Components ....................................................................... 217

Configuring System Properties ........................................................................... 236

Hide Secondary Event Keys .................................................................................................................. 267

Appendix A ........................................................................................................ 284

Appendix B......................................................................................................... 287

Data Event (sDAT) ................................................................................................................................. 296

Appendix C ......................................................................................................... 303

Appendix D ........................................................................................................ 315

Appendix E ......................................................................................................... 319

Appendix F ......................................................................................................... 321

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 13

Air Client Overview

About Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPV6)

Minimum System Requirements

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 14

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 15

Event Type Field Values

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 16

Note: This option is not currently supported by Versio.

Valid secondary events include:

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 18

Hard Start Events

Extended event types (back-timed and end-timed event type qualifiers)

Last Primary Event Next

Begin “Second” Button End

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 19

About Time Zones

Time Zone Definitions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 20

About using Dual Output Video Cards

Air Client Desktop

File Ribbon Tab

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 21

Edit Ribbon Tab

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 22